AVP A1HDCI

Denon-Denon-Stereo-Amplifier-Av-Surround-Pre-Amplifier-Users-Manual-221505 denon-denon-stereo-amplifier-av-surround-pre-amplifier-users-manual-221505

AVP-A1HDCI to the manual 63824ed9-1563-4317-965b-723685d5388b

2015-06-29

: Pdf Avp-A1Hdci AVP-A1HDCI DENOM MANUAIS AV audio_video

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 128 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

AV SURROUND PRE-AMPLIFIER

AVP-A1HDCI

Owner’s Manual

GraphicalUserInterface

Use this manual in combination with the

operating guide displayed on the GUI screen.

GUI Menu Operation (vpage 24)

GUI Menu Map (vpage 25)

Language (vpage 44)

Remote Control Unit Operations (vpage 77)

n SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral

triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of

uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure

that may be of sufﬁcient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric

shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended

to alert the user to the presence of important operating

and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the appliance.

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT

EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1. Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read

before the product is operated.

2. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be

retained for future reference.

3. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating

instructions should be adhered to.

4. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be

followed.

5. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not

use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

6. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product

manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example,

near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement;

or near a swimming pool; and the like.

8. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child

or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand,

tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with

the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should

use a mounting accessory recommended by the

manufacturer.

9. A product and cart combination should be moved

with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and

uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart

combination to overturn.

10. Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation

and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from

overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The

openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa,

rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in

installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided

or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.

11. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of

power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type

of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power

company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized

alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other).

This plug will ﬁt into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature.

If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the

plug. If the plug should still fail to ﬁt, contact your electrician to replace your

obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they

are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against

them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles,

and the point where they exit from the product.

15. Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is

connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded

so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static

charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides

information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting

structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size

of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to

grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. See

Figure A.

16. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm,

or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it

from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will

prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges.

17. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the

vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or

where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside

antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such

power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.

18. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral

convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of ﬁre or electric shock.

19. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product

through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out

parts that could result in a ﬁre or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind

on the product.

20. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or

removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards.

Refer all servicing to qualiﬁed service personnel.

21. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet

and refer servicing to qualiﬁed service personnel under the following

conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

d) If the product does not operate normally by following the operating

instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating

instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a qualiﬁed technician to

restore the product to its normal operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance – this

indicates a need for service.

22. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the

service technician has used replacement parts speciﬁed by the manufacturer

or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in ﬁre, electric shock, or other hazards.

23. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product,

ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the

product is in proper operating condition.

24. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The product should be mounted to a wall or

ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.

25. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as

radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including ampliﬁers) that

produce heat.

FIGURE A

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

AS PER NATIONAL

ELECTRICAL CODE "/5&//"

-&"%*/

8*3&

(306/%

$-".1

&-&$53*$

4&37*$&

&26*1.&/5

"/5&//"

%*4$)"3(&6/*5

/&$4&$5*0/

(306/%*/($0/%6$5034

/&$4&$5*0/

(306/%$-".14

108&34&37*$&(306/%*/(

&-&$530%&4:45&.

/&$"351"35)

/&$/"5*0/"-&-&$53*$"-$0%&

• Avoid high temperatures.

Allow for sufﬁcient heat dispersion when

installed in a rack.

• Eviter des températures élevées.

Tenir compte d’une dispersion de chaleur

sufﬁsante lors de l’installation sur une

étagère.

• Handle the power cord carefully.

Hold the plug when unplugging the cord.

• Manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec

précaution.

Tenir la prise lors du débranchement du

cordon.

• Keep the unit free from moisture, water,

and dust.

• Protéger l’appareil contre l’humidité, l’eau

et la poussière.

• Unplug the power cord when not using the

unit for long periods of time.

• Débrancher le cordon d’alimentation

lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé pendant

de longues périodes.

* (For apparatuses with ventilation holes)

• Do not obstruct the ventilation holes.

• Ne pas obstruer les trous d’aération.

• Do not let foreign objects into the unit.

• Ne pas laisser des objets étrangers dans

l’appareil.

• Do not let insecticides, benzene, and

thinner come in contact with the unit.

• Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides,

du benzène et un diluant avec l’appareil.

• Never disassemble or modify the unit in

any way.

• Ne jamais démonter ou modiﬁer l’appareil

d’une manière ou d’une autre.

n NOTE ON USE / OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L’UTILISATION

FCC Information (For US customers)

1. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION

Product Name: AV Surround Pre-Ampliﬁer

Model Number: AVP-A1HDCI

This product contains FCC ID: BV2- MPGBR052.

This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this

product may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

Denon Electronics (USA), LLC

100 Corporate Drive, Mahwah, NJ 07430-2041

Tel. 201-762-6500 (Main)

2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements.

Modiﬁcation not expressly approved by DENON may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

3. CAUTION

• To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirement, separation distance of at least 20 cm must be

maintained between the antenna of this product and all persons.

• This product and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or

transmitter.

4. NOTE

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15

of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a

residential installation.

This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance

with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee

that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or

television reception, which can be determined by turning the product OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to

correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or an experienced radio/TV technician for

help.

IC Information (For Canadian customers)

1. PRODUCT

This product contains IC 6963A-MPGBR052.

This product complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

APPAREIL

Cet appareil contiens IC 6963A- MPGBR052.

Cet appareil est conforme à la norme CNR-210 du Canada. L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement

aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être

prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le

fonctionnement du dispositif.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

2. CAUTION

To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the

equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that permitted for successful communication.

ATTENTION

Aﬁn de réduire le risque d’interférence aux autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d’antenne et son gain de façon à

ce que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne soit pas supérieure au niveau requis pour l’obtention

d’une communication satisfaisante.

Accessories ·····················································································3

Cautions on Handling ·····································································3

Cautions on Installation ·································································3

About the Remote Control Unit ····················································3

Inserting the Batteries ·······························································3, 4

Operating Range of the Remote Control Unit ································4

Part Names and Functions ····························································4

Front Panel ·················································································4, 5

Display ···························································································5

Rear Panel ······················································································6

Remote Control Unit ······································································7

Preparations ··················································································26

Auto Setup ····················································································26

a Auto Setup ········································································26, 27

Error Messages·······································································28

s Option ·····················································································28

d Parameter Check ····································································28

Contents Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at a Title ····················24

Example of Display of Default Values ········································24

Examples of GUI Screen Displays ···············································24

Example: Browse Menu (Top Menu) ···········································24

Example: Menus with Illustrations (Auto Setup) ··························24

Cursor Position Display ································································24

Operations ·····················································································24

GUI Menu Map ··············································································25

Input Source Selection ·································································45

Settings Related to Playing Input Sources ··························45, 46

a Play ·························································································46

s Auto Preset ·············································································46

d Preset Skip ··············································································46

f Preset Name ···········································································46

g Video ·················································································46, 47

h Input Mode ·············································································47

j Rename···················································································47

k Source Level ···········································································47

l Input Att. ·················································································48

A0 Playback Mode (iPod)······························································48

A1 Assign ···············································································48, 49

A2 Playback Mode········································································49

A3 Still Picture ··············································································49

A4 Antenna Aiming ······································································49

Speaker Setup ··············································································29

a Speaker Conﬁguration·····························································29

s Subwoofer Setup ····································································29

d Distance ··················································································30

f Channel Level ·········································································30

g Crossover Frequency ························································30, 31

h THX Audio Setup·····································································31

j Surround Speaker ···································································31

HDMI Setup ···················································································32

a Color Space ·············································································32

s RGB Range ·············································································32

d Auto Lip Sync ··········································································32

f Audio ·······················································································32

g Monitor Out ············································································32

h HDMI Control ··········································································32

Audio Setup ··················································································33

a EXT. IN Setup··········································································33

s 2ch Direct/Stereo ····································································33

d Downmix Option ·····································································34

f Auto Surround Mode ······························································34

g Manual EQ ··············································································34

Network Setup ·············································································35

a Network Setup ································································35 ~ 38

s Other ·······················································································38

d Network Information ·······························································38

Zone Setup ····················································································39

a ZONE2 ····················································································39

s ZONE3 ····················································································39

d OSD ························································································39

Option Setup ·················································································40

a Pre-out Assign·········································································40

s XLR Out Polarity······································································41

d POA Setting ············································································41

f Volume Control ·······································································41

g Source Delete ·········································································41

h GUI ····················································································41, 42

j Quick Select Name ·································································42

k Trigger Out 1 ···········································································42

l Trigger Out 2 ···········································································42

A0 Trigger Out 3 ···········································································42

A1 Trigger Out 4 ···········································································42

A2 Transducer Setup ····································································42

A3 Digital Out ···············································································43

A4 Remote ID···············································································43

A5 2Way Remote ·········································································43

A6 Dimmer ···················································································43

A7 Setup Lock ··············································································43

A8 Maintenance Mode ·································································43

A9 Firmware Update ····································································43

S0 Add New Feature ····································································44

Language ·······················································································44

Preparations ····················································································8

Cables Used for Connections ························································8

Video Conversion Function ····························································9

Speaker Layout ···········································································10

Connecting to the Power Amp ····················································10

POA-A1HDCI Connection and Operation ·····························10 ~ 12

Connecting Equipment with HDMI connectors ···················12, 13

Connecting the Monitor ·······························································13

Connecting the Playback Components ······································13

DVD Player ···················································································13

Record Player ···············································································14

CD Player ·····················································································14

iPod® ···························································································· 14

TV/CABLE Tuner ··········································································15

Satellite Receiver ·········································································15

Connecting the Recording Components ····································16

Digital Video Recorder ·································································16

Video Cassette Recorder ·····························································17

CD Recorder / MD Recorder / Tape Deck ···································· 17

Connections to Other Devices ·····················································18

Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector ··············18

Video Camera / Game Console ····················································18

Component with Multi-channel Output connectors ·····················18

USB Port ······················································································19

XM Connector ·············································································· 19

Antenna terminals ·······································································20

Network Audio ·············································································21

Multi Zone ····················································································22

External Controller ·······································································23

Connecting the Power Cord ························································23

Once Connections are Completed ··············································23

Getting Started

Auto Setup

GUI Menu Operations

Manual Setup

Source Select

Connections



Troubleshooting ······························································ 103 ~ 107

Speciﬁcations ··············································································108

Other Information ······························································ 88 ~ 102

List of preset codes ··········································· End of this manual

Main Remote Control Unit ··························································77

Operating DENON Audio Components ········································77

Presetting ·····················································································77

Operating Preset Components ············································77 ~ 79

Setting the Remote ID ·································································80

Learning Function ········································································80

System Call Function ···································································81

Punch Through Function ······························································81

Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit ······································ 82

Adjusting the Backlight’s Brightness ···········································82

Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit ····································82

Sub Remote Control Unit Operations ··································83, 84

Switching Zones ··········································································85

Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit

is Used (ZONE SELECT LOCK Mode) ··········································85

Setting the Remote ID ·································································85

Resetting the Settings ·································································85

Preparations ··················································································58

Turning the Power On ··································································58

Operations During Playback ························································· 58

Playing Video and Audio Equipment ··········································58

Basic Operation ············································································58

Listening to FM/AM Broadcasts ·················································59

Basic Operation ············································································59

Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Memory) ·································59

Listening to Preset Stations ··················································· 59, 60

RDS (Radio Data System) ····························································60

RDS Search ··················································································60

PTY Search ···················································································60

TP Search ·····················································································61

RT (Radio Text) ·············································································61

Listening to XM Satellite Radio Programs ·································61

Basic Operation ············································································62

Checking the XM Signal Strength and Radio ID ···························62

Searching Categories ···································································62

Accessing XM Radio Channels Directly ·······································62

Listening to HD Radio™ Stations ···············································63

Basic Operation ············································································63

Selecting Audio Programs ····························································64

Check the HD Radio Reception Information ································64

iPod® Playback ·············································································64

Basic Operation ············································································64

Listening to Music ·······································································65

Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the iPod ································65

Playing Network Audio,

USB Memory Devices or Rhapsody ············································66

Basic Operation ············································································67

Listening to Internet Radio ···························································68

Playing Files Stored on a Computer ············································· 69

Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices ······················69, 70

Listening to Rhapsody ·································································70

Operating the AVP-A1HDCI

Using a Browser (Web control) ·············································· 71, 72

Multi-Zone Connections ······························································86

Multi-Zone Operations ·································································87

Turning the Power On and Off ·····················································87

Selecting the Input Source ···························································87

Adjusting the Volume ···································································87

Turning off the Sound Temporarily ··············································87

Audio ·····························································································52

a Surround Parameters ······················································52 ~ 54

s Tone ·················································································· 54, 55

d Room EQ ················································································55

f Dynamic EQ ············································································55

g RESTORER ·············································································55

h Night Mode ·············································································55

j Audio Delay ·············································································56

Picture Adjust ···············································································56

a Contrast ··················································································56

s Brightness ···············································································56

d Chroma Level ··········································································56

f Hue ·························································································56

g DNR ························································································56

h Enhancer ·················································································56

j Sharpness ···············································································56

Status ····························································································56

a MAIN ZONE ············································································56

s ZONE2/3/4 ··············································································56

Audio Input Signal ········································································57

HDMI Information ·········································································57

a Signal Information ···································································57

s Monitor1 ·················································································57

d Monitor2 ·················································································57

Auto Surround Mode ···································································57

Quick Select ··················································································57

Preset Station ···············································································57

Parameter

Information

Playback Remote Control Unit Operations

Multi-Zone Connections and Operations

HOME THX CINEMA ·····································································50

Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources ····································· 50

Playing Multi-channel Sources (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.) ·············50

Standard Playback ········································································50

Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources ····································· 50

Playing Multi-channel Sources (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.) ·············51

Dolby Headphone ········································································51

DSP Simulation Playback ····························································51

Stereo Playback ············································································ 51

Direct Playback ·············································································52

Playback in the PURE DIRECT Mode ···········································52

Surround Mode

Other Operations ·······································································72

Playing Super Audio CD ·······························································72

Recording on an External Device (REC OUT mode) ····················73

Convenient Functions ··································································74

HDMI Control Function ································································74

Channel Level ··············································································75

Fader Function ·············································································75

Quick Select Function ··································································75

Personal Memory Plus Function ··················································75

Last Function Memory ·································································76

Backup Memory ···········································································76

Resetting the Microprocessor ·····················································76

Other Operations and Functions





Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

In addition to the AVP-A1HDCI, the included main remote control unit

(RC-1067) can also be used to operate the equipment listed below.

q DENON system components

w Non-DENON system components

• By setting the preset memory (vpage 77 ~ 79)

• By using the learn function (vpage 80)

q Lift the clasp and remove the rear lid.

e Put the rear cover back on.

(RC-1067) (RC-1070)

LR6/AA

R03/AAA

w Load the two batteries properly as indicated by the marks in the

battery compartment.

About the Remote Control Unit

Inserting the Batteries

• Before turning the power switch on

Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are

no problems with the connection cables.

• Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit is

set to the standby mode. When traveling or leaving home for long

periods of time, be sure to unplug the power cord from the power

outlet.

• About condensation

If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of

the unit and the surroundings, condensation (dew) may form on

the operating parts inside the unit, causing the unit not to operate

properly.

If this happens, let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power

turned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature

before using the unit.

• Cautions on using mobile phones

Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise. If so, move

the mobile phone away from this unit when it is in use.

• Moving the unit

Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power

outlet.

Next, disconnect the connection cables to other system units before

moving the unit.

• Note that the illustrations in these instructions may differ from the

actual unit for explanation purposes.

• Light Emitting Diodes (LED) are used in the AVP-A1HDCI circuit.

When powered on, a green light shows inside part of the AVP-

A1HDCI, however this is not a fault.

Note:

For proper heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a conﬁned

space, such as a bookcase or similar enclosure.

b Note

Wall

Cautions on Handling

Cautions on Installation

Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.

q Owner’s manual ...................................................................... 1

w Warranty (for North America model only) ................................ 1

e Service station list ................................................................... 1

r Power cord (Cord length: Approx. 5 ft /1.5 m) ........................ 1

t Main remote control (RC-1067) ............................................... 1

y LR6/AA batteries (for RC-1067) ............................................... 2

u Sub remote control (RC-1070) ................................................. 1

i R03/AAA batteries (for RC-1070) ............................................. 2

o FM indoor antenna .................................................................. 1

Q0 AM loop antenna (small, for AM broadcasts) .......................... 1

Q1 AM loop antenna (large, for HD Radio broadcasts) ................. 1

Q2 Dipole antenna (for HD Radio broadcasts) .............................. 1

Q3 Rod antenna for wireless LAN connection .............................. 1

Q4 Setup microphone (Cord length: Approx. 7.6 m) ..................... 1

r t u

Q4Q3

Thank you for purchasing this DENON product. To ensure proper

operation, please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the

product.

After reading them, be sure to keep them for future reference.

Getting Started

Accessories



Getting Started



Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).

q w e r t

yioQ0 u

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4

Part Names and Functions

Front Panel

q Power operation button (ON/STANDBY) ·····························(58)

w Power indicator ·······································································(58)

e Power switch (hON jOFF) ··················································(58)

r Door ····························································································(5)

t QUICK SELECT buttons / indicators ······································(75)

y MASTER VOLUME control knob ············································(58)

u Master volume indicator

i Display ························································································(5)

o Remote control sensor ·····························································(4)

Q0 SOURCE SELECT knob ···························································(45)

Q1 SOURCE button ·······································································(45)

Q2 TUNING PRESET button ·························································(59)

Q3 ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT button ····································(73, 87)

Q4 VIDEO SELECT button ····························································(46)

30°

Approx. 7 m

(RC-1067)

(RC-1070)

NOTE

• Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate

even when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit.

• The supplied batteries are only for verifying operation.

• When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper direction,

following the “q” and “w” marks in the battery compartment.

• To prevent damage or leakage of battery ﬂuid:

• Do not use a new battery together with an old one.

• Do not use two different types of batteries.

• Do not attempt to charge dry batteries.

• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or dispose of batteries in

ﬂames.

• If the battery ﬂuid should leak, carefully wipe the ﬂuid off the inside

of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.

• Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in

use for long periods.

• When replacing the batteries, have the new batteries ready and

insert them as quickly as possible.

Operating Range of the Remote Control

Unit

Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.

NOTE

The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not

operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight,

strong artiﬁcial light from an inverter type ﬂuorescent lamp or infrared

light.



Getting Started

Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

uQ4Q8Q9 o iQ1Q0Q6 Q2

Q3Q5Q7 y

wq e r

q Input signal indicators

w Input signal channel indicators

These light when digital signals are input.

e Information display

The input source name, surround mode, setting

values and other information are displayed

here.

r Output signal channel indicators

t Surround speaker indicators

These light according to the settings of the

surround A and B speakers.

y Monitor output indicators

These light according to the HDMI monitor

output setting. When set to “Auto (Dual)”, the

indicators light according to the connection

status.

u Master volume indicator

i AUDYSSEY DYNAMIC EQ indicator

This lights when the Dynamic EQ is selected.

o AUDYSSEY MULTEQ XT indicator

This lights when the room equalizer is selected.

Q0 Recording output source indicator

This lights when the REC OUT mode is

selected.

Q1 NIGHT indicator

This lights when the night mode is selected.

Q2 Multi zone indicators

These light when the power for the respective

zone is turned on.

Q3 RESTORER indicator

This lights when the RESTORER mode is

selected.

Q4 ADVANCED AL24 indicator

This lights when Advanced AL24 Processing is

activated (vpage 92).

Q5 D.LINK indicator

This lights when playing using DENON LINK

connections.

Q6 Input mode indicators

Q7 HDMI indicator

This lights when playing using HDMI

connections.

Q8 Decoder indicators

These light when the respective decoders are

operating.

Q9 Tuner reception mode indicators

These light according to the reception conditions

when the input source is set to “TUNER” or

“HD Radio”.

• AUTO

This lights when in the auto tuning mode.

• RDS

These light when receiving RDS broadcasts.

• STEREO

In the FM mode, this lights when receiving

analog stereo broadcasts.

• TUNED

This lights when the broadcast is properly tuned

in.

Display

q DIRECT/STEREO button ···························· (51)

w Headphones jack (PHONES) ················ (58, 73)

e CINEMA button ·········································· (50)

r RESTORER button ······································ (55)

t MUSIC button ············································· (50)

y NIGHT button ············································· (55)

u MENU button ·············································· (24)

i CH SEL / ENTER button ······················· (24, 75)

o RETURN button ·········································· (24)

Q0 V.AUX INPUT connectors ·························· (18)

Q1 ROOM EQ button ······································· (55)

Q2 SETUP MIC jack ·········································· (26)

Q3 DYNAMIC EQ button ·································· (55)

Q4 STATUS button ·········································· (57)

Q5 DIMMER button ·········································· (43)

q w er t y u i o Q0 Q1 Q2

Q3Q4Q5Q6Q7Q8Q9W0W1W2W3W4W5W6W7W8W9

GWith the door openH

Q6 SCALE button ············································· (47)

Q7 USB port ······················································ (19)

Q8 ZONE4 ON/OFF button ······························ (87)

Q9 ZONE3 ON/OFF button ······························ (87)

W0 ZONE2 ON/OFF button ······························ (87)

W1 AUDIO DELAY button ································ (56)

W2 Cursor buttons (uio p) ·························· (24)

W3 GAME button ·············································· (50)

W4 INPUT MODE button ·································· (47)

W5 7CH STEREO button ··································· (51)

W6 DSP SIMULATION button ·························· (51)

W7 HOME THX CINEMA button ······················ (50)

W8 STANDARD button ····································· (51)

W9 PURE DIRECT button ································· (52)



Getting Started

Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

W1 i W0

W2W3 W4

Q9 Q8 Q7 Q6 Q5 Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1Q0 o i

w e r t y u

q CONTROL LINK connector ························· (11)

w RS-232C connector ····································· (23)

e Analog audio connectors (AUDIO) ··········· (14)

r RCA PRE OUT connectors ··················· (11, 22)

t EXT. IN connectors ····································· (18)

y AC inlet (AC IN) ··········································· (23)

u AC OUTLETS ··············································· (23)

i XLR PRE OUT connectors ·························· (11)

o HD Radio antenna terminals

(DTU ANTENNA) ········································ (20)

Q0 COMPONENT VIDEO connectors ········ (13, 22)

Q1 Digital audio connectors

(OPTICAL / COAXIAL / BNC) ··············· (13, 22)

Q2 HDMI connectors ········································ (12)

Q3 ETHERNET connector ································ (21)

Q4 USB port ······················································ (19)

Q5 XM connector (SAT TU) ····························· (19)

Q6 WLAN ANTENNA terminal ························ (21)

Q7 FM/AM antenna terminals

(TUNER ANTENNA) ···································· (20)

Q8 DENON LINK connector ····························· (18)

Rear Panel

Q9 TRIGGER OUT jacks ··································· (23)

W0 REMOTE CONTROL jacks ·························· (22)

W1 XLR audio connectors (CD) ······················· (14)

W2 DOCK CONTROL jack ································· (14)

W3 SIGNAL GND terminal ······························· (14)

W4 VIDEO / S-VIDEO connectors ···················· (13)



Getting Started



Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

q Signal transmission indicator ··················· (77)

w Mode select buttons ·································· (77)

e Quick select / System call buttons ····· (75, 81)

r Surround mode buttons ····················(50 ~ 52)

t System buttons ···································· (78, 79)

y Audio delay button (A. DL) ························ (56)

u Tuner system buttons ·························· (59, 79)

i Input mode button (INPUT) ······················· (47)

o MENU button ·············································· (24)

Q0 Cursor buttons (uio p) ························· (24)

Q1 Parameter / Search button

(PARA / SRCH) ·························· (52, 60, 62, 65)

Q2 Monitor select (M. SEL) /

HOME button ········································ (32, 77)

Q3 Channel buttons (CH) ····················· (59, 65, 78)

Q4 Input source select /

Number buttons ··································· (45, 58)

Q5 Remote control signal transmitter ············· (4)

Q6 Device select indicators (DEV1 / DEV2) ··· (77)

Q7 ZONE3 / ZONE4 select indicators

(Z3 / Z4) ······················································· (87)

Q8 RESTORER button (RSTR) ························· (55)

Q9 Night button (NGT) ···································· (55)

W0 Test tone button (TEST) ···························· (30)

W1 Surround speaker select button (SPKR) ···· (31)

W2 POWER buttons ·········································· (58)

W3 Channel select (CH SEL) /

ENTER button ······································· (24, 75)

W4 Return button (RTN) ·································· (24)

W5 Master volume control buttons (VOL) ····· (58)

W6 Muting button (MUTE) ························ (58, 87)

W7 Main remote control unit setup button

(RC SETUP) ················································· (77)

q ZONE indicators ········································· (85)

w Advanced setup button ····························· (85)

e Input source select buttons ······················· (45)

r CHANNEL buttons ································ (65, 84)

t SHIFT button ··············································· (59)

y MENU button ·············································· (24)

u Cursor buttons (uio p) ························· (24)

i SEARCH button ······························ (60, 62, 65)

o REPEAT button ··········································· (65)

Q0 RANDOM button ········································ (65)

Q1 Remote control signal transmitter ············· (4)

Q2 ZONE SELECT button ································ (85)

Q3 Zone power on/off buttons

(ZONE ON / ZONE OFF) ····························· (87)

Q4 Master volume control buttons

(VOLUME) ·················································· (58)

Q5 Muting button (MUTE) ························ (58, 87)

Q6 ENTER button ············································· (24)

Q7 RETURN button ·········································· (24)

Q8 System buttons ······························ (59, 83, 84)

Q9 ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES

(DIRECT PLAY) button ······························ (83)

W0 USB (DIRECT PLAY) button ······················· (83)

n Main remote control unit (RC-1067) n Sub remote control unit (RC-1070)

The time for which the backlight stays on can

be changed (vpage 82 “Setting the Time the

Backlight Stays Lit”).

Remote Control Unit

NOTE

The ZONE2 mode QUICK SELECT (1 ~ 3), A. DL,

RSTR, NGT, INPUT, SPKR, TEST and surround

mode buttons cannot be used.

NOTE

The AUX-1, AUX-2, AUX-3 and OPTION buttons

cannot be used.

Getting Started



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Audio cables Video cables

Coaxial digital connections

(Orange)

Coaxial digital (75 Ω/ohms pin-plug) cable

Optical digital connections

Optical cable

BNC digital connections

BNC (75 Ω/ohms) cable

Analog connections (XLR)

Balanced cable

Analog connections (stereo, RCA)

(White)

(Red)

Stereo pin-plug cable

Analog connections (monaural, for subwoofer)

(Black)

Pin-plug cable

DENON LINK connections

DENON LINK cable

Network connections (wired LAN)

Ethernet cable

Component video connections

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

(Y)

(PB/CB)

(PR/CR)

Component video cable

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

(Y)

(PB/CB)

(PR/CR)

BNC (75 Ω/ohms) cable

S-Video connections

S-Video cable

Video connections

(Yellow)

75 Ω/ohms pin-plug video cable

Audio and video cables

HDMI connections

19-pin HDMI cable

Signal direction

Audio signal: Video signal:

Output

Input

Output

Input

Output

Connections

NOTE

• Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been

completed.

• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of

the other components.

• Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with left,

right with right).

• Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing

so can result in humming or noise.

Connections for all compatible audio and video signal formats are

described in these operating instructions. Please select the types

of connections suited for the equipment you are connecting.

With some types of connections, certain settings must be made

on the AVP-A1HDCI. For details, refer to the instructions for the

respective connection items below.

Cables Used for Connections

Select the cables according to the equipment being connected.

Preparations

Connections



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

GFlow of video signals for ZONE2H

• This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to the AVP-A1HDCI into the

format used to output the video signals from the AVP-A1HDCI to a monitor.

• The AVP-A1HDCI’s video input/output circuitry is compatible with the following four types of video

signals:

Digital video signals: HDMI

Analog video signals: Component video, S-Video and Video

Video Conversion Function

GFlow of video signals inside the AVP-A1HDCIH

MAIN ZONE

High picture

quality playback HDMI connector

Component video

connectors

S-Video connector

Video connector

Monitor

HDMI connector

Component video

connectors

S-Video connector

Video connector

Video inputs Video outputs

: When 480i/576i signals are input

Component video

connectors

S-Video connector

Video connector

Component video

connectors

Video connector

Video inputs Video outputs

ZONE2

NOTE

• For optimum video performance, THX recommends that you set the conversion mode to “OFF” to use

video signals pass through system without up conversion.

Example: View video input from a component video on the component video monitor.

• HDMI signals cannot be converted into analog signals.

• 1080p component input video signals cannot be output to anything other than component video

connectors.

• 480p/576p, 1080i and 720p component video input signals cannot be converted into S-Video or Video

format.

• When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video

conversion function might not operate.

• When not using this function, connect a monitor output with the same type of connector as the video

input connector.

• The resolution of the HDMI input-compatible monitor connected to the AVP-A1HDCI can be checked at

GUI menu “Information” – “HDMI Information” – “Monitor1” or “Monitor2” (vpage 57).

High picture

quality playback

ZONE2

monitor

GFlow of video signals for ZONE3H

S-Video connector

Video connector Video connector

Video inputs Video outputs

ZONE3

High picture

quality playback ZONE3

monitor

S-Video connector

: When 480i/576i signals are input

Connections

0

Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

The illustration below shows a basic example of installation of the ampliﬁer combined with 8 speakers and

a monitor.

Speaker Layout

Subwoofer Center speaker

Surround speakers

Front speakers

Place the front speakers to the

sides of the monitor or screen and

as ﬂush with the screen surface as

possible.

Surround back speakers

The table below shows a typical speaker conﬁguration for the AVP-A1HDCI.

FRONT CENTER

SURROUND

BSURROUND BACK SUBWOOFER

(b)

L R L R L R L R 1 only

9.1-channels S S S S S S S S S –S

7.1-channels S S S S S – – S S –S

6.1-channels S S S S S – – – – S S

5.1-channels S S S S S – – – – – S

3.1-channels S S S – – – – – – – S

2.1-channels S S – – – – – – – – S

2-channels S S – – – – – – – – –

Two surround back speakers are required to use the THX Ultra2 Cinema,THX Music mode and THX Games

mode.

Set the surround back speakers so that the distance to the listening position is the same for both the left

and right speakers. It is also recommended that the deviations of the distance from the listening position

to L and R channel speakers (front left (FL) and front right (FR), surround left (SL) and surround right (SR),

surround back left (SBL) and surround back right (SBR)) is less than 2 ft (60 cm).

b The AVP-A1HDCI can be connected to a maximum of 3 subwoofers.

• For instructions for connecting speakers, please refer to the POA-A1HDCI owner’s manual.

• When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (SBL).

• Connect the AVP-A1HDCI pre-out terminal to the power amp (sold separately).

• AVP-A1HDCI has a RCA pre-out terminal and XLR pre-out terminal. Connect accordingly with the power

amp you want to use.

• The polarity of the XLR pre-out terminal can be switched using GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option

Setup” – “XLR Out Polarity” (vpage 41).

• Connect the speakers to the power amp.

• Refer to the owner’s manual of each piece of equipment when making connections.

POA-A1HDCI Connection and Operation

• When connecting the AVP-A1HDCI to the power amp POA-A1HDCI with a control link cable (included

with the POA-A1HDCI), you can perform the following control operations.

• POA-A1HDCI channel input selection and power amp settings

• Link POA-A1HDCI to AVP-A1HDCI On/Standby control

• Link POA-A1HDCI meter operation to AVP-A1HDCI display on/off control (vpage 43)

• Updating POA-A1HDCI ﬁrmware (vpage 43)

• Up to 2 POA-A1HDCI units can be connected. Refer to the POA-A1HDCI owner's manual for making

connections and POA-A1HDCI settings.

Connecting to the Power Amp

Connections



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

(R) (L) (L) (L)

(R)

*/ */

(L)

(R) (R)

w q

w qw q

w q

w qw qw q

w q

Front

speaker (R)

Center

speaker

Subwoofer 1

Subwoofer

with built-in

ampliﬁer

Surround

speaker-

B (R)

Surround

speaker-

A (R)

b L : Left

R : Right

Front

speaker (L)

Surround

back

speaker

(R)

Surround

speaker-

A (L)

Surround

speaker-

B (L)

Surround

back

speaker

(L)

Subwoofer 2 Subwoofer 3

AVP-A1HDCI

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

SPEAKERS

XLR

RCA

(R) (L) (L) (L)

(R)

*/ */

(L)

(R) (R)

w q

w qw q

w q

w qw qw q

w q

Subwoofer 3

Subwoofer with

built-in ampliﬁer

b L : Left

R : Right

Subwoofer 2 Subwoofer 1

The default AVP-A1HDCI balance model XLR pre-out terminal pin alignment is as shown.

q : GROUND w : HOT e : COLD

Connections

n Connecting the RCA pre-out terminal (Example : 9.3-channels)

n Connecting the XLR pre-out terminal (Example : 9.3-channels)

When using Subwoofer 2 or 3, set GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Speaker Setup” – “Subwoofer

Setup” (vpage 29).

POA-A1HDCI

AVP-A1HDCI

Front

speaker (R)

Center

speaker

Surround

speaker-

B (R)

Surround

speaker-

A (R)

Front

speaker (L)

Surround

back

speaker

(R)

Surround

speaker-

A (L)

Surround

speaker-

B (L)

Surround

back

speaker

(L)

POA-A1HDCI

Connections



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred

with a single cable.

065

)%.*

Compatible audio

format Details Discs

(examples)

2-channel linear PCM 2ch 32-192 kHz

16/20/24 bits

CD, DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio

Multi-channel linear

PCM

8ch 32-192 kHz

16/20/24 bits DVD-Audio

Dolby Digital, DTS Bitstream DVD-Video

DSD

2/5.1ch

2.8224 MHz

1 bit

SACD

Dolby Digital Plus,

Dolby TrueHD,

DTS-HD

Bitstream HD DVD,

Blu-ray Disc

Monitor

DVD

player

b The AVP-A1HDCI is supported to the feature of HDMI listed below.

• 30 and 36 bit Deep Color

• xvYCC

• Auto Lipsync Correction

In order to play the digital video and audio signals of a DVD- Video or

DVD-Audio disc using HDMI/DVI connections, both the connected

DVD player and monitor must be equipped for a copyright protection

system called “HDCP” (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).

HDCP is a copy protection technology consisting of data encoding

and mutual identiﬁcation of the devices.

The AVP-A1HDCI is HDCP-compatible. For details on the DVD player

or monitor you are using, refer to its operating instructions.

When connecting with an HDMI/DVI converter cable

(adapter)

• HDMI video signals are theoretically compatible with the DVI

format.

When connecting to a monitor, etc., equipped with a DVI-D

connector, connection is possible using an HDMI/DVI converter

cable, but depending on the combination of components in some

cases the video signals will not be output.

• When connecting using an HDMI/DVI converter adapter, the video

signals may not be output properly due to poor connections with

the connected cable, etc.

• By default, HDMI sound is output from the speaker of the power

amp connected to AVP-A1HDCI.

• To output the sound from the TV, make the settings at GUI menu

“Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” – “TV” (vpage 32).

Connecting Equipment with HDMI

connectors

Operations

1Connect AVP-A1HDCI and POA-A1HDCI with the

control link cable.

b The control link cable is included with the POA-A1HDCI.

b AVP-A1HDCI can be connected and control to up to 2 POA-

A1HDCI units.

Refer to the POA-A1HDCI user’s manual for how to connect.

2Set the POA-A1HDCI’s control selector switch to

“AVP”.

3Set the POA-A1HDCI’s mode select switch according

to the number of POA-A1HDCI units you are

connecting.

When connecting 1 unit : “1”

When connecting 2 units : 1st unit “1”, 2nd unit “2”

b Refer to the POA-A1HDCI owner’s manual for details.

4Switch the AVP-A1HDCI and POA-A1HDCI power

on.

5Depending on the number of POA-A1HDCI units to

be connected, set GUI menu “Option Setup” – “POA

Setting” – “POA LINK” to either “ON (Single)” or

“ON (Dual)” (vpage 41).

6Use GUI menu “Option Setup” – “POA Setting”

– “LINK Check” to check the connection.

Connections



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

• Connect the cables to be used (vpage 9 “Video Conversion

Function”).

• With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be

transferred with a single cable.

• To output the audio signals to the monitor with HDMI connections,

set GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” to “TV”

(vpage 32).

Connecting the Monitor

47*%&0

7*%&0

$0.10/&/57*%&0

: 1#13

7*%&0

)%.*

*/ */

Monitor

Connecting the Playback Components

NOTE

• The component video connectors may be indicated differently on

your monitor. For details, see the monitor’s operating instructions.

• The audio signals output from the HDMI connectors are only the

HDMI input signals.

47*%&0

065

"6%*07*%&0

$0.10/&/57*%&0

: 1#13

7*%&0

065 065

"6%*0

$0"9*"-

065

065065

)%.*

Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and

outputs, and be sure to interconnect correctly.

DVD Player

• Connect the cables to be used.

• With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred

with a single cable.

DVD player

• Connect an HDP (High-Deﬁnition Player) in the same way.

• When using an optical cable or a BNC cable for the digital audio

connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “DVD”

– “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 48).

• When using a BNC cable for the component video connection, make

the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “DVD” – “Assign” –

“Component” (vpage 48).

• When the AVP-A1HDCI and DVD player are connected using an

HDMI cable, also connect the AVP-A1HDCI and monitor using an

HDMI cable.

• If the connected monitor or DVD player only has a DVI-D

connector, use an HDMI/DVI converter cable. When using a DVI

cable, no audio signals are transmitted.

• Use a Deep Color compatible cable for connection to Deep Color

compatible devices.

NOTE

• Use a CPPM-compatible DVD player to play DVD-Audio discs that

are copyright-protected by CPPM.

• The audio signals output from the HDMI connector (sampling

frequency, bit rate, etc.) may be restricted by the connected

device.

• Video signals are not output properly when using devices that are

not HDCP-compatible.

• Video signals are not output if the input video signals do not match

the monitor’s resolution. In this case, switch the DVD player’s

resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible.

• If the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio”

setting (vpage 32) is set to “Amp”, the sound may be

interrupted when the monitor’s power is turned off.

• Use a cable on which the HDMI logo is indicated (a certiﬁed HDMI

product) for connection to the HDMI connector. Normal playback

may not be possible when using a cable other than one on which

the HDMI logo is indicated (a non-HDMI-certiﬁed product).

• If the monitor or DVD player does not support Deep Color, Deep

Color signal transfer is not possible.

• If the monitor or DVD player does not support xvYCC, xvYCC

signal transfer is not possible.

• If the monitor does not support “Auto Lipsync Correction”

function, this function will not work.

• The AVP-A1HDCI is compatible with the HDMI’s CEC (Consumer

Electronics Control) function. Please note the following.

• It may not work depending on the device it is connected to and

its setup.

• It does not operate with televisions or players that are not

compatible with HDMI’s CEC.

Connections



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Record Player

• When connecting a record player with an MC cartridge, use a

commercially available MC head ampliﬁer or a step-up transformer.

• Induction humming (a booming sound) may be produced from the

speakers if the volume is raised with no record player connected.

• With some record players, noise may be generated when the ground

wire is connected. If so, disconnect the ground wire.

(/%

"6%*0

065

Turntable (MM cartridge)

NOTE

The AVP-A1HDCI’s SIGNAL GND terminal is meant to reduce noise

when a record player is connected. This is not a safety ground

terminal.

"6%*0

"6%*0 $0"9*"-

065

3-3-

065

9-3

065

CD Player

Connect the cables to be used.

CD player

iPod®

Example :

"4%3

iPod

• When using an optical cable or a BNC cable for the digital audio

connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “CD”

– “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 48).

• The default analog audio input setting is “RCA”. When using a

balanced cable for the analog audio connection, make the settings at

GUI menu “Source Select” – “CD” – “Assign” – “Analog” (vpage

49).

• With the default settings, the iPod can be used connected to the

VCR (iPod) connector.

• To assign the iPod to a connector other than VCR (iPod), make the

settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “(input source to which

iPod dock assigned)” – “Assign” – “iPod dock” (vpage 49).

Use a DENON Control Dock for iPod (ASD-1R, sold separately) to

connect the iPod to the AVP-A1HDCI. For instructions on the Control

Dock for iPod settings, refer to the Control Dock for iPod’s operating

instructions.

NOTE

The default AVP-A1HDCI balance model XLR input connectors pin

alignment is as shown.

q : GROUND

w : HOT

e : COLD

Connections



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

47*%&0

065

"6%*07*%&0

$0.10/&/57*%&0

: 1#13

7*%&0

065 065

"6%*0

065065

015*$"-

TV/CABLE Tuner

Connect the cables to be used.

TV tuner

• When using a coaxial digital cable or a BNC cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at

GUI menu “Source Select” – “TV/CBL” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 48).

• When using a BNC cable for the component video connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source

Select” – “TV/CBL” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 48).

Satellite Receiver

Connect the cables to be used.

47*%&0

065

"6%*07*%&0

$0.10/&/57*%&0

: 1#13

7*%&0

065 065

"6%*0

065

)%.* $0"9*"-

065

DBS / BS tuner

• When using an optical cable or a BNC cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI

menu “Source Select” – “SAT” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 48).

• When using a BNC cable for the component video connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source

Select” – “SAT” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 48).

Connections



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect correctly.

Connecting the Recording Components

Digital Video Recorder

Connect the cables to be used.

47*%&0 47*%&0

3-3-

"6%*0 "6%*07*%&0 7*%&0

*/065

015*$"- 015*$"-

065

"6%*0 "6%*0

065

7*%&0 7*%&0

065 065

)%.*

$0.10/&/57*%&0

: 1#13

065

Digital video recorder

NOTE

• Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVP-

A1HDCI’s OPTICAL2 output connector to any input connector other

than OPTICAL2.

• Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVP-

A1HDCI’s OPTICAL3 output connector to any input connector other

than OPTICAL3.

• Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio

signals.

• When recording to a digital video recorder, it is necessary that the

type of cable used with the playback source equipment be the same

type that is connected to the AVP-A1HDCI DVR-1 OUT connector.

Example: TV IN → S-Video cable : DVR-1 OUT → S-Video cable

TV IN → Video cable : DVR-1 OUT → Video cable

• Connect a DVR-2 in the same way.

• When using a component video cable or a BNC cable for the

component video connection make the settings at GUI menu

“Source Select” – “DVR-1” or “DVR-2” – “Assign” – “Component”

(vpage 48).

Connections



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

47*%&0 47*%&0

3-3-

065

"6%*0 "6%*07*%&0 7*%&0

*/065

015*$"- 015*$"-

065

"6%*0 "6%*07*%&0 7*%&0

065 065

)%.*

Video Cassette Recorder

Connect the cables to be used.

Video cassette recorder

• When recording to a VCR, it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback source equipment

be the same type that is connected to the AVP-A1HDCI VCR OUT connector.

Example: TV IN → S-Video cable : VCR OUT → S-Video cable

TV IN → Video cable : VCR OUT → Video cable

• When using a component video cable or a BNC cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI

menu “Source Select” – “VCR” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 48).

NOTE

Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVP-A1HDCI’s OPTICAL4 output connector

to any input connector other than OPTICAL4.

3-3-

*/ */065

015*$"- 015*$"-

065

"6%*0"6%*0

"6%*0

CD Recorder / MD Recorder / Tape Deck

Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio signals, or digital connections if you wish to

record digital audio signals, depending on the types of connectors on the components being used.

CD recorder / MD recorder /

Tape deck

NOTE

Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVP-A1HDCI’s OPTICAL4 output connector

to any input connector other than OPTICAL4.

Connections



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and

outputs, and be sure to interconnect correctly.

Connections to Other Devices

%&/0/-*/,

"6%*0

Components Equipped with a DENON

LINK connector

Multi-channel playback is possible with DVD-Audio discs, Super

Audio CD, etc.

DVD player

To use with DENON LINK connections, make the settings at GUI menu

“Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Assign” – “Digital” – “DENON

LINK” (vpage 48).

47*%&0

065

"6%*07*%&0

7*%&0

065 065

015*$"-"6%*0

065

Video Camera / Game Console

Video camera / Game console

46#

800'&3

$&/5&3 463306/%

#"$,

463306/%

'30/5

"6%*0

Component with Multi-channel Output

connectors

DVD player / Super Audio CD player /

External decoder

• To play the analog input signals input to the EXT. IN connectors,

press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or INPUT button

on the main remote control unit and select “EXT. IN” or make the

settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Input

Mode” – “Input Mode” – “EXT. IN” (vpage 47).

• The video signal can be connected in the same way as a DVD player

(vpage 13).

• To play copyright-protected discs, connect the AVP-A1HDCI’s EXT.

IN connector with the DVD player’s analog multi-channel output

connector.

Connections



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

USB Port

• In the initial status, USB memory devices can be used by connecting them to the USB port on the front panel.

• To change the port to be used, see “USB Select” on page 49.

• For instructions on playing the ﬁles on a USB memory device, see page 69, 70.

NOTE

• Set to the USB port you want to use.

• The AVP-A1HDCI is equipped with two USB ports, one each on the front and rear panels. It is not possible to use the set with USB memory

devices connected to both the ports at the same time. Select the USB port you want to use at the GUI menu “Source Select” – “NET/USB”

– “Playback Mode” – “USB Select”.

• Do not use the extension cable for connecting the USB memory deveice to the AVP-A1HDCI’s USB port.

Use of the extension cable may cause harmful interference.

n Front panel n Rear panel

USB memory device USB memory device

NOTE

Keep the power cord unplugged until the XM Mini-Tuner and Home

Dock connection have been completed.

XM Connector

• The AVP-A1HDCI is an XM Ready® receiver. You can receive XM®

Satellite Radio by connecting to the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock

(includes home antenna, each sold separately) and subscribing to the

XM service.

• Plug the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock into the XM connector on

the rear panel.

• Position the Home Dock antenna near a south-facing window to

receive the best signal.

For details, see “Listening to XM Satellite Radio Programs” (vpage

61).

When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of

the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.

XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock

• The XM name and related logo are registered trademarks of XM

• XM Ready is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. All

rights reserved.

Connections

0

Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Antenna terminals

An F-type FM antenna cable plug can be connected directly.

AM/FM

Direction of broadcasting station

AM loop antenna

(small, supplied)

FM antenna

75 Ω/ohms

Coaxial cable

FM indoor

antenna

(supplied)

Ground

AM outdoor antenna

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC

which provides guidelines for proper grounding

and, in particular, speciﬁes that the cable ground

shall be connected to the grounding system of

the building, as close to the point of cable entry

as practical.

AM loop antenna assembly

Remove the vinyl tie and take

out the connection line.

Connect to the AM

antenna terminals.

Bend in the reverse direction.

a. With the antenna on top of

any stable surface.

Mount

b. With the antenna attached

to a wall.

Installation hole Mount on wall, etc.

HD Radio™ broadcast

HD Radio broadcast is a service that is only available within the United States.

Direction of broadcasting station

FM antenna

75 Ω/ohms

Coaxial cable

FM indoor antenna

(dipole, for HD Radio

broadcasting, supplied)

Ground

AM outdoor antenna

AM loop antenna

(large, for HD Radio broadcasting, supplied)

• To prevent interference, install at least 3.3 feet/

1 m away from the antenna connected to the

AVP-A1HDCI’s other AM tuner terminal.

Connection of AM antennas

1. Push the

lever.

2. Insert the

conductor.

3. Return the

lever.

NOTE

• Do not connect two FM antennas

simultaneously.

• Even if an external AM antenna is used, do not

disconnect the AM loop antenna.

• Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do

not touch metal parts of the panel.

(White)

(Black)

(White)

Connections



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Network Audio

[Wired LAN]

[Wireless LAN]

To WAN side

Internet

Router

Computer

To LAN port

To WAN side

Internet Modem

Router with access point

Computer

LAN port/Ethernet

connector

Rod antenna

(supplied)

Modem

Required system

n Broadband Internet connection

A broadband line connection to the Internet is required in order to

use the AVP-A1HDCI’s Internet radio function and ﬁrmware update.

n Modem

This is a device that is connected to the broadband line to communicate

with the Internet. Some are integrated with the router.

n Router

• When using the AVP-A1HDCI, we recommend you use a router

equipped with the following functions:

· Built-in DHCP (Dynamic Host Conﬁguration Protocol) server

This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.

· Built-in 100BASE-TX switch

When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching

hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.

• When using with a wireless LAN, prepare a broadband router with

built-in access point.

n Ethernet cable (CAT-5 or greater recommended)

Use for wired LAN.

• The AVP-A1HDCI does not come with an Ethernet cable.

• Some ﬂat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise.

We recommend using a normal type cable.

• If the sound is broken in an environment in which there is much

power supply noise from electric products or in a noisy network

environment, use a shielded type Ethernet cable.

n Computer

A computer with the following speciﬁcations is required to use a

media server:

• OS

Windows® XP Service Pack2, Windows Vista

• Software (Prepare one of the following.)

· .NET Framework 1.1 and Windows Media Connect (Windows XP)

· Windows Media Player ver.11

· DLNA-compatible server software

• Internet browser

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later

• LAN port

• 300 MB or more free disk space

b Free disk space is required to store music and video ﬁles. The

following sizes are approximate.

Format Bit rate Per minute Per hour

MP3 / WMA

MPEG-4 AAC

128 kbps Approx. 1 MB Approx. 60 MB

192 kbps Approx. 1.5 MB Approx. 90 MB

256 kbps Approx. 2 MB Approx. 120 MB

392 kbps Approx. 3 MB Approx. 180 MB

WAV (LPCM) 1400 kbps Approx. 10 MB Approx. 600 MB

FLAC 1080 kbps Approx. 7.7 MB Approx. 464 MB

NOTE

• A contract with an ISP is required to connect to the Internet.

No additional contract is needed if you already have a broadband

connection to the Internet.

• The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact an

ISP or a computer shop for details.

• Depending on the server, video ﬁles may be displayed, but they

cannot be played on the AVP-A1HDCI.

For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service

Provider) or a computer shop.

n Others

• If you have an Internet provider contract for a line on which

network settings are made manually, make the settings at GUI

menu “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” (vpage 35 ~ 38).

• With the AVP-A1HDCI, it is possible to use the DHCP and Auto IP

functions to make the network settings automatically.

• When using a broadband router (DHCP function), the AVP-A1HDCI

sets the IP address, etc., automatically.

When using the AVP-A1HDCI connected to a network with no

DHCP function, make the settings for the IP address, etc., at GUI

menu “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” (vpage 35 ~ 38).

• The AVP-A1HDCI is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE-

compatible router is required if you have a contract for a line of the

type with which the PPPoE is set.

• Depending on the ISP with which you have your contract, it may

be necessary to make proxy server settings to use the Internet

radio function. If you made proxy server settings on the computer

to connect to the Internet, make the proxy server settings on the

AVP-A1HDCI in the same way.

Turn clockwise.

Connections



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Multi Zone

ZONE2 or ZONE3 Pre-out Connections

• If another power ampliﬁer or pre-main (integrated) ampliﬁer is connected, the ZONE2 or ZONE3 pre-out

(variable or ﬁxed level) connectors can be used to play a different program source in ZONE2 or ZONE3

the same time (vpage 86, 87).

• To the monitor output of ZONE2, various formats of video signals input by the video conversion function

are automatically converted and output (vpage 9).

• To the monitor output of ZONE3, video signals input from the S video terminal or video terminal is output

(vpage 9).

• The ZONE2 (ZONE3) video out is only for ZONE2 (ZONE3).

"6%*0

*/ */

7*%&0

"6%*0

7*%&0 7*%&0

7*%&0 $0.10/&/57*%&0

: 1#13

47*%&0

"69

065

ZONE2

Power

amplier

Input Output

Infrared

retransmitter

Infrared

sensor Extension jack for future use.

NOTE

• For the audio output, use high quality pin-plug cords so that no induction humming or noise is produced.

• For instructions on installing and operating separately sold devices, refer to the respective devices’

operating instructions.

• To conduct multi-zone playback, see “Multi-Zone Connections and Operations” (vpage 86, 87).

Monitor

"6%*0

*/

015*$"-

"6%*0

*/

015*$"-

Monitor Power

amplier

ZONE3

ZONE2 or ZONE4 Optical Connections

The AVP-A1HDCI is equipped with Optical output connectors for ZONE2 and ZONE4. If a bit-stream amp

is rigged-up, these zones can also be used to enjoy home theater.

AV amplier

(ZONE2)

AV amplier

(ZONE4)

• Connect the monitor for ZONE2 the same as the “ZONE2 or ZONE3 Pre-out Connectors” (vSee left

column).

• If the signal inputted to ZONE2 is analog, change to PCM(2-channel) signal, and output it from ZONE2

optical output connectors.

Connections



Getting Started Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

NOTE

• Insert the AC plugs securely. Incomplete connections could cause noise.

• Only use the AC outlets to plug in audio devices. Do not use them as power supplies for hairdryers or

anything other than audio equipment. In addition, do not connect audio devices such as high electricity

consumption power ampliﬁers (e.g. POA-A1HDCI).

Wait until all connections have been completed before connecting the power cord.

To household

power outlet

(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)

Power cord

(included)

Connection to the AC outlets

• These outlets supply power to external audio

devices.

• The power supplied from this outlets turns on and

off together with the set’s power switch.

• Audio equipment with a total power consumption

of 120 W (1 A) can be connected.

Connecting the Power Cord

Trigger output jacks

The power of an external device equipped with

a trigger input jack can be turned on and off in

association with operations on the AVP-A1HDCI.

For details, see GUI menu “Manual Setup” –

“Option Setup” – “Trigger Out 1”, “Trigger Out 2”,

“Trigger Out 3” or “Trigger Out 4” (vpage 42).

• Output level: 250 mA/12 V

Check the trigger input conditions of the

connected device.

External Controller

• When using in combination with an RF Remote Controller (RC-7000CI, sold separately) and RF Remote

Receiver (RC-7001RCI, sold separately) two-way communication with an RF Remote Controller is possible.

The AVP-A1HDCI’s status information as well as iPod and Internet audio music ﬁles can be browsed

watching the RF Remote Controller’s display. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the

respective devices.

• When used in combination with an RF Remote Controller and RF Remote Receiver, make the settings at

GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “2Way Remote” – “Used” (vpage 42).

• When using the 2-way remote control unit, connect to the Port 1 RS-232C connector.

• If GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “2Way Remote”is set to “Used”, you cannot use port

1 of the RS-232C connector for the external controller.

RS-232C connector

This connector is used for an external controller.

b If you use an external controller to operate

the unit via the RS-232C terminal, you must

confirm the following beforehand.

q Turn on the AVP-A1HDCI’s power.

w Turn off the AVP-A1HDCI’s power from the

external controller.

e AVP-A1HDCI enters the standby status.

Turning the Power On (vpage 58)

Once Connections are Completed

Connections



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Auto Setup

Optimize settings for speakers in use.

Some typical examples are described below.

AUTO SETUP

1 2 3 4 5

Start

RETURN

Pre-out Assign

XLR Out Polarity

Config. 9.1

SW 1SP

STEP1 Speaker Detection

Please place the microphone at ear

height at main listening position.

Start Auto Setup

Enter Cancel

Selected item

name

List of subsequent items

Guidance text for item

at cursor position

Operation step indicators

Illustration

Operation

button guidance

Guidance text for item at cursor

position

Operation guidance text

n Icon

n List

Assign

Input Mode

Video

Rename

Switch the selected item

Selected item

Switch the selected item

Switch to the next item

Selected item

Example of the Display of the GUI

Mark at a Title

Example: Browse Menu (Top Menu)

Examples of GUI Screen Displays

Example: Menus with Illustrations

(Auto Setup)

Cursor Position Display

Operations

The same operation is possible on the main unit or remote control unit.

GUI Menu Operations

With the AVP-A1HDCI, settings and operations for most functions can

be performed by operating while looking at the GUI menus displayed

on the monitor screen.

b Switch the selected item using

ui.

1Press the MENU button.

The GUI menu is displayed.

b To operate from the main remote control unit, be sure to set the

remote control unit to the AMP mode.

2Press the u i p button to select the menu to be set

or operated.

b To return to the previous item, press the o or RETURN button.

3Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.

4Press the MENU button to nish.

Example of Display of Default

Values

[Selectable items] 9.1 7.1 5.1

In lists of selectable items or adjustable ranges, the item

surrounded by a border is the default value.

Items for which this mark is indicated at the title can be operated

from the GUI.

We recommend performing such operations from the GUI.

This is the GUI icon for this setting item or for the menu series to

which this item belongs.

Switch to the next item

The GUI cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component

1080p signal, computer’s resolution (e.g.VGA) are input.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

GUI Menu Map

Parameter

(vpage 52 ~ 56)

Information

(vpage 56, 57)

n Status

• MAIN ZONE

• ZONE2/3/4

n Audio Input Signal

n HDMI Information

n Auto Surround Mode

n Quick Select

n Preset Station

n Audio

• Surround Parameters

· Mode

· Decoder

· Cinema EQ

· DRC

· D.COMP

· LFE

· Center Image

· Panorama

· Dimension

· Center Width

· Delay Time

· Effect

· Effect Level

· Room Size

· AFDM

· SB CH Out

· Input Channel

· Subwoofer Att.

· Subwoofer

· Default

• Tone

· Tone Defeat

· Bass

· Treble

· Front

· Center

· Surround

· Surround Back

· Subwoofer

• Room EQ

• Dynamic EQ

• RESTORER

• Night Mode

• Audio Delay

n Picture Adjust

• Contrast

• Brightness

• Chroma Level

• Hue

• DNR

• Enhancer

• Sharpness

Manual Setup (vpage 29 ~ 44)

n Speaker Setup (vpage 29 ~ 31)

• Speaker Conﬁguration

• Subwoofer Setup

• Distance

• Channel Level

• Crossover Frequency

• THX Audio Setup

• Surround Speaker

n HDMI Setup (vpage 32)

• Color Space

• RGB Range

• Auto Lip Sync

• Audio

• Monitor Out

• HDMI Control

n Audio Setup (vpage 33, 34)

• EXT. IN Setup

· Mode

· Surround Back Input

· Surround Speaker

· Subwoofer Level

· Input Att.

• 2ch Direct/Stereo

• Downmix Option

• Auto Surround Mode

• Manual EQ

Auto Setup (vpage 26 ~ 28)

n Auto Setup

• STEP1: Speaker Detection

• STEP2: Measurement

• STEP3: Calculation

• STEP4: Check

• STEP5: Store

n Option

• Room EQ

• Direct Mode

• Mic Select

n Parameter Check

• Speaker Conﬁguration Check

• Distance Check

• Channel Level Check

• Crossover Check

• EQ Check

• Restore

n Network Setup

(vpage 35 ~ 38)

• Network Setup

• Other

· Power Saving

· Character

· PC Language

· Rhapsody Account

• Network Information

n Zone Setup (vpage 39)

• ZONE2, ZONE3

· Bass

· Treble

· HPF

· Lch Level

· Rch Level

· Channel

· Volume Level

· Volume Limit

· Power On Level

· Mute Level

· Video Convert (ZONE2 only)

• OSD

n Option Setup (vpage 40 ~ 44)

• Pre-out Assign

• XLR Out Polarity

• POA Setting

• Volume Control

· Volume Limit

· Power On Level

· Mute Level

• Source Delete

• GUI

· Screensaver

· Wall Paper

· Format

· Text

· Master Volume

· NET/USB / iPod / Tuner

• Quick Select Name

• Trigger Out 1

• Trigger Out 2

• Trigger Out 3

• Trigger Out 4

• Transducer Setup

• Digital Out

• Remote ID

• 2Way Remote

• Dimmer

• Setup Lock

• Maintenance Mode

• Firmware Update

• Add New Feature

n Language (vpage 44)

Surround Mode

(vpage 50 ~ 52)

n STEREO

n DIRECT

n STANDARD

n DOLBY HEADPHONE

(When using headphones)

n DOLBY PL

x, DOLBY PL

DOLBY PL

n DTS NEO:6

n neural

n HOME THX CINEMA

n 7CH STEREO

n WIDE SCREEN

n SUPER STADIUM

n ROCK ARENA

n JAZZ CLUB

n CLASSIC CONCERT

n MONO

n VIDEO GAME

n MATRIX

When “Screensaver” is set to “ON”, the

screensaver is activated if no operation is

performed for about 3 minutes.

n TUNER (FM/AM)

• Play

• Auto Preset

• Preset Skip

• Preset Name

• Video

· Video Select

· i/p Scaler

· Resolution

• Input Mode

• Rename

• Source Level

n PHONO

• Video

· Video Select

· i/p Scaler

· Resolution

• Input Mode

• Rename

• Source Level

• Input Att.

n CD, DVD, HDP, TV/CBL, SAT, VCR, DVR-1,

DVR-2, V.AUX

• Play (iPod) • Video

• Playback Mode (iPod) · Video Select

• Assign · Video Convert

· HDMI (Excluding CD)

· Digital · i/p Scaler

· Component · Resolution

· Analog · Progressive Mode

(CD only) (Excluding CD)

· iPod dock · Aspect

(Excluding CD)

• Input Mode

• Rename

• Source Level

• Input Att.

n NET/USB

• Play

• Playback Mode

• Still Picture

• Video

· Video Select

· i/p Scaler

· Resolution

• Input Mode

• Rename

• Source Level

n XM

• Play

• Preset Skip

• Antenna Aiming

• Video

· Video Select

· i/p Scaler

· Resolution

• Input Mode

• Rename

• Source Level

n HD Radio

• Play

• Auto Preset

• Preset Skip

• Preset Name

• Video

· Video Select

· i/p Scaler

· Resolution

• Input Mode

• Rename

• Source Level

Source Select (vpage 45 ~ 49)

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Example qExample w

( :Measuring positions)

• Audyssey MultEQ® XT automatically measures the acoustical

problems in the listening environment to create the best audio

experience for your home theater.

• It optimizes a large listening area where one or more listeners are

seated.

Measurements are performed by placing the calibrated microphone

(DM-A505Z) successively at multiple positions throughout the

listening area as shown in Example q. For best results, it is

strongly recommended to measure 6 or more positions so that the

measurements have the proper spatial weighting.

Even if the listening environment is small as shown in Example w,

measuring at multiple points throughout the listening environment

results in more effective correction.

Auto Setup

To make manual adjustments to the settings, see pages 29 ~ 31.

About the main listening position (*M)

The main listening position refers to the most central position where

one would normally sit within the listening environment.

MultEQ XT uses the measurements from this position to calculate

speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value

for the subwoofer.

Preparations

When using a subwoofer, make the following settings before starting

the auto setup procedure:

• Defeat the volume and crossover controls if possible

• If this is not possible then set

• Volume: “12 o’clock” position

• Crossover frequency: “Maximum/Highest Frequency”

• Low pass ﬁlter: “Off”

• Standby mode: “Off”

NOTE

• Do not disconnect the setup microphone until the auto setup

procedure is completed.

• When using headphones, unplug the headphones before starting

the auto setup procedure.

1Connect the included calibrated setup microphone to

the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit.

The “Auto Setup” screen appears automatically.

2Place the microphone at ear height on a tripod or stand

with the microphone pointing directly up towards the

ceiling.

b It is not recommended to hold it in your hand. Be sure that the

path from microphone to the speakers is not blocked by objects.

Avoid placing the microphone close to a seat back or wall as sound

reﬂections may give inaccurate results.

Sound

receptor

Setup

microphone

Auto Setup

Optimize settings for speakers in use.

F Menu tree F

Auto Setup

a Auto Setup

s Option

d Parameter Check

a Auto Setup

The settings are performed automatically.

GAuto setup ﬂowH

STEP1: Speaker Detection

STEP2: Measurement (2 to 8 positions)

STEP3: Calculation

STEP4: Check

STEP5: Store

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Conﬁguration

The speaker system to be measured can be selected ahead of time

here.

[Selectable items] 9.1 z1

7.1 z1

5.1 z1

9.2 z2

7.2 z2

5.2 z2

9.3 z3

7.3 z3

5.3 z3

z1: This can be set when “Subwoofer” is set to “1SP”.

z2: This can be set when “Subwoofer” is set to “2SP L/R” or “2SP

MIX”.

z3: This can be set when “Subwoofer” is set to “3SP L/R/LFE” or

“3SP MIX”.

Start

Start Auto Setup.

The Audyssey MultEQ XT Auto Setup process automatically calculates

the size, level, distance, bass management crossover frequency, and

optimal settings for each speaker and subwoofer. Audyssey MultEQ

XT corrects acoustical distortions within the listening area.

Before starting, connect and position all your speakers.

Once started, MultEQ XT will play a series of test tones through each

speaker.

If an error message appears during the measurements, check “Error

Messages” (vpage 28), take the advised action, then start the

measurements again.

Setting the correct speaker conﬁguration can reduce the time required

to measure during the auto setup procedure as the system will not

have to look for speakers that are not connected.

STEP1 : Speaker Detection

The speaker connection and polarity are detected at the ﬁrst

measurement position. The following attributes are also determined

at this time: “Speaker Size”, “Speaker Distance”, “Channel Level”,

“Crossover Frequency”.

Once the measurements are completed, the results are displayed.

NOTE

• Loud test tone may be played during Audyssey MultEQ XT

Automatic Speaker Setup. This is part of normal operation. If there is

background noise in room, these test tones will increase in volume.

• Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow

obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. This

will cause inaccurate readings.

• Quiet the listening environment before beginning measurements and

refrain from talking. Turn off air conditioning units or other devices

that emit noise if at all possible as measurements may be affected

by these sounds.

• Operating the MASTER VOLUME knob on the main unit or the VOL

+/– buttons on the remote control unit during the measurements will

cancel the measurements.

• Do not change the speaker connections or subwoofer volume after

“STEP1”.

STEP2: Measurement

STEP3: Calculation

After completing a measurement position, move the microphone to

the next position.

Measure at least 6 positions (main listening position and at least 5 other

surrounding positions). For best results it is recommend measuring 6

or more positions (with a maximum of 8 positions).

NOTE

Do not turn the power off while the settings are being stored.

When “Calculate” is selected at “STEP2”, the measurements taken

are analyzed automatically to determine how the speaker system

interacts with the room.

The time required for this analysis depends on the number of speakers

connected. The higher the number of speakers, the longer the time

required for analysis.

STEP4: Check

Once the auto setup procedure is complete, a measuring result check

screen appears.

Select any item whose results you want to check to review the

results.

Values that are different from the actual distance may be set for

speakers with built-in ﬁlters (subwoofers, etc.). This is because ﬁlters

add electrical delay to the signal that should be compensated.

STEP5: Store

The auto setup measurement results are stored in the AVP-A1HDCI.

Subwoofer

The conﬁguration of the measuring subwoofer can be selected

beforehand.

[Selectable items] 1SP 2SP L/R 2SP MIX

3SP L/R/LFE 3SP MIX

Pre-out Assign

Change the pre-out assignment.

[Selectable items] Normal Free Assign

XLR Out Polarity

Set to switch the XLR pre-out terminal polarity.

[Selectable items] XLR XLR (INV)

Set each channel.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Error Messages

If the auto setup procedure could not be completed due to speaker installation, the measuring environment, etc., an error message is

displayed. If this happens, check the relevant items, be sure to take the necessary measures, then perform the auto setup procedure over

again.

Error messages (examples) Cause Measures

No microphone or speaker • Included setup microphone is not connected.

• Not all speakers could be detected.

• The front L speaker was not properly detected.

• Connect the included setup microphone to the SETUP

MIC jack on the main unit.

• Check the speaker connections.

Ambient noise is too high

or Level is too low

• Too much noise in the room for accurate

measurements to be made.

• Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for

accurate measurements to be made.

• Either turn off any device generating noise or move it

away.

• Try again when the surroundings are quieter.

• Check the speaker installation and the direction in which

the speakers are facing.

• Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.

None • Displayed speaker could not be detected.

· The front R speaker was not properly detected.

· Only one channel of the surround (A) and

surround (B) speakers was detected.

· Sound was output from the R channel when only

one surround back speaker was connected.

· The surround back or the surround (B) speaker

was detected, but the surround (A) speaker

was not detected.

· When the subwoofer conﬁguration is set at

“2SP L/R”, “2SP MIX”, “3SP L/R/LFE” or “3SP

MIX”, the subwoofer could not be detected.

• Check the connections of the displayed speaker.

Phase • Displayed speaker connected with the polarities

reversed.

• If the XLR pre-out terminal is used, the polarity is

reversed.

• Check the polarities of the displayed speaker.

• Check the polarity setting for the XLR output of the

displayed pre-set channel.

• For some speakers, this error message may be displayed

even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure

that the wiring is correct, select “Skip”.

Room EQ

Select room EQ setting method.

[Selectable items] All Assign

s Option

Select settings for room EQ, mic, etc.

Direct Mode

Select room EQ use for DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Mic Select

Select the microphone type if not using supplied mic.

The microphone connected to V.AUX Lch is used.

[Selectable items] Mic

V.AUX L

NOTE Be sure to turn the power off before checking the speaker connections.

Select “Retry” to make the measurements again.

Only a professionally certiﬁed installer should ever connect a

professionally-calibrated microphone to the V.AUX L input on the front

panel.

• Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and the interaction with the room, THX recommends setting the level and the

distance of the subwoofer manually.

• Sometimes due to interaction with the room, you may notice irregular results when setting the level and/or distance of the main speakers. If

this happens, THX recommends setting them manually.

• Please note that any THX main speakers should be set to Small (80 Hz). If you set up your speakers using Auto Setup, please make sure

manually that any THX speakers are set to Small with 80 Hz crossover.

d Parameter Check

Check auto setup measurement results.

This is displayed after the auto setup procedure is

completed.

[Selectable items]

Spkr Conﬁg Check Distance Check Ch. Level Check

Crossover Check EQ Check Restore

The auto setup results can be reset to what was originally calculated

by MultEQ XT when “Restore” is selected.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Make detailed settings for various parameters

Speaker Setup

Use this procedure to set the speakers manually

or if you wish to change the settings made with

the auto setup procedure.

F Menu tree F

Manual Setup

Speaker Setup

a Speaker Conﬁguration

s Subwoofer Setup

d Distance

f Channel Level

g Crossover Frequency

h THX Audio Setup

j Surround Speaker

Manual Setup

Front

Select front speaker size.

[Selectable items] Large Small

a Speaker Conﬁguration

Select speaker conﬁguration and size.

(bass reproduction capability)

Center

Select center speaker use and size.

[Selectable items] Large Small None

Subwoofer

Select subwoofer use.

[Selectable items] Yes No

Surround A

Select surround speakers A use and size.

[Selectable items] Large Small None

Surround B

Select surround speakers B use and size.

[Selectable items] Large Small None

Surround Back

Select surround back speaker use and size.

[Selectable items] Large Small None

2spkrs 1spkr

• Select “Large” or “Small” not according to the physical size of the

speaker but according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities

based on the frequency set at “Crossover Frequency” (vpage 30,

31).

• When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically set to

“Yes”.

• If “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to

“Large”.

• If “Surround A” is set to “None”, “Surround B” and “Surround

Back” are automatically set to “None”.

• When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left

channel (SBL).

• To take full advantage of the performance of the Home THX certiﬁed

speaker systems, set the front, center and surround speaker size

parameters to “Small” and the subwoofer to “Yes”.

Large : Select this for a large speaker with strong bass

reproduction.

Small : Select this for a smaller speaker with weaker bass

reproduction.

s Subwoofer Setup

Select subwoofer output conﬁguration and bass signal for

playback.

Conﬁguration

Select number of subwoofers and conﬁguration.

[Selectable items]

1SP 2SP L/R 2SP MIX 3SP L/R/LFE 3SP MIX

• THX recommends LFE–THX– mode so that bass interference is less

likely to occur in the room.

• This can be set when the GUI menu “Speaker Conﬁguration” –

“Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.

• Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the

strongest bass.

• Select “LFE+Main” if you want the bass signals to always be

produced from the subwoofer.

Mode

Select bass signal for playing with the subwoofer.

[Selectable items] LFE–THX– LFE+Main

When “2SP MIX” or “3SP MIX” is selected, “Subwoofer 1”,

“Subwoofer 2” and “Subwoofer 3” are each displayed.

Subwoofer Conﬁguration Subwoofer Connector

1SP SW1

2SP L/R L SW1

R SW2

2SP MIX 1 SW1

2 SW2

3SP L/R/LFE

L SW1

R SW2

LFE SW3

3SP MIX

1 SW1

2 SW2

3 SW3

Setup

0

Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Distance measurement

Select the speaker you want to set, then set the distance.

Set the value closest to the measured distance.

[Variable range]

0.0ft ~ 60.0ft : Display when “Feet” is set.

0.00m ~ 18.00m : Display when “Meters” is set.

Mode

Select test tone playback method.

[Selectable items] Auto Manual

f Channel Level

Adjust channel levels to obtain equal volume from all speakers.

Surround

Select surround speaker from which test tone is output.

[Selectable items] A B A+B

Start

Output test tone.

[Variable range] OFF z

–12dB ~ 0dB ~ +12dB

z: “OFF” can be set by pressing o when the subwoofer’s volume is

set to –12 dB.

Operating from the main remote control unit

Adjusting with the main remote control unit using the test tones

is only possible in the “Auto” mode and only effective in the

STANDARD (Dolby/DTS Surround) and HOME THX CINEMA modes.

The adjusted levels for the different modes are automatically stored

in the memory.

GAdjusting using test tonesH

q Press the TEST button.

Test tones are output from the various speakers.

w Use the o p button to adjust so that the volume is equal for all

speakers.

e When the adjustments are completed, press the TEST button

again.

• The level of each channel should be adjusted to 75 dB (Cweighted,

slow meter mode) on a sound level meter at the listening position. If

a sound level meter is not available adjust the channels by ear so the

sound levels are the same. Because adjusting the subwoofer level

test tone by ear is difﬁcult, use a well known music selection and

adjust for natural balance.

• When the GUI menu “Speaker Conﬁguration” – “Surround Back”

setting (vpage 29) is set to “1spkr”, the surround back speaker

display is set to “Surround Back”.

• Speakers set to “None” in the “Speaker Conﬁguration” settings are

not displayed.

• “Surround” can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Conﬁguration”

–“Surround B” is set to “Large” or “Small” (vpage 29).

• When using surround speakers, be sure to adjust the volume of the

different speakers.

• When “Channel Level” is adjusted, the adjusted values are set for all

the surround modes. To adjust the channel level separately for the

different surround modes, use the operation see page 75.

Default

Resets the settings to the default values.

NOTE

Set the distance between the listening position and the various

speakers to no more than 20 ft (6.00 meters).

Two surround back speakers are required to use the THX Ultra2

Cinema, THX Music mode and THX Games mode.

Set the surround back speakers so that the distance to the listening

position is the same for both the left and right speakers.

It is also recommended that the deviations of the distance from the

listening position to L and R channel speakers (front left (FL) and front

right (FR), surround left (SL) and surround right (SR), surround back left

(SBL) and surround back right (SBR) is less than 2 ft (60 cm).

d Distance

Set distance from listening position to speakers.

Before making the settings, measure the distance from the

listening position to the different speakers.

Feet / Meters

Select unit for distance.

Step

Select step. (smallest distance)

[Selectable items]

1ft 0.1ft : Can be selected when “Feet” is set.

0.1m 0.01m : Can be selected when “Meters” is set.

Default

Resets the settings to the default values.

g Crossover Frequency

Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles low

range signal.

[Selectable items]

FIXED–THX– :

Setup when using a THX-certiﬁed speaker.

40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz 150Hz

200Hz 250Hz :

Only the portion of the bass sound of the various speakers output

from the subwoofer that has a frequency below the frequency set

here is output.

Set this according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities of

the speakers you are using.

Advanced :

Specify crossover frequency for each speaker.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

j Surround Speaker

Select surround speakers to use for each surround mode.

Operating from the main remote control unit

Press the SPKR button.

Surround A Surround B

Surround A+B

h THX Audio Setup

Set the speaker to play the optimal THX surround mode.

THX Ultra2 Subwoofer

Set when using a subwoofer compatible with THX Ultra2 standards or

a subwoofer that can be properly played at low range.

[Selectable items] Yes No

Make these settings when “Yes” is selected for the subwoofer in the

“Speaker Conﬁguration” settings. This option is not available when

“No” is selected (vpage 29).

BGC (Boundary Gain Compensation)

If bass sound feels big compensate by lowering volume.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

• If the bass sound seems too strong:

Set “BGC” to “ON”. This activates a ﬁlter that gently reduces very

deep bass below 55 Hz to provide the ﬂattest overall deep bass

response. Select “ON” or “OFF” according to how strong you prefer

the deep bass response to be.

• This can be set when the “THX Ultra2 Subwoofer” setting is set to

“Yes”.

SB Speaker Position

Set the distance between the left and right surround back speakers.

[Selectable items] Under 1ft 1ft – 4ft Over 4ft

• When two surround back speakers have been set in “Speaker

Conﬁguration” (vpage 29), set the distance of the speakers. This

option is not available when “1spkr” is selected.

• This setting is necessary to achieve the optimum effect in the THX

Surround EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Music mode and THX Games

mode.

THX/DOLBY/DTS Cinema

[Selectable items] A B A+B

THX/DOLBY/DTS Music

[Selectable items] A B A+B

THX/DOLBY Game

[Selectable items] A B A+B

WIDE SCREEN

[Selectable items] A B A+B

7CH STEREO

[Selectable items] A B A+B

DSP SIMULATION

[Selectable items] A B A+B

MULTI CH MODE

[Selectable items] A B A+B

• This can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Conﬁguration” – “Surround

A” and “Surround B” are used (vpage 29).

• Make the surround speaker settings when the input mode is set to

“EXT. IN” at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Audio Setup” – “EXT. IN

Setup” (vpage 33).

• Please set all THX Certiﬁed speakers, set the “Speaker Conﬁguration”

for all speakers to “Small”. We recommend using with the crossover

frequency set to “FIXED–THX–”, but depending on the speaker,

setting it to a different frequency may improve frequency response

near the crossover frequency.

• The “Crossover Frequency” can be set when there are speakers

that have been set to “Small” at GUI menu “Speaker Conﬁguration”

or when “Subwoofer” is set to “Yes” (vpage 29).

• At the “Advanced” settings, if the “Subwoofer Setup” (vpage

29) setting is set to “LFE–THX–”, GUI menu speakers for which

“Speaker Conﬁguration” is set to “Small” can be set. If set to

“LFE+Main”, the setting can be made regardless of the speaker

size.

• For speakers set to “Small”, sound below the crossover frequency

is cut from the sound output. The cut bass sound is output from the

subwoofer or front speakers.

About Speaker Type Setting when Using Both

Surround speakers A and B

If “Small” is set for either surround speakers A or B, the output is the

same as when “Small” is set for both A and B.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

HDMI Setup

Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.

F Menu tree F

Manual Setup

HDMI Setup

a Color Space

s RGB Range

d Auto Lip Sync

f Audio

g Monitor Out

h HDMI Control

a Color Space

Make settings for output color space.

[Selectable items] YCbCr RGB

When connected to a monitor with a DVI-D connector (HDCP

compatible) using an HDMI/DVI converter cable, the signals are output

in RGB format, regardless of this setting.

s RGB Range

Make settings for RGB output range.

[Selectable items] Normal Enhanced

d Auto Lip Sync

Automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video

output.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

f Audio

Select HDMI audio output device.

[Selectable items] Amp TV

g Monitor Out

Make settings for HDMI monitor output.

[Selectable items] Auto (Dual) Monitor 1 Monitor 2

Operating from the main remote control unit

Press the M.SEL button.

• When “Monitor Out” is set to “Auto (Dual)”, connections with

the MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2 connectors are recognized

automatically.

• If both the MONITOR 1 and 2 connectors are connected and

“Resolution” is set to “Auto” (vpage 47), the signals are output

with a resolution compatible with both monitors.

• If “Resolution” is set to something other than “Auto”, check the

resolutions with which your monitor is compatible at GUI menu

“Information” – “HDMI Information” – “Monitor 1” and “Monitor

2” and set accordingly (vpage 57).

When “YCbCr” is selected under “Color Space”, “RGB Range” will

have no effect.

h HDMI Control

Make settings for HDMI control function.

Control

Set HDMI control function to ON/OFF.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Control Monitor

Select the interlocking monitor through the HDMI controls.

[Selectable items] Monitor1 Monitor2

Power Off Control

Interlock with the power off function through the HDMI controls.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

This can be set when “Control“ is set to “ON“.

• This can be set when “Control“ is set to “ON“.

• Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device

to check the settings.

GUI menu “HDMI Control”- “Control” is “ON”, the “Amp” and “TV”

will switch with the operation of any television not related to this

setting.

NOTE

• When the “Control” setting has been changed, always turn off the

power to the connecting devices afterwards and then turn back on.

•The HDMI control function does not work when the power to the

equipment is off.

• For details, see “HDMI Control Function” (vpage 74).

Auto (Dual) Monitor 1

Monitor 2

NOTE

Depending on the monitor you have connected, the display may not

be correct when you set to “Auto (Dual)”. In such a case, set to either

“Monitor 1” or “Monitor 2”.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

a EXT. IN Setup

Setup playback method for analog signals inputted from external

input connectors (EXT. IN).

Audio Setup

Make settings for audio playback.

F Menu tree F

Manual Setup

Audio Setup

a EXT.IN Setup

s 2ch Direct/Stereo

d Downmix Option

f Auto Surround Mode

g Manual EQ

s 2ch Direct/Stereo

Make speaker settings for 2-channel mode playback.

Setting

To change the settings, select “Custom”.

[Selectable items] Basic z

Custom

z: Use the same settings as in “Speaker Setup”.

Front

Select front speaker size.

[Selectable items] Large Small

Subwoofer

Select subwoofer use.

[Selectable items] Yes No

Subwoofer Mode

Select low range signal to be reproduced by subwoofer.

[Selectable items] LFE–THX– LFE+Main

Crossover

Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles low range

signal.

[Selectable items]

THX 40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz

150Hz 200Hz 250Hz

Distance FL

Set distance from listening position to front left speaker.

[Variable range] 0.0ft ~ 60.0ft

Distance FR

Set distance from listening position to front right speaker.

[Variable range] 0.0ft ~ 60.0ft

Surround Speaker

Select the surround speakers to use.

[Selectable items] A B A+B

• This can be set when “Mode” is set to “Analog”.

• This can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Setup” – “Speaker

Conﬁguration” – “Surround A” and “Surround B” are used (vpage

29).

Mode

Select playback mode.

[Selectable items] DSP Analog

Surround Back Input

Select surround back channel input in combination with the connected

player.

[Selectable items] Not Used SBL/SBR SB(SBL)

This can be set when “Mode” is set to “DSP”.

Subwoofer Level

Set the subwoofer level for playback.

Select according to the player in use.

[Selectable items] 0dB +5dB +10dB +15dB

We recommend setting to “+15 dB”.

Input Att.

Setup when input level is too large and playback volume is distorted.

[Selectable items] OFF –6dB

This can be set when “Mode” is set to “DSP”.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

d Downmix Option

Set dynamic range for downmix playback of Dolby Digital sources.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

• Set this to “ON” if the sound from the front speakers seems

distorted.

• When not using the center speaker or surround speakers, the

playback sound is down-mixed and output from the front speakers.

f Auto Surround Mode

Make setting for memorizing surround mode setting for each

input signal type.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

• The auto surround mode function lets you store in the memory the

surround mode last used for playing the four types of input signals

listed below.

q Analog and PCM 2-channel signals

w Dolby Digital and DTS 2-channel signals

e Dolby Digital and DTS multi-channel signals

r Multi-channel signals other than Dolby Digital and DTS (PCM,

DSD, etc.)

• When playing in the PURE DIRECT mode, the surround mode does

not change even if the input signal is changed.

g Manual EQ

Adjust tonal quality for each speaker using graphic equalizer.

Adjust CH

Select speaker adjustment method.

[Selectable items] Each L/R All

Select the speaker and frequency band and adjust the level.

[Selectable items]

63Hz 125Hz 250Hz 500Hz 1kHz 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz

16kHz

[Variable range]

–20dB ~ 0dB ~ +6dB

Curve Copy

Copy the Room EQ’s “Audyssey Flat” correction curve.

[Selectable items] Yes No

“Curve Copy” is displayed after the auto setup procedure has been

performed.

Default

Resets the settings to the default values.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Network Setup

Make network settings.

F Menu tree F

Manual Setup

Network Setup

a Network Setup

s Other

d Network Information

1Connect the LAN cable (vpage 21).

2Turn on the AVP-A1HDCI (vpage 58).

AVP-A1HDCI performs automatic network setup due to the

DHCP function.

When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function,

perform the setting in step 3.

3Set the IP address at the GUI menu “Manual Setup”

“Network Setup” – “Network Setup”.

q Select “Detail” and press the ENTER button.

w Use the o p button to set “DHCP” to “OFF”, then press the i

button.

The DHCP function is disabled.

a Network Setup

Make settings for wired or wireless LAN.

Wired LAN settings

Use this procedure to conﬁgure the Wired LAN settings.

• DHCP (Dynamic Host Conﬁguration Protocol) :

These are systems by which the IP address and other network

settings are automatically set for the AVP-A1HDCI, computer,

broadband router and network devices.

• DNS (Domain Name System) :

This is a system for converting the domain names used when

browsing Internet sites (for example, “www.denon.jp”) into the

IP addresses actually used for communications (for example,

“202.221.192.106”).

q Select “Detail”.

e Input the address.

r Select “Exit”.

w Set “OFF”.

• If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), there is no need

to make the settings at “Setting the IP Address” and “Setting the

Proxy”, since the DHCP function is set to “ON” in the AVP-A1HDCI’s

default settings.

• If the AVP-A1HDCI is being used connected to a network without

the DHCP function, the network settings must be made. In this

case, some knowledge of networks is required. For details, consult

a network administrator.

• If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and

settings (vpage 21).

• If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP

(Internet Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased

your computer.

e Use the ui p button to input the address and press the ENTER

button.

IP Address :

Set the IP address within the ranges shown below. The Network

Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses are set.

CLASS A: 10.0.0.0 ~ 10.255.255.255

CLASS B: 172.16.0.0 ~ 172.31.255.255

CLASS C: 192.168.0.0 ~ 192.168.255.255

Subnet Mask :

When connecting an xDSL modem or terminal adapter directly

to the AVP-A1HDCI, input the subnet mask indicated in the

documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input

255.255.255.0.

Default Gateway :

When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address.

Primary DNS Secondary DNS :

If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation

supplied by your provider, input it at “Primary DNS”. If there are

two or more DNS addresses, input the ﬁrst one at “Secondary

DNS”.

r Use the i button to select “Exit” and press the ENTER button.

Setup is complete.

b When connecting to the network via a Proxy server, select “Proxy”

and press the ENTER button (vpage 38 “Proxy settings”).

Setup



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting SpeciﬁcationsSetup

b If the access points are not detected automatically, use the i

button to select the “Manual” and press the ENTER button.

Setting becomes manual. For details, see “Manual settings”

(vpage 37).

b If the access points are repeat search, use the i button to select

the “Search” and press the ENTER button.

e If there is an encryption setting for the access point you selected

in step w, enter same encryption key as used for the access

point. (If there is no encryption setting, proceed to step t.)

1Fitting a rod antenna (vpage 21).

b If a LAN cable is connected, remove it.

2Turn on the AVP-A1HDCI (vpage 58).

3Set the access point at the GUI menu “Manual Setup”

– “Network Setup” – “Network Setup”.

When searching access points to connect automatically, refer to

“Automatic settings”.

When searching access points to connect manually, refer to

“Manual settings”.

n Automatic settings

q Select “Search” and press the ENTER button.

The access point you have set is displayed.

w Use the ui button to select the access point, and then press

the ENTER button.

Select when searching

access points again.

Wireless LAN settings

Use this procedure to conﬁgure the Wireless LAN settings.

w Select the access point.

Example) DENON

Select when access

points cannot be searched

automatically.

q Select “Search”.

r Set only during

“WEP” in step w.

t Select “Connection”.

e Enter

encryption key.

Use the uio p button to input the “Key” (encryption key) and

press the ENTER button.

Enter the same encryption key as used for the access point.

[Characters that can be input]

A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

When no security settings have been used in the Internet

connection settings, this step is not necessary.

r When encryption is by “WEP”, select the “Default Key” using

the i button, and then press the o p button.

[Selectable items] 1 2 3 4

Select the same default key as used for the access point. This

should normally be set to “1”.

t Use the i button to select “Connection” and press the ENTER

button.

Network connection starts.

When connection is established with the access point,

“Connection completed.” is displayed.

AVP-A1HDCI performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP

function.

When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function,

perform the setting in step 4.



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

r Use the ui button to select the Security and press the i

button.

[Selectable items]

None :

Select if not encrypted.

Can also be used even without encryption, through we

recommend encryption for improved security.

WEP WPA-PSK(TKIP) WPA-PSK(AES) WPA2-PSK(TKIP)

WPA2-PSK(AES) :

Select the encryption method according to the encryption setting

of the access point you are using.

t Use the uio p button to input the “Key” (encryption key) and

press the ENTER button.

Enter the same encryption key as used for the access point.

[Characters that can be input]

A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

When no security settings have been used in the Internet

connection settings, this step is not necessary.

y When encryption is by “WEP”, select the “Default Key” using

the i button, and then press the o p button.

[Selectable items] 1 2 3 4

Select the same default key as used for the access point. This

should normally be set to “1”.

u Use the i button to select “Connection” and press the ENTER

button.

Network connection starts.

When connection is established with the access point,

“Connection completed.” is displayed.

AVP-A1HDCI performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP

function.

When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function,

perform the setting in step 4.

n Manual settings

q Select “Detail” and press the ENTER button.

w Use the o p button to select the Mode and press the i button.

[Selectable items]

Infrastructure :

Select when communication is via an access

point.

Ad-hoc :

Select during direct communication, when an

access point is not used.

e Use the uio p button to input the name of the wireless

network (SSID) and press the ENTER button.

[Characters that can be input]

A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

q Select “Detail”.

e Input the SSID.

w Select the communication mode.

Example) Infrastructure

r Select the

encryption method.

Example) WEP

y Set only

during “WEP”

in step r.

u Select “Connection”.

t Enter encryption key.

If you are using a router with no DHCP function to automatically assign

the IP address, set the IP address manually.

4Set the IP address.

b For details, see page 35 “Wired LAN settings” in step 3.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

n Proxy settings

Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server.

q On the GUI menu, select “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup”

– “Network Setup” – “Detail” and press the ENTER button.

w Use the ui button to set “Proxy” and press the ENTER button.

e Use the o p button to set “Proxy” to “ON” and press the i

button.

The proxy server is enabled.

r Use the o p button to select the proxy server input method, and

then press the i button.

[Selectable items]

Address : Select when inputting by address.

Name : Select when inputting by domain name.

t Use the ui p button to input the proxy server address or domain

name and press the ENTER button.

When “Address” is selected in step r :

Input the address

When“Name” is selected in step r :

Input the domain name

[Characters that can be input]

A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

q Select “Detail”.

e Set “ON”.

w Select “Proxy”.

r Selecting the input method.

Example) Address

y Input the port

number.

u Select “Exit”.

t Input the

address

or domain

name.

y Use the uio p button to input the proxy server port number and

press the ENTER button.

u Use the i button to select “Exit” and press the ENTER button.

Setup is complete.

s Other

Make setting for amp power save mode and computer language

environment.

Power Saving

Make setting for power saving when not connected to network.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

PC Language

Select computer environment language.

[Selectable items]

ara chi (smpl) chi (trad) cze dan dut eng ﬁn

fre ger gre heb hun ita jpn kor nor pol

por por (BR) rus spa swe tur

Character

Set the character code type of the MP3 ID3-Tag played by USB.

[Selectable items] Auto Latin Japanese

If the characters are not properly displayed when set to “Auto”, set to

“Latin” or “Japanese”.

To use the web control function, set this setting to “OFF”.

d Network Information

Display network information.

[Items to be checked]

Wired or Wireless SSID DHCP= ON or OFF IP Address

MAC Address

Rhapsody Account

Set or change Username and Password.

“Listening to Rhapsody“ (vpage 70)

n Enter username : Username

[Input characters]

a ~ z A ~ Z 0 ~ 9

! “ # $ % & ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ˜ (space)

n Enter password : Password

[Input characters]

a ~ z A ~ Z 0 ~ 9

! “ # $ % & ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ ` { | } ˜ (space)

n Clear Rhapsody account : Clear

[Selectable items] Yes No

Merge “My Library“ in the trial account with the full account :

Merge

The Account Number received is displayed during the 30-day free

trial.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Zone Setup

Make settings for audio playback in a multi-zone

system.

F Menu tree F

Manual Setup

Zone Setup

a ZONE2

s ZONE3

d OSD

a ZONE2

Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE2 system.

s ZONE3

Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE3 system.

Bass

Adjust low frequency range (bass).

[Variable range] –10dB ~ 0dB ~ +10dB

Treble

Adjust high frequency range (treble).

[Variable range] –10dB ~ 0dB ~ +10dB

HPF

When using speakers that cannot satisfactorily play low frequencies,

distortion of the bass sound can be reduced by setting “HPF” to

“ON”.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

d OSD

Set ZONE2 monitor as onscreen display Zone.

[Selectable items]

ZONE2 : Display only ZONE2 operations.

ZONE2/ZONE3 : Display ZONE2 and ZONE3 operations.

NOTE

On-screen display appears only on the ZONE2 monitor.It does not

appear on the ZONE3 monitor.

Power On Level

Deﬁne the volume setting that is active when the power is turned

on.

[Selectable items] Last – – –dB –70dB ~ 18dB

Mute Level

Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.

[Selectable items] Full –40dB –20dB

This can be set when “Volume Level“ is set to “Variable“.

Video Convert (ZONE2 only)

Automatically convert video input signal to ZONE2 monitor output

format.

[Input source]

DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR-1 DVR-2 V.AUX

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Volume Limit

Make a setting for maximum volume.

[Selectable items] OFF –20dB –10dB 0dB

This can be set when “Volume Level“ is set to “Variable“.

Lch Level

Adjust the left channel output level.

[Variable range] –12dB ~ 0dB ~ +12dB

The “Lch Level“ and “Rch Level“ can be set when “Channel“ is set

to “Stereo“.

Rch Level

Adjust the right channel output level.

[Variable range] –12dB ~ 0dB ~ +12dB

Channel

Switch between stereo and mono output.

[Selectable items] Stereo Mono

Volume Level

Adjust the main volume level.

[Selectable items] Variable –40dB 0dB

Setup

0

Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Option Setup

Make various other settings.

F Menu tree F

Manual Setup

Option Setup

a Pre-out Assign

s XLR Out Polarity

d POA Setting

f Volume Control

g Source Delete

h GUI

j Quick Select Name

k Trigger Out 1

l Trigger Out 2

A0 Trigger Out 3

A1 Trigger Out 4

A2 Transducer Setup

A3 Digital Out

A4 Remote ID

A5 2Way Remote

A6 Dimmer

A7 Setup Lock

A8 Maintenance Mode

A9 Firmware Update

S0 Add New Feature

Setting “Free Assign” allows you to freely assign each pre-out to any channel, depending on the environment used.

[Selectable items] Normal Free Assign

a Pre-out Assign

Change the pre-out assignment.

• Channels that are set up in the GUI menu “Speaker Setup”-“Speaker Conﬁguration” to “None” can be set up, but will not generate output.

• Pre-out terminals in ZONE2 and ZONE3 can not be allocated.

• One channel can be assigned to up to 4 pre-out terminals.

Preout terminal

Pre-out Assign

FL FR C SL (A) SR (A) SL (B) SR (B) SBL SBR SW1 SW2 SW3

Normal FL FR C SL (A) SR (A) SL (B) SR (B) SBL SBR SW1 SW2 SW3

Free Assign

FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL

FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR

C C C C C C C C C C C C

SL (A) SL (A) SL (A) SL (A) SL (A) SL (A) SL (A) SL (A) SL (A) SL (A) SL (A) SL (A)

SR (A) SR (A) SR (A) SR (A) SR (A) SR (A) SR (A) SR (A) SR (A) SR (A) SR (A) SR (A)

SL (B) SL (B) SL (B) SL (B) SL (B) SL (B) SL (B) SL (B) SL (B) SL (B) SL (B) SL (B)

SR (B) SR (B) SR (B) SR (B) SR (B) SR (B) SR (B) SR (B) SR (B) SR (B) SR (B) SR (B)

SBL SBL SBL SBL SBL SBL SBL SBL SBL SBL SBL SBL

SBR SBR SBR SBR SBR SBR SBR SBR SBR SBR SBR SBR

SW1 SW1 SW1 SW1 SW1 SW1 SW1 SW1 SW1 SW1 SW1 SW1

SW2 SW2 SW2 SW2 SW2 SW2 SW2 SW2 SW2 SW2 SW2 SW2

SW3 SW3 SW3 SW3 SW3 SW3 SW3 SW3 SW3 SW3 SW3 SW3

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

s XLR Out Polarity

Set to switch the XLR pre-out terminal polarity.

d POA Setting

Set when connecting the receiver to a POA-A1HDCI.

POA LINK

Set when connecting the receiver to a POA-A1HDCI through a

CONTROL LINK.

[Selectable items] OFF ON (Single) ON (Dual)

[Selectable channels]

Front L Front R Center Surround A L Surround A R

Surround B L Surround B R Surround Back L

Surround Back R Subwoofer 1 Subwoofer 2 Subwoofer 3

[Selectable items] XLR qGROUND

wHOT

eCOLD

XLR (INV) qGROUND

wCOLD

eHOT

Source Delete

Remove input sources that are not used from the display.

[Selectable items] ON Delete

NOTE

• Input sources being used in the various zones cannot be deleted.

• Input sources set to “Delete” cannot be selected from GUI menu

“Source Select” or using the SOURCE SELECT knob on the main unit

or SOURCE SELECT button on the remote control unit.

h GUI

Make GUI related settings.

Screensaver

Make screensaver settings.

Use the screensaver to prevent burn-in on the monitor screen.

When set to “ON”, the screensaver is activated if there is no activity

for about 3 minutes.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Wall Paper

Change the GUI background.

[Selectable items] Picture Black Gray Blue

Format

Select the video output signal format to match the monitor.

[Selectable items] NTSC PAL

NOTE

When a format other than the video format of the connected monitor

is set, the picture will not be displayed properly. Use the procedure

described below to change the video format.

f Volume Control

Set the MAIN ZONE volume setting.

Volume Limit

Make a setting for maximum volume.

[Selectable items] OFF –20dB –10dB 0dB

Power On Level

This sets the volume set when the MAIN ZONE’s power is turned

on.

[Selectable items] Last – – –dB –80dB ~ 18dB

Mute Level

This sets the amount of attenuation of the volume when the mute

mode is set in the MAIN ZONE.

[Selectable items] Full –40dB –20dB

POA 1/POA 2

Set POA-A1HDCI for which the MODE select switch is set to “1” or

“2”.

LINK Check

Check CONTROL LINK.

n Input Selector

Select the setup channel.

[Selectable items] L1 R1 L2 R2 L3 R3

L4 R4 L5 R5

Select the connector input to be used for each channel.

[Selectable items] RCA XLR OFF

n Power Amp

Select the setup channel.

[Selectable items] L1/L2 L3/L4 L5/R5 R1/R2 R3/R4

Set the power amp usage for each channel.

[Selectable items] NORMAL BI-AMP BRIDGE (BTL)

See the POA-A1HDCI operating instructions.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Master Volume

Master volume display during adjustment.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

NET/USB / iPod / Tuner

This sets the time the on-screen display is displayed when an operation

is performed.

[Selectable items] Always 30s 10s OFF

j Quick Select Name

Change “Quick Select” display name.

Up to 16 characters can be input.

[Input characters]

A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

Text

Text information display.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Operating from the main unit

b The GUI menu is not displayed when performing this setting.

q Press and hold the AUDIO DELAY and RETURN buttons for at least 3

seconds.

“Video Format” appears on the display.

w Use the o p button to make the setting.

e Press the ENTER, MENU or RETURN button to complete the

setting.

k Trigger Out 1

Select the conditions to turn on the trigger out 1 with respect to

the zone, input source, surround mode, HDMI monitor, etc.

For details about the trigger out function, see page 23.

l Trigger Out 2

This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 2, in the same

way as “Trigger Out 1” above.

A0 Trigger Out 3

This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 3, in the same

way as “Trigger Out 1” above.

A1 Trigger Out 4

This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 4, in the same

way as “Trigger Out 1” above.

[Selectable items] ON – – –

Setting with Respect to the Zone

When the power of the zone turned on/off, the trigger out turns on.

Setting with Respect to the Input Source

When the input source set to on is selected, the trigger out turns on.

Associated with respect to the input source for zones set to “ON” at

“Setting with Respect to the Zone”.

Setting with Respect to the Surround Mode

When the surround mode set to on is selected, the trigger out turns

on.

A2 Transducer Setup

Set when using transducer.

The Transducer Setup can be accessed through GUI menu “Speaker

Setup” – “Subwoofer Setup” is “1SP”, “2SP L/R” or “2SP MIX”. The

transducer signal is outputted from “SW3”.

Setting with Respect to the Monitor

When the HDMI monitor set to on is selected, the trigger out turns

on.

Level

[Variable range]

–12dB ~ 0dB ~ +12dB :

Set the transducer level.

OFF :

Turn the transducer output off.

LPF

Set the upper limit of the low frequency output to the transducer.

[Selectable items]

40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz

150Hz 200Hz 250Hz

When you adjust “Level”, the adjusted value is set for all surround

modes. To adjust the level for individual surround modes, use “Channel

Level” (vpage 75).

This is effective when the “MAIN ZONE” has been set to “ON” for

the “Setting with Respect to the Zone” and the input source which is

set to “ON” has been selected for the “Setting with Respect to the

Input Source”.

This is effective when the “MAIN ZONE” has been set to “ON” for

the “Setting with Respect to the Zone” and the input source which is

set to “ON” has been selected for the “Setting with Respect to the

Input Source”.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

A4 Remote ID

Set remote control ID.

Match the ID setting of the remote control unit and the receiver.

• When changing the remote ID, also change the AMP, iPod, TU and

NET/DTU modes of the main remote control unit at the same time

(vpage 80).

• When changing the remote ID, also change the sub remote control

unit at the same time (vpage 85).

A3 Digital Out

Set usage of OPT4 OUT.

NOTE

The ZONE4 operations cannot be performed when set to “Rec

Select”.

[Selectable items] ZONE4 Select Rec Select

[Selectable items] 1 2 3 4

A5 2Way Remote

Set when using the 2-way remote control unit.

When using a 2-way remote control unit (RC-7000CI and RC-7001RCI,

sold separately), set this to “Used”.

[Selectable items] Used Not Used

NOTE

• When using the 2-way remote control unit, connect to the Port 1

RS-232C connector.

• If GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “2Way Remote”is

set to “Used”, you cannot use port 1 of the RS-232C terminal for the

external controller.

A6 Dimmer

Adjust display brightness of the receiver.

Operating from the main unit

Press the DIMMER button.

[Selectable items] Bright Dim Dark OFF

Bright Dim

DarkOFF

A7 Setup Lock

Protect settings from inadvertent change.

• When “Setup Lock” is set to “ON”, the settings listed below can

no longer be changed. Also, “SETUP LOCKED!” is displayed if you

attempt to operate related buttons.

⋅ GUI menu operations

⋅ RESTORER

⋅ Night Mode

⋅ Parameter

⋅ Room EQ

⋅ Channel Level

⋅ Audio Delay

• To cancel the setting, press the MENU button to re-display the

“Setup Lock” screen, then change the setting to “OFF”.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

A8 Maintenance Mode

This sets the function for maintenance by a DENON serviceperson

or installer. (For professional use only.)

NOTE

Only use this function if so instructed by a DENON serviceperson or

installer.

This function allows a DENON serviceperson or installer to check the

AVP-A1HDCI’s status and make settings via the Internet.

A9 Firmware Update

Update the ﬁrmware of the receiver.

Check for Update

You can check for ﬁrmware updates. You can also check approximately

how long it will take to complete an update.

Start

Execute the update process.

When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the GUI

screen is shut down.

The amount of update time which has elapsed is displayed during the

update process.

When updating is complete the power indicator becomes green and

normal status is resumed.

If the display reads as shown below, check the settings and network

environment, then update again.

Display Description

Updating failed Updating failed.

Server is busy Server is busy. Wait a while then try again.

Connection fail Failure connecting to server.

If POA-A1HDCI is connected using the control link, POA-A1HDCI

meter operation is turned OFF when the AVP-A1HDCI display is

turned “OFF”.

If POA-A1HDCI is connected using the control link, POA-A1HDCI is

updated simultaneously with update of AVP-A1HDCI.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Notes concerning use of “Firmware Update” and

“Add New Feature”

• In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system

requirements and settings for a broadband Internet connection. For

details, see pages 35 ~ 38.

• Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrating is completed.

• Normally there is no need to use this function, aside from the cases

described below.

⋅ Firmware Update : In the case of applying the latest ﬁrmware

updates (free)

⋅ Add New Feature : In the case of future upgrades to add new

functions to the receiver (payment required)

⋅ Information regarding the “Firmware Update” function and “Add

New Feature” will be announced on the DENON web site each

time related plans are deﬁned.

• Even with a broadband connection to the Internet, approximately

1 hour is required for the updating/upgrading procedure to be

completed.

Once updating/upgrading starts, normal operations on the

AVP-A1HDCI cannot be performed until updating/upgrading is

completed.

Furthermore, updating/upgrading the ﬁrmware may reset the

backup data for the parameters, etc., set for the AVP-A1HDCI.

• When updating/upgrading the ﬁrmware, we recommend using

wired connections (Ethernet cable).

Upgrade

Execute the upgrade process.

When upgrading starts, the power indicator becomes red and the GUI

screen is shut down.

The amount of upgrade time which has elapsed is displayed during

the upgrade process.

When upgrading is complete the power indicator becomes green and

normal status is resumed.

If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those

in “Firmware Update” will appear on the display.

S0 Add New Feature

Display the new functions which can be purchased for downloading

to the AVP-A1HDCI and upgrade.

When you purchase a new function and register your user information,

“Registerd” is displayed on this menu and you can proceed with the

upgrade.

Upon completion of the upgrade, you can start using the new

function.

When “Not Registered” is displayed on the Add New Feature screen,

you cannot upgrade.

To use the upgrade function, you should purchase an upgrade package

from the DENON website.

To purchase the package, you will need the ID number shown on this

screen.

To display the ID number on the screen, hold the p and STATUS

buttons on the main unit down for 3 seconds or more.

Upgrade Status

A list of the additional functions provided by the Upgrade will be

displayed.

Language

Select the language displayed on the GUI screen.

F Menu tree F

Manual Setup

Language

[Selectable items] English Français

Operating from the main unit

b The GUI menu is not displayed when performing this setting.

q Press and hold the AUDIO DELAY and RETURN buttons for at least

3 seconds.

“Video Format” appears on the display.

w Use the ui button to set “GUI Language”.

e Use the o p button to make the setting.

r Press the ENTER, MENU or RETURN button to complete the

setting.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Input Source Selection

F Menu tree F

Source Select

TUNER

PHONO

DVD

HDP

TV/CBL

SAT

VCR

DVR-1

DVR-2

V.AUX

NET/USB

HD Radio

Use this procedure to select the input source and make the settings

related to playing input sources.

Source Select

Operating from the main unit or main remote

control unit

GOperation on the main unitH

Turn the SOURCE SELECT knob.

b If “Rec Select” or “Video Select” is selected, press the SOURCE

button before turning the SOURCE SELECT knob.

GOperation on the main remote control unitH

Press the SOURCE SELECT button.

The desired input source can be selected directly.

(Main unit) (Main remote control unit)

• To operate the AVP-A1HDCI using the main remote control unit, set

the remote control unit to the AMP mode (vpage 77 “Remote

Control Unit Operations”).

• Pressing the DVD/HDP button and the VCR/DVR button on the main

remote control will switch between the following.

DVD/HDP :

DVD HDP

VCR/DVR :

VCR DVR-1 DVR-2

Settings Related to Playing

Input Sources

F Menu tree F

Source Select

TUNER

a Play

s Auto Preset

d Preset Skip

f Preset Name

g Video

h Input Mode

j Rename

k Source Level

PHONO

g Video

h Input Mode

j Rename

k Source Level

l Input Att.

CD, DVD, HDP, TV/CBL, SAT, VCR, DVR-1, DVR-2, V.AUX

a Playz

A0 Playback Mode (iPod)z

A1 Assign

g Video

h Input Mode

j Rename

k Source Level

l Input Att.

NET/USB

a Play

A2 Playback Mode

A3 Still Picture

g Video

h Input Mode

j Rename

k Source Level

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Source Select

a Play

d Preset Skip

A4 Antenna Aiming

g Video

h Input Mode

j Rename

k Source Level

HD Radio

a Play

s Auto Preset

d Preset Skip

f Preset Name

g Video

h Input Mode

j Rename

k Source Level

z : “Play” and “Playback Mode (iPod)” are displayed for input sources

for which “iPod dock” is assigned.

a Play

The playback screen is displayed.

s Auto Preset

Use the auto preset function to program radio stations.

If an FM station cannot be preset automatically, select the desired

station by tuning it in manually, then preset it manually.

[Input source]

TUNER NET/USB XM HD Radio (iPod )

[Input source] TUNER HD Radio

[Selectable items] Start

Preset Skip

Set the preset memories that you do not want to display

when tuning.

When set to “All” to “Skip”, it is possible to skip entire preset memory

blocks (A to G).

A ~ G

Select the preset channel(s) you do not want to display.

[Input source] TUNER HD Radio XM

[Selectable items] All 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

[Selectable items] ON Skip

f Preset Name

Assign name to a preset memory.

Names containing up to 8 characters can be input.

A1 ~ G8

Select the preset memory number.

[Input source] TUNER HD Radio

[Characters that can be input]

A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

g Video

Setting the video source.

Video Select

Switch video input source while listening to audio signal.

[Selectable items]

DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR-1 DVR-2 V.AUX

SOURCE

Operating from the main unit

Press the VIDEO SELECT button, then turn the SOURCE SELECT knob

until the desired picture appears.

b To cancel, press the main unit’s VIDEO SELECT button, then turn

the main unit’s SOURCE SELECT knob and select “SOURCE”.

NOTE

• It is not possible to select HDMI input signals.

• When playing HDMI video input signals, the analog video signal of

another input source cannot be selected for the HDMI video output.

• Input sources for which “Delete” is selected at “Source Delete”

cannot be selected.

Video Convert

Automatically convert video input signal to monitor output format.

[Input source]

DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR-1 DVR-2 V.AUX

[Selectable items] ON OFF

NOTE

• For optimum video performance, THX recommends that you set

the conversion mode to “OFF” to use video signals pass through

system without up conversion.

Example: View video input from a component video on the

component video monitor.

• When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some

other source is input, the video conversion function might not

operate. If this happens, please set the conversion mode to “OFF”.

i/p Scaler

Make settings for i/p scaler function.

[Selectable items] A to H A to H & H to H OFF

• This can not be set when “Video Convert“ is set to “OFF”.

• The “A to H & H to H” can be set to the input source assigned to the

HDMI input connector.

• “A to H & H to H” setting:

• Deep color (10 bit/12 bit) signals are converted into 8-bit signals.

• The i/p scaler function does not work if xvYCC or computer’s

resolution signals are input.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”.

Aspect

This sets the aspect ratio when outputting 480i/576i or 480p/576p

input signals from the HDMI output connector.

[Input source]

DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR-1 DVR-2 V.AUX

NET/USB

[Selectable items] Full Normal

This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”.

Progressive Mode

Select optimum progressive mode for video material.

[Input source]

DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR-1 DVR-2 V.AUX

[Selectable items] Auto Video1 Video2

• This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than

“OFF”.

• When the “i/p Scaler” is set to “A to H & H to H”, the resolutions can

be setup to the analog video input signal and HDMI input signal.

• To enjoy 1080p/24 Hz video images, use a monitor which supports

1080p/24 Hz video signals.

• With ﬁlm source (24 Hz), you can enjoy a ﬁlm-like image. It is

recommended that you use 1080p/60 Hz for video source and mixed

source.

• It is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal to 1080p/24 Hz. It is output

at a resolution of 1080p/50 Hz.

• It is not possible to convert a 1080p/60 Hz signal to 1080p/24 Hz.

Operating from the main unit

Press the SCALE button.

Auto 480p / 576p 1080i

1080p1080p:24 Hz 720p

Resolution

Set resolution for video signal output to HDMI.

[Selectable items]

Auto 480p/576p 1080i 720p 1080p 1080p:24 Hz

h Input Mode

Make input mode and decode mode settings for this source.

The selectable input modes depend on the input source and

“Assign” setting (vpage 48, 49).

Input Mode

Set the input mode for this source.

[Input source] TUNER PHONO (iPod )

[Selectable items] Analog EXT. IN

[Input source] NET/USB XM HD Radio

[Selectable items] Auto EXT. IN

[Input source]

CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR-1 DVR-2

V.AUX

[Selectable items]

Auto HDMI Digital Analog EXT. IN

When a digital signal is properly input, the “ ” indicator lights on

the display. If the “ ” indicator does not light, check the digital input

connector assignment and the connections.

Operating from the main unit or main remote

control unit

Press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or the INPUT button

on the main remote control unit.

z1: This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu

“Assign” setting is set to “HDMI” (vpage 48). Excluding CD

and TUNER.

z2: This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu

“Assign” setting is set to “Digital” (vpage 48).

Auto

EXT. IN

HDMI z1Digital z2

Analog

Decode Mode

Set the decode mode for this source.

[Input source]

CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR-1 DVR-2 V.AUX

[Selectable items] Auto PCM DTS

• This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu

“Assign” setting is set to “HDMI” or “Digital”.

• Only set “PCM” and “DTS” when playing the respective signals.

j Rename

Change the display name for this source.

Names containing up to 8 characters can be input.

[Characters that can be input]

A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

For input sources for which “HDMI” or “Digital” are set at the GUI

menu “Assign” setting, the analog input level and digital input level

can be set separately.

k Source Level

Corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s audio

input.

[Variable range] –12dB ~ 0dB ~ +12dB

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

l Input Att.

Set when replay sound is distorted because the input level is too

large.

[Selectable items] OFF –6dB

A0 Playback Mode (iPod)

Make settings for iPod playback.

Repeat

Make settings for repeat mode.

[Input source]

CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR-1 DVR-2

V.AUX

[Selectable items] All One OFF

Shufﬂe

Make settings for shufﬂe mode.

[Input source]

CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR-1 DVR-2

V.AUX

[Selectable items] Songs Albums OFF

This can be selected for input sources for which “Assign” is assigned

at the “iPod dock” setting.

• With an HDMI connection, video and audio signals are transmitted

simultaneously. To play the video signal assigned at “HDMI”

combined with the audio signal assigned at “Digital”, select “Digital”

at the GUI menu “Source Select“ – “Input Mode” (vpage 47).

• When the AVP-A1HDCI and monitor are connected with an HDMI

cable, if the monitor is not compatible with HDMI audio signal

playback, only the video signals are output to the monitor.

• The audio signals input from the analog, digital and EXT. IN connectors

are not output to the monitor.

NOTE

This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is assigned.

A1 Assign

Assign input sources to input connectors.

HDMI

Select HDMI connector to assign to this source.

[Input source]

DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR-1 DVR-2 V.AUX

[Selectable items] 1 2 3 4 5 6 None

Input source DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT

Default setting HDMI1 HDMI2 None HDMI3

Input source VCR DVR-1 DVR-2 V.AUX

Default setting HDMI4 HDMI5 HDMI6 None

Digital

Select digital input connector to assign to this source.

[Input source]

CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR-1 DVR-2

V.AUX

[Selectable items]

Coaxial1 ~ 4 Optical1 ~ 5 DENON LINK z BNC1/2 None

z: When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been

connected, be sure to make a setting to “DENON LINK”.

NOTE

This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is assigned.

Input source CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT

Default setting

Coaxial 4 Coaxial 1 Coaxial 2

Optical 1

Coaxial 3

Input source VCR DVR-1 DVR-2 V.AUX

Default setting Optical 4 Optical 2 Optical 3 Optical 5

“Input Att.” is effective during DSP processing of analog audio

signals.

Component

Select component video input to assign to this source.

[Input source]

DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR-1 DVR-2 V.AUX

[Selectable items] 1 ~ 5 – RCA 6 – BNC None

NOTE

This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is assigned.

Input source DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT

Default setting

1-RCA 2-RCA 3-RCA 4-RCA

Input source VCR DVR-1 DVR-2 V.AUX

Default setting None

5-RCA

None None

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

A2 Playback Mode

Make settings for “NET/USB” playback.

[Input source] NET/USB

USB Select

Select USB port to use.

[Selectable items] Front Rear

Repeat

Make settings for repeat mode.

[Selectable items] All One OFF

Random

Make random mode settings.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Direct Play

Set the folder to be played using the DIRECT PLAY button on the sub

remote control unit.

[Selectable items] Favorites All Music

Match the port to be used and the setting.

A3 Still Picture

Make settings for still picture (JPEG) playback.

Slide Show

Make slideshow settings.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Interval

Set the playback time per image.

[Variable range] 5s ~ 60s

[Input source] NET/USB

iPod dock

Assign Control Dock for iPod to this source.

[Input source]

CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR-1 DVR-2

V.AUX

[Selectable items] Assign None

• With the default settings, the Control Dock for iPod can be used

connected to the VCR (iPod) connector.

• Even if “iPod dock” is set to “Assign”, if the set is not connected to

a Control dock for iPod, the input source can be used as the normal

input source.

Analog

Select the analog connector using the CD input.

[Input source] CD

[Selectable items] RCA

XLR qGROUND

wHOT

eCOLD

XLR (INV) qGROUND

wCOLD

eHOT

NOTE

When you assign “iPod dock,” you cannot select “XLR”, or

“XLR(INV)”.

Satellite

Indicate satellite signal strength.

Terrestrial

Indicate terrestrial signal strength.

A4 Antenna Aiming

Adjust the XM radio reception sensitivity.

Display Condition

¡¡¡¡ Signal strength is strong

¡¡¡ Signal strength is good

¡¡ Signal strength is marginal

¡Signal strength is weak

No signal

[Input source] XM

Setup

0

Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Surround Mode

HOME THX CINEMA

THX surround sound mode to recreate the authentic sound of

movie soundtracks.

Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources

[Selectable items]

PLgx CINEMA PLg CINEMA Pro Logic NEO:6 CINEMA

[Selectable items]

HOME THX CINEMA :

This mode is for decoding the input signals according to their format

and playing THX surround sound.

The display when the HOME THX CINEMA mode is selected depends

on the input signal and surround back output playback mode.

Playing Multi-channel Sources

(Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.)

Input signal Display

Dolby

Digital

Source

DOLBY DIGITAL

(other than 2ch) /

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

DOLBY DIGITAL Plus

DOLBY TrueHD

THX SURROUND EX

THX Ultra2 Cinema

THX Music Mode

THX Games Mode

THX Cinema

PLgx C + THX

DTS

Surround

Source

DTS (5.1ch) /

DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 /

DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 /

DTS 96/24 /

DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio

ES MTRX6.1 + THX (z1)

ES DSCRT6.1 + THX (z2)

THX Ultra2 Cinema

THX Music Mode

THX Games Mode

THX Cinema

PLgx C + THX

DVD-

Audio,

SACD

PCM (multi ch) /

DSD (multi ch)

THX SURROUND EX

THX Ultra2 Cinema

THX Music Mode

THX Games Mode

PLgx C + THX

M CH 5.1 + THX

M CH 7.1 + THX

z1: This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Matrix 6.1”

and the AVP-A1HDCI’s “AFDM” setting is set to “ON”.

z2: This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Discrete 6.1”.

Operating from the main unit or main remote

control unit

Press the HOME THX CINEMA button on the main unit or the THX

button on the main remote control unit.

For details, see page 95.

Standard Playback

This is the standard mode for enjoying surround sound according

to the program source.

To select these surround modes pressing the STANDARD button on

the main unit or press the STD button on the main remote control unit.

The mode switches each time the button is pressed.

Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources

DOLBY PLgx

or DOLBY PLg

The signals are decoded in DOLBY PLgx or

DOLBY PLg for playback.

Cinema : This mode is suited for movie sources.

Music : This mode is suited for music sources.

Game : This mode is suited for games.

Pro Logic : This is the Pro Logic playback mode. This can

be selected when playing with a DOLBY PLg

decoder. When this mode is selected, “DOLBY

PL” is displayed.

DTS NEO:6 : The signals are decoded in DTS NEO:6 for

playback.

Cinema : This mode is suited for movie sources.

Music : This mode is suited for music sources.

Operating from the main unit

The “Cinema” or “Music” modes can be directly selected with the

CINEMA button or MUSIC button on the main unit.

neural : It is possible to play analog input signals and

PCM (2-channel, 48kHz or less) in the surround

mode.

This is the optimum mode for playing sources

recorded in XM HD Surround (vpage 92).

n When using a surround back speaker

[Selectable items] DOLBY PLgx DTS NEO:6 neural

n When not using a surround back speaker

[Selectable items] DOLBY PLg DTS NEO:6 neural

Operating from the main unit

The “Cinema”, “Music”, or “Game” modes can be directly selected

with the CINEMA, MUSIC or GAME button on the main unit.

Select the “Cinema”, “Music”, “Game” and “Pro Logic” modes

at GUI menu “Parameter” – “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” –

“Mode” (vpage 52).

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Input signal Display

Dolby

Digital

Source

DOLBY DIGITAL

(other than 2ch) /

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

DOLBY DIGITAL+PLgx CINEMA

DOLBY DIGITAL+PLgx MUSIC

DOLBY DIGITAL

Plus DOLBY DIGITAL +

DOLBY TrueHD DOLBY TrueHD

DTS

Surround

Source

DTS (5.1ch) /

DTS-ES Discrete

6.1 /

DTS-ES Matrix

6.1 /

DTS 96/24

DTS SURROUND

DTS+PLgx CINEMA

DTS+PLgx MUSIC

DTS+NEO:6

DTS ES MTRX6.1 (z1)

DTS ES DSCRT6.1 (z2)

DTS 96/24 (z3)

DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio DTS-HD HI RES

DTS-HD Master

Audio DTS-HD MSTR

DVD-

Audio,

SACD

PCM (multi ch) /

DSD (multi ch)

MULTI CH IN

MULTI IN+PLgx CINEMA

MULTI IN+PLgx MUSIC

MULTI CH IN 7.1

z1: This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Matrix 6.1”

and the AVP-A1HDCI’s “AFDM” setting is set to “ON”.

z2: This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Discrete 6.1”.

z3: This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS 96/24”.

For details, see page 95, 96.

[Selectable items]

STANDARD :

This mode is for decoding the input signals according to their format

and playing surround sound.

The display when the STANDARD mode is selected depends on the

input signal and surround back output playback mode.

Playing Multi-channel Sources

(Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.)

[Selectable items]

7CH STEREO z1 : This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from

all speakers.

WIDE SCREEN : This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of

viewing a movie on a large screen.

SUPER STADIUM : This mode is suited for viewing sports

programs.

ROCK ARENA : This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a

live concert in an arena.

JAZZ CLUB : This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a

live concert in a jazz club.

CLASSIC CONCERT : This mode is for appreciating classical concert

programs.

MONO z2: This mode is for playing monaural movie

sources with surround sound.

VIDEO GAME : This mode is suited for achieving surround

sound with video games.

MATRIX : This mode lets you add a sense of expansion

to stereo music sources.

z1: Can also be set by pressing the 7CH STEREO button on the main

unit. However, the GUI menu is not displayed.

z2: When playing sources recorded in monaural in the MONO mode,

the sound will be off balance with a single channel (left or right),

so input to both channels.

DSP Simulation Playback

The desired mode according to the program source and viewing

situation can be selected from among 9 DENON original surround

modes.

The surround parameters can be adjusted (vpage 93, 94) to

achieve an even more realistic, powerful sound ﬁeld.

Dolby Headphone

The Dolby Headphone mode is set when headphones are

connected to the PHONES jack while in the STANDARD (DOLBY/

DTS SURROUND) mode.

[Selectable items] DOLBY HEADPHONE

When RECOUT mode is set to “SOURCE”, with this ampliﬁer

signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode can be output from

the recording output terminals and recorded on another recorder

(vpage 73).

[Selectable items]

STEREO :

This is the mode for playing in stereo. The tone can be adjusted.

Sound is output from the front left and right speakers and subwoofer.

Stereo Playback

• Press the DSP SIMULATION button on the main unit or SIMU button

on the main remote control unit to switch the surround mode. The

mode switches each time the button is pressed.

• Depending on the program source being played, it may not be

possible to achieve a satisfactory surround effect. In this case, try

other modes to achieve a sound ﬁeld suited to your tastes.

When the main unit’s DIRECT/STEREO button or the main remote

control unit’s D/ST button is pressed, DIRECT mode can be switched

to STEREO mode.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

For details, see page 96.

• To cancel, press the PURE DIRECT button on the main unit or the

PURE button on the main remote control unit.

• When in the PURE DIRECT mode, the GUI screen is not displayed

and the display on the main unit is turned off.

• If the HDMI input connector is selected, video outputs are output in

the PURE DIRECT mode.

• The channel level and surround parameters in the PURE DIRECT

mode are the same as in the DIRECT mode.

Press the PURE DIRECT button on the main unit or the

PURE button on the main remote control unit.

Parameter

Audio

Adjust various audio parameters.

F Menu tree F

Parameter

Audio

a Surround Parameters

s Tone

d Room EQ

f Dynamic EQ

g RESTORER

h Night Mode

j Audio Delay

Parameters can be called out directly by pressing the PARA button on

the main remote control unit.

a Surround Parameters

Adjust surround sound parameters.

The adjustable parameters differ for the different surround modes

(vpage 93, 94).

Mode

Select the mode according to the playback source.

n In the PLgx or PLg mode

[Selectable items] Cinema Music Game Pro Logic

n In the DTS NEO:6 mode

[Selectable items] Cinema Music

The “Music” mode is also effective for movie sources including a lot

of stereo music.

Playback in the PURE DIRECT Mode

This is the mode that recreates the original sound most faithfully,

providing extremely high quality sound.

Input signal Display

Analog signal /

PCM (2ch) /

Dolby Digital source /

DTS source /

Other 2-channel digital signals

DIRECT

DSD (2ch) DSD DIRECT (z)

PCM (multi ch)

MULTI CH DIRECT

M DIRECT + PLgx CINEMA

M DIRECT + PLgx MUSIC

M DIRECT 7.1

DSD (multi ch) DSD MULTI DIRECT (z)

[Selectable items]

DIRECT :

In this mode the signals bypass the tone control circuitry for high

quality sound.

The display when the DIRECT mode is selected depends on the input

signal.

For multi-channel sources, the display depends on the surround back

output’s play mode.

z: When DSD signals are converted to PCM signals as set by the

audio parameters and speaker settings, “DIRECT” or “MULTI CH

DIRECT” is displayed.

Direct Playback

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

DRC

Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).

[Selectable items] Auto Low Middle High OFF

This can be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode.

D.COMP

Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).

[Selectable items] OFF Low Middle High

When playing DTS sources, this is only displayed for compatible

software.

LFE

Adjust the low-frequency effects level (LFE).

[Variable range] –10dB ~ 0dB

Center Image

Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider

sound.

[Variable range] 0.0 ~ 0.3 ~ 1.0

Panorama

Assign front L/R signal also to surround channels, for wider sound.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

For proper playback of the different program sources, we recommend

setting to the values below.

• Dolby Digital sources: “0 dB”

• DTS movie sources: “0 dB”

• DTS music sources: “–10 dB”

Delay Time

Adjust delay time to control sound stage size.

[Variable range] 0 ms ~ 30 ms ~ 300 ms

Effect

Switch effect signal for multi-surround speakers on and off.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Effect Level

Adjust effect signal level.

[Variable range] 1 ~ 10 ~ 15

b Only when the surround mode is “MONO”.

[Variable range] 0 ~ 15

Room Size

Determine size of acoustic environment.

[Selectable items]

Small Medium small Medium Medium large Large

Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the

surround signals seems unnatural.

NOTE

“Room Size” does not indicate the size of the room in which sources

are played.

Dimension

Shift sound image center to front or rear, to adjust playback balance.

[Variable range] 0 ~ 3 ~ 6

Center Width

Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider

sound.

[Variable range] 0 ~ 3 ~ 7

Cinema EQ

Soften the treble range of movie soundtracks for better understanding.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

n In the THX mode (for 2-channel sources)

[Selectable items]

Surround Back ON Surround Back OFF THX Games Mode

n In the THX mode (for Multi-channel sources)

[Selectable items]

THX Surr. EX ES DSCRT ES MTRX 7.1+THX

PLIIx Cinema + THX THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music Mode

THX Games Mode Surround Back OFF

Decoder

Select this when playing analog, PCM or other 2 channel sources.

The signals are converted into multichannel signals using the decoders

shown below and played in the Dolby Headphone mode.

n In the THX mode (for 2-channel sources)

[Selectable items]

PLIIx CINEMA PLII CINEMA Pro Logic NEO:6 CINEMA

n In the DOLBY HEADPHONE mode

[Selectable items]

PLII CINEMA PLII MUSIC NEO:6 CINEMA

NEO:6 MUSIC OFF

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Subwoofer Att.

Attenuate subwoofer level when using EXT. IN input.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Set this to “ON” if the subwoofer channel level seems too high when

playing Super Audio CD.

Subwoofer

Turn subwoofer output on and off.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Default

Resets the settings to the default values.

Tone Defeat

Turn tone adjustments off.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

The tone cannot be adjusted when in the DIRECT, PURE DIRECT and

HOME THX CINEMA mode.

Bass

Adjust bass for all channels together.

[Variable range] –6dB ~ +6dB

Treble

Adjust treble for all channels together.

[Variable range] –6dB ~ +6dB

“Bass” and “Treble” can be set when “Tone Defeat” is set to “OFF”.

s Tone

Adjust the tonal quality of the sound.

Front

Adjust each front channel tone.

[Selectable items] Bass Treble

[Variable range] –6dB ~ +6dB

Center

Adjust each center channel tone.

[Selectable items] Bass Treble

[Variable range] –6dB ~ +6dB

Surround

Adjust each surround channel tone.

[Selectable items] Bass Treble

[Variable range] –6dB ~ +6dB

Surround Back

Adjust each surround back channel tone.

[Selectable items] Bass Treble

[Variable range] –6dB ~ +6dB

AFDM

Auto-select surround mode by source.

This function only works for software containing a special identiﬁcation

signal.

If the software being played is recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES,

it is played in 6.1-channels. If not, it is played in 5.1-channels.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Example : Playing Dolby Digital software (with EX ﬂag)

• When “AFDM” is set to “ON”, the surround mode is automatically

set to the DOLBY D + PLgx C mode.

• To play in the DOLBY DIGITAL EX mode, set “AFDM” to “OFF” and

“SB CH Out” to “MTRX ON”.

Some Dolby Digital EX sources do not include EX ﬂags. If the playback

mode does not switch automatically even when “AFDM” is set to

“ON”, set “SB CH Out” to “MTRX ON” or “PLgx CINEMA”.

SB CH Out (for Multi-channel sources)

Select playback mode for surround back channels.

[Selectable items]

NON MTRX MTRX ON PL

x CINEMA z1

x MUSIC z2

ES MTRX z3

ES DSCRT z4 DSCRT ON OFF

z1: This can be selected when “Surround Back” is set to “2spkrs”

at the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Speaker Setup” – “Speaker

Conﬁguration” setting (vpage 29).

z2: This can be selected when “Surround Back” is set to “2spkrs”

or “1spkr” at the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Speaker Setup”

– “Speaker Conﬁguration” setting.

z3: This can be selected when playing DTS sources.

z4: This can be selected when playing DTS sources including a

discrete 6.1-channel signal identiﬁcation signal.

SB CH Out (for 2-channel sources)

Determine whether to use surround back speakers.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Input Channel

Select channel using external input connectors (EXT. IN) for source

being played.

[Selectable items] 8CH 2CH

Can be selected when GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Audio Setup”–

“EXT. IN Setup”– “Mode” is set to “DSP” (vpage 33).

When using the surround back speaker, you can change the “SB

CH Out” setting by pressing the STANDARD button.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

About the RESTORER function

• Such compressed audio formats as MP3, WMA (Windows Media

Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating

signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The

RESTORER function generates the signals eliminated upon

compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those of the

original sound before compression. It also corrects the sense of

volume of the bass to obtain richer sound with compressed audio

signals.

• This is displayed on the GUI menu and can be set when the input

source is set to “XM”, “HD Radio” or “NET/USB”, or when analog

signals (including AM/FM signals) or PCM signals (fs = 44.1/48

kHz) are input.

[Selectable items]

OFF

Mode1 (RESTORER 64)

Mode2 (RESTORER 96)

Mode3 (RESTORER HQ)

The default setting for “NET/USB” and “iPod” is “Mode3”. All others

are set to “OFF”.

g RESTORER

This function restores compressed audio signals to how they

were before compression and corrects the sense of volume of

the bass and treble to obtain richer playback sound.

Operating from the main unit or main remote

control unit

During playback, press the RESTORER button on the main unit or the

RSTR button on the main remote control unit.

When set to something other than “OFF”, “ ” is displayed.

Mode 1

(RESTORER 64)

Mode 2

(RESTORER 96)

Mode 3

(RESTORER HQ)

OFF

d Room EQ

Select room equalizer for current environment.

[Selectable items]

Audyssey : Optimize frequency response of all speakers.

Audyssey Byp. L/R : Optimize frequency response of speakers

except front L and R speakers.

Audyssey Flat : Optimize frequency response of all speakers to

ﬂat response.

Manual : Apply frequency response set with “Manual

EQ” (vpage 34).

OFF : Turn equalizer off.

Operating from the main unit or main remote

control unit

Press the ROOM EQ button on the main unit or the EQ button on the

main remote control.

Audyssey Audyssey Byp. L/R

Audyssey Flat

Manual

OFF

When “Audyssey” is selected, “ ” lights.

When “Audyssey Byp. L/R” or “Audyssey Flat” is selected, or when

the auto setup measuring results have changed, “ ” lights.

• “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and “Audyssey Flat” can be

selected after the auto setup procedure has been performed.

• If the settings of the speakers for which “None” has been determined

at “Auto Setup” are changed, “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R”

and “Audyssey Flat” cannot be selected and measurements have to

be taken again to include the newly-added speakers.

• When using headphones, “Room EQ” is always set to “OFF”.

Audyssey

OFF

Manual

Audyssey Byp. L/R

Audyssey Flat

[Selectable items] ON

OFF

• “Dynamic EQ” is displayed when selecting “Audyssey”, “Audyssey

Flat” or “Audyssey Byp.L/R” in the “Room EQ” setup. When set to

“ON”, the “ ” indicator is lit.

• When the audio setup measuring results have changed, “ “

lights.

f Dynamic EQ

Make Dynamic EQ settings.

Operating from the main unit

Press the DYNAMIC EQ button.

h Night Mode

Optimized setting for late-night listening.

[Selectable items] OFF Low Middle High

Operating from the main unit or main remote

control unit

Press the NIGHT button on the main unit or the NGT button on the

main remote control unit.

The “ ” indicator lights when “Low”, “Middle” or “High” is

selected.

OFF Low Middle

High

Subwoofer

Adjust each subwoofer channel tone.

[Selectable items] Bass

[Variable range] –6dB ~ +6dB

• This can be set individually for the separate surround mode other

than PURE DIRECT, DIRECT and Home THX Cinema mode.

• When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “ON”, you cannot use the “Tone”

setting (vpage 94).

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Information

a MAIN ZONE

Shows information about settings for MAIN ZONE.

The items displayed differ according to the input source.

s ZONE2/3/4

Shows information about settings for multi-zone.

[Items to be checked]

Select Source Name Surround Mode Input Mode Room EQ

Dynamic EQ Video Select i/p Scaler Source Level

Rec Select Night Mode RESTORER etc.

[Items to be checked]

Power Select Source Volume Level

• When the input signal is 1080p the “Picture Adjust” setting will be

ineffective.

• Adjusting the “Contrast”, “Brightness”, “Chroma Level” and “Hue”

settings does not affect the HDMI input signal.

• “Hue” can be adjusted for composite video and S-Video signals.

• The adjustment values are stored for the individual input sources.

• “DNR”, “Enhancer”, and “Sharpness” are each effective with HDMI

output. However, they are ineffective with 480i/576i output.

f Hue

Adjust color hue.

[Variable range] –6 ~ 0 ~ +6

g DNR

Reduces the overall level of noise on the picture.

[Selectable items] OFF Low Middle High

h Enhancer

Emphasize picture contours.

[Variable range] 0 ~ +12

j Sharpness

Adjust color deﬁnition.

[Variable range] –6 ~ 0 ~ +6

Picture Adjust

Adjust the picture quality.

F Menu tree F

Parameter

Picture Adjust

a Contrast

s Brightness

d Chroma Level

f Hue

g DNR

h Enhancer

j Sharpness

[Variable range] –6 ~ 0 ~ +6

a Contrast

Adjust picture contrast.

s Brightness

Adjust picture brightness.

d Chroma Level

Adjust picture chroma level (saturation).

[Variable range] 0 ~ +12

[Variable range] –6 ~ 0 ~ +6

j Audio Delay

Compensate for mismatched timing between video and audio.

Delay audio.

This sets the delay time for audio signals.

[Variable range] 0 ms ~ 200 ms

• This cannot be adjusted when playing in the EXT. IN (when in analog

mode), DIRECT or STEREO mode (with “Crossover Frequency” set

to “FIXED–THX–”, “Front” set to “Large”, “Tone Defeat” to “ON”

and “Room EQ” to “OFF”).

• The adjustment range is 0 to 100 ms when the Auto Lipsync

Correction function is activated.

Operating from the main unit or the main

remote control unit

b The GUI menu is not displayed when carrying out this setting.

q Press the AUDIO DELAY button on the main unit or A. DL button on

the main remote control unit.

w Use the o p button to set.

Status

Shows information about current settings.

F Menu tree F

Information

Status

a MAIN ZONE

s ZONE2/3/4

Setup



Getting Started Connections Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Auto Surround Mode

Shows information about auto surround mode

settings.

The surround mode for which the last memory

function was used for the different input signal

types is displayed.

F Menu tree F

Information

Auto Surround Mode

Quick Select

Shows information about “Quick Select” settings.

F Menu tree F

Information

Quick Select

Quick Select 1

Quick Select 2

Quick Select 3

HDMI Information

Shows information about HDMI input/output

signals and monitor.

F Menu tree F

Information

HDMI Information

a Signal Information

s Monitor1

d Monitor2

Audio Input Signal

Shows information about audio input signals.

F Menu tree F

Information

Audio Input Signal

Preset Station

Shows information about preset stations.

F Menu tree F

Information

Preset Station

[Items to be checked]

Select Source Input Mode Room EQ

Auto Surround Mode setting Volume Level

[Input source] TUNER XM HD Radio NET/USB

[Items to be checked] A1 ~ G8

For instructions on storing settings at Quick Select 1 to 3, see page

75.

When the STATUS button on the main unit is pressed, the set’s status

can be checked on the display.

[Items to be checked]

Analog/PCM 2ch Digital 2ch Digital 5.1ch Multi ch

a Signal Information

The HDMI input/output signal information is displayed.

s Monitor1

The HDMI monitor 1 information is displayed.

d Monitor2

The HDMI monitor 2 information is displayed.

[Items to be checked] Resolution Color Space Pixel Depth

[Items to be checked] Interface Supported resol.

[Items to be checked]

Surround Mode : The currently set surround mode is displayed.

Signal : The input signal type is displayed.

fs : The input signal’s sampling frequency is

displayed.

Format : The number of channels in the input signal (front,

surround, LFE) is displayed.

Offset : The dialogue normalization correction value is

displayed.

Flag : “MATRIX” is displayed if the input signal has

undergone matrix processing, “DISCRETE” if the

input signal has undergone discrete processing.

Dialogue normalization function

Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of Dolby Digital,

which is used to keep the programs at the same average listening

level so the user does not have to change the volume control

between Dolby Digital programs. When playing back software

which has been encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see

a brief message in the front panel display which will read “Dial.

Norm X dB” (X being a numeric value). The display is showing how

the program level relates with THX calibration level. If you want to

play the program at calibrated theatrical levels, you may wish to

adjust the volume. For example, if you see the following message:

“Dial. Norm + 4 dB” in the front panel display, to keep the overall

output level at THX calibrated loudness, just turn down the volume

control by 4 dB. However, unlike a movie theater where the playback

loudness is preset, you can choose your preferred volume setting

for best enjoyment.

Setup



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

SOURCE SELECT MASTER VOLUME

SOURCE

SELECT

[POWER ON]

[MUTE]

[POWER OFF]

MASTER

VOLUME

[ AMP]

Playback

Playing Video and Audio Equipment

1Prepare the equipment.

q Load the DVD, CD or other software in the player.

(vSee the operating instructions of the respective devices.)

w To play a video device, switch the monitor input.

(vSee the monitor’s operating instructions.)

2To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the AMP mode.

(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

3Use SOURCE SELECT to select the input source.

: “Source Select” (vpage 45)

4Start playback.

(vSee the operating instructions of the respective devices.)

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit

[ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

Preparations

1Press <POWER>.

The power indicator lights red and the power is set to the

standby mode.

2Press <ON/STANDBY> or [POWER ON].

The power indicator ﬂashes green and the power turns on.

To operate the AVP-A1HDCI using the main remote control unit, set

the remote control unit to the AMP mode (vpage 77 “Remote

Control Unit Operations”).

Turning the Power Off

q Press <ON/STANDBY> or [POWER OFF].

The power is set to the standby mode.

w Press <POWER>.

The power indicator turns off, and so does the power.

NOTE

Power continues to be supplied to some of the circuitry even when the

power is in the standby mode. When leaving home for long periods of

time or when traveling, either press <POWER> to turn off the power,

or unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

Turning the Power On

Either turn <MASTER VOLUME> or press [MASTER

VOLUME].

Press [MUTE].

To cancel, press [MUTE] again. Muting can also be canceled by adjusting

the master volume.

Plug the headphones into <PHONES>.

The sound from the pre-out connectors is automatically cut.

NOTE

Be careful not to set the volume too high when using headphones.

Operations During Playback

Adjusting the Master Volume

Turning Off the Sound Temporarily (Muting)

Listening with Headphones

Basic Operation

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Presetting Radio Stations

(Preset Memory)

Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can

tune them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset.

1Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset.

2Press [MEMO].

3Press [A ~ G] to select the block in which the station is

to be preset, then press [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to select

the preset number.

b The memory block can also be selected by pressing [SHIFT].

4Press [MEMO] again to complete the setting.

• To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.

• Stations can be preset automatically at GUI menu “Source Select”

– “TUNER” – “Auto Preset” (vpage 46).

NOTE

Preset stations are erased by overwriting them.

1Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]

(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.

: ”Source Select” (vpage 45)

2To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the TUNER ( ) mode.

(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

3Press [BAND] to select “FM” or “AM”.

4Tune in the desired broadcast station.

q To tune in automatically (Auto Tuning)

Press [MODE] to light the “AUTO” indicator on the display, then

use [d f] to select the station you want to hear.

w To tune in manually (Manual Tuning)

Press [MODE] to turn off the display’s “AUTO” indicator, then use

[d f] to select the station you want to hear.

Listening to FM/AM Broadcasts

• It is also possible to switch to “FM” or “AM” in step 1 by pressing

[TUNER].

• If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in

manually.

• When tuning in stations manually, press and hold [d f] to change

frequencies continuously.

• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at

GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “Tuner”

(vpage 42).

Basic Operation

[SEARCH]

[CHANNEL]

[TUNER],

(AMP mode)

[SHIFT]

[ TU]

[d f]

[A ~ G]

[1 ~ 8]

[MEMO]

[MODE]

[BAND]

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit

[ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

( mode)

Press <TUNING PRESET>, then turn <SOURCE SELECT>

to select the preset radio station.

Listening to Preset Stations

Operation on the Main Unit

Operation on the Main Remote Control Unit

n Recalling preset stations from the remote control

unit

1Press [A ~ G] to select the memory block.

2Press [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to select the desired preset

channel.

Playback

0

Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Program Type (PTY)

PTY identiﬁes the type of RDS program.

The program types and their displays are as follows:

NEWS News

INFOM Information

SPORTS Sports

TALK Talk

ROCK Rock

CLS ROCK Classic rock

ADLT HIT Adult hits

SOFT RCK Soft rock

TOP 40 Top 40

COUNTRY Country

OLDIES Oldies

SOFT Soft

NOSTALGA Nostalgia

JAZZ Jazz

CLASSICL Classical

R & B R & B

SOFT R&B Soft R&B

LANGUAGE Language

REL MUSC Religious music

REL TALK Religious talk

PERSNLTY Personality

PUBLIC Public

COLLEGE College

WEATHER Weather

Trafﬁc Program (TP)

TP identiﬁes programs that carry trafﬁc announcements.

This allows you to easily ﬁnd out the latest trafﬁc conditions in your

area before leaving home.

RDS (Radio Data System)

RDS (works only on the FM band) is a broadcasting service which

allows a station to send additional information along with the

regular radio program signal.

The following three types of RDS information can be received

with this unit:

Radio Text (RT)

RT allows RDS stations to send text messages that appear on the

display.

NOTE

The operations described below using [SEARCH] will not function in

areas in which there are no RDS broadcasts.

1Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]

(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.

2To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the TUNER ( ) mode.

(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

3Press [SEARCH] to select “RDS”.

4Press [CHANNEL].

The search for RDS stations begins automatically.

b If no RDS stations are found with the above operation, all the

reception bands are searched.

b When a broadcast station is found, that station’s name appears on

the display.

5To continue searching, repeat steps 2 to 3.

b If no RDS station is found when all the frequencies have been

searched, “NO RDS” is displayed.

RDS Search

Use this function to automatically tune to FM stations that provide

the RDS service.

n Default settings

Auto tuner presets

A1 ~ A8 87.5 / 89.1 / 98.1 / 107.9 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 /

90.1 MHz

B1 ~ B8 520 / 600 / 1000 / 1400 / 1500 / 1710 kHz,

90.1 / 90.1 MHz

C1 ~ C8 90.1 MHz

D1 ~ D8 90.1 MHz

E1 ~ E8 90.1 MHz

F1 ~ F8 90.1 MHz

G1 ~ G8 90.1 MHz

1Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]

(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.

2To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the TUNER ( ) mode.

(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

3Press [SEARCH] to select “PTY”.

4Watching the display, press ui to call out the

desired program type.

5Press [CHANNEL].

PTY search begins automatically.

b If there is no station broadcasting the designated program type

with the above operation, all the reception bands are searched.

b The station name is displayed on the display after searching

stops.

6To continue searching, repeat steps 2 to 4.

b If no station broadcasting the designated program type is found

when all the frequencies have been searched, “NO PROGRAMME”

is displayed.

PTY Search

Use this function to ﬁnd RDS stations broadcasting a designated

program type (PTY).

For a description of each program type, refer to “Program Type

(PTY)”.

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

[SEARCH]

[NUMBER]

[d f]

uiop

ENTER

[SAT TU]

(AMP mode)

[ TU]

[SEARCH]

[CHANNEL]

[TUNER]

[ TU]

1Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]

(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.

2To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the TUNER ( ) mode.

(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

3Press [SEARCH] to select “TP”.

4Press [CHANNEL].

TP search begins automatically.

b If no TP station is found with the above operation, all the reception

bands are searched.

b The station name is displayed on the display after searching

stops.

5To continue searching, repeat steps 2 to 3.

b If no other TP station is found when all the frequencies have been

searched, “NO PROGRAMME” is displayed.

TP Search

Use this function to ﬁnd RDS stations broadcasting trafﬁc

programs (TP stations).

ENTER

uio p

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit

[ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

( mode)

(AMP mode) 1Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]

(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.

2To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the TUNER ( ) mode.

(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

3Press [SEARCH] to select “RT”.

b While receiving an RDS broadcast station, the text data broadcast

from the station is displayed.

b To turn the display off, press o p.

b If no text data is being broadcast, “NO TEXT DATA” is displayed.

RT (Radio Text)

“RT” appears on the display when radio text data is received.

Listening to XM Satellite Radio

Programs

( mode)

About XM Radio

XM is North America’s number one satellite radio company, offering

an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in

premier sports, news, talk radio, comedy, children’s and entertainment

programming, broadcast in superior digital audio quality coast to coast.

For more information, or to subscribe, U.S. customers visit xmradio.

com or call XM Listener Care at 1-800- XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346);

Canadian customers visit xmradio.ca or call XM Listener Care at 1-877-

GETXMSR (1-877-438-9677).

XM Ready® Legal

XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and

Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM service.

It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer,

hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or

software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM satellite

Radio System. Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a

one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and programming subject

to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with

an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling

1-800-XMRADIO (U.S. residents) and 1-877-GETXMSR (Canadian

residents). XM Service only available in the 48 contiguous United

XM Ready® Subscription

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, inserted the

XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock to your

XM Ready® audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready

to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three

places to ﬁnd your eight character XM Radio ID: On the XM Mini-

Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record

the Radio ID below for reference.

Note:

The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or

“F”.

Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at

http://activate.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-

2346). Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada online at

https://activate.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438- 9677).

You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the

satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes

10-15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep

your XM Ready audio system on for up to an hour. When you can

access the full lineup on your XM Ready audio system you are done.

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

1Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [SAT TU]

(AMP mode) to select “XM”.

: ”Source Select” (vpage 45)

2To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the TUNER ( ) mode.

(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

3Use [d f] to select the channel.

When the channel is tuned in, the name of the song and artist

are displayed.

• The channel switches continuously when [d f] is pressed and held.

• XM Radio channels can be preset using the same procedure as for

FM/AM stations (vpage 59, 60 “Presetting Radio Stations (Preset

Memory)” and “Listening to Preset Stations”).

• The artist name, song title, category and reception level can be

checked by pressing <STATUS>.

• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at

GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “Tuner”

(vpage 42).

Basic Operation Checking the XM Signal Strength and

Radio ID

1Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [SAT TU]

(AMP mode) to select “XM”.

2Press <STATUS> until “SIGNAL” appears on the

display.

The display will switch as shown below, depending on the

reception conditions.

Display GUI Status

GOOD Signal strength is good

MARGINAL Signal strength is marginal

WEAK Signal strength is weak

NO No signal

3Adjust the position of the antenna until “SIGNAL:

GOOD” is shown on the display.

4Press <STATUS> until the channel (example:

“XM001”) is displayed.

5Press [d f] and select channel 0 (XM000).

The radio ID is shown on the display.

The strength of both the XM satellite and terrestrial signals can be

checked at GUI menu “Source Select” – “XM” – “Antenna Aiming”

(vpage 49).

Radio ID

Accessing XM Radio Channels Directly

1Press [SEARCH].

2Press [NUMBER] then input the channel.

Example: Accessing channel “XM123”:

[1] → [2] → [3]

b If no button is pressed within several seconds, the channel

automatically switches to the one whose number has been input.

3Press ENTER to set that channel.

Reception switches to the selected channel.

• “LOADING” is displayed while channels or data are being received.

• “XM - - -” is displayed if the selected channel cannot be used.

Searching Categories

1Press o p.

2Use o p to select the category, then use ui to select

the desired channel.

Channel category

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit

[ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

[BAND]

[SEARCH]

[MODE]

[d f]

[DTU]

[

NET/DTU]

[POWER OFF]

[ iPod]

[iPod]

[CHANNEL

–

]

( mode)

(AMP mode) (AMP mode)

HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From iBiquity

Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and

HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Using the HD Radio Receiver

HD Radio technology provides higher quality sound than conventional

broadcasts and allows reception of data services.

• FM sounds as sensational as CDs

• AM sounds as rich as analog FM stereo

• A variety of “data services”, including text-based information, song

title, artist name, album name, genre, etc. can be received.

Furthermore, in addition to conventional broadcasts, with HD

Radio broadcasting it is possible to choose from up to 8 multicast

programs.

For detailed information on HD Radio technology, please go to “www.

ibiquity.com”.

Listening to HD Radio™ Stations

HD Radio stations offer higher sound quality than conventional

FM/AM broadcasts. It is also possible to receive data services and

select broadcasts from among up to eight multicast programs. 1Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [DTU] (AMP

mode) to select “HD Radio”.

: “Source Select” (vpage 45)

2To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the NET/DTU ( ) mode.

(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

3Press [BAND] to select “FM” or “AM”.

4Tune in the desired broadcast station.

q To tune in automatically (Auto Tuning)

Press [MODE] to select “HD Auto” or “Auto”, then use [d f] to

select the station you want to hear.

• The “ ” indicator lights on the display when an HD Radio

station is tuned in.

• When “HD Auto” (tuning mode) is selected, only HD Radio

stations are tuned in.

• If “Auto” (tuning mode) is selected, both HD Radio and analog

stations are tuned in.

w To tune in manually (Manual Tuning)

Press [MODE] to select “Manual”, then use [d f].

Basic Operation

• It is also possible to switch to “FM” or “AM” at step 1 by pressing

[DTU].

• If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in

manually.

• When tuning in stations manually, press and hold [d f] to change

frequencies continuously.

• HD Radio stations can be preset using the same procedure as for

FM/AM stations (vpage 59, 60 “Presetting Radio Stations (Preset

Memory)” and “Listening to Preset Stations”). In addition, with HD

Radio technology, multicasts can also be preset.

• The time for which the GUI menu is displayed can be set at GUI

menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “Tuner”

(vpage 42).

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Check the HD Radio Reception

Information

Press <STATUS> while an HD Radio broadcast is being

received.

The current reception information is shown on the display.

q Normal

↓

w Frequency / Signal strength

↓

e Long station name / Program and Program type

↓

r Title name / Artist name

↓

t Album name / Genre name

Selecting Audio Programs

An HD Radio broadcast includes up to 8 audio programs (HD1 to

HD8 and Analog). The different audio programs also have data

programs.

Press [SEARCH] or ui to select the audio program.

If the station you are listening to has multiple audio programs, “HD1”

is indicated on the display. If it only has one audio program, “HD”

is indicated.

If an audio program from HD2 to HD8 has been interrupted, HD1 is

automatically selected after about 20 seconds.

NOTE

If the station signal weakens while receiving a digital broadcast (while

“ ” and text is displayed), the mode automatically switches to the

analog reception mode (the reception frequency is displayed).

Because of this, the “ ” indicator and text may ﬂicker if the station

signal level is weak and unstable.

n Default settings

Tuner presets

A1 ~ A8 87.5 / 87.9 / 89.1 / 93.3 / 97.9 / 98.1 / 98.9 /100.1 MHz

B1 ~ B8 101.9 / 102.7 / 107.9 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1

MHz

C1 ~ C8 530 / 600 / 930 / 1000 / 1120 / 1210 / 1400 / 1710 kHz

D1 ~ D8 90.1 MHz

E1 ~ E8 90.1 MHz

F1 ~ F8 90.1 MHz

G1 ~ G8 90.1 MHz

NOTE

• Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some

functions may not operate.

• DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss of iPod

data.

• With the default settings, the iPod can be used connected to the

VCR (iPod) connector.

• Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency

components of compressed audio ﬁles and achieve a richer sound.

The default setting is “Mode3”.

• Press <ON/STANDBY> or [POWER OFF] and set the AVP-A1HDCI’s

power to the standby mode before disconnecting the iPod. Also

switch the input source to one to which the GUI menu “iPod dock”

is not assigned before disconnecting the iPod.

iPod® Playback

The music on an iPod can be played by using the Control Dock for

iPod (ASD-1R, sold separately).

The operation can also be performed using the buttons on the main

unit or remote control unit while watching the GUI menus.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.

and other countries.

b The iPod may only be used to copy or play contents that are not

copyrighted or contents for which copying or playback is legally

permitted for your private use as an individual. Be sure to comply

with applicable copyright legislation.

1Make the necessary preparations.

q Set the iPod in the DENON Control Dock for iPod.

(vSee the Control Dock for iPod’s operating instructions.)

w Assign the Control Dock for iPod’s input.

: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Assign”–

”iPod dock” (vpage 49)

2Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [iPod] (AMP

mode) to select the input source assigned in step 1-w

above.

(iPod screen)

b If the screens above are not displayed, the iPod may not be

properly connected. Try connecting again.

: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Play”

(vpage 46)

3To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the iPod mode.

(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

OK to disconnect

Basic Operation

4Press [SEARCH] and hold it down for a 2 seconds or

more to select the display mode.

To switch between modes, press and hold down the button.

When remote mode is active, “Remote” is displayed.

[Display mode] Browse mode Remote mode

Display location Main unit display

iPod display

Playable

files

Audio file S S

Video file A S

Active

buttons

Remote

control unit

(AVP-A1HDCI)

S S

iPod A S

z : Video may not be output, depending on the combination of ASD-

1R and iPod.

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

ENTER

uio p

uiop

[SEARCH]

[CHANNEL +/−]

ENTER

[8],[9],

[6],[7],

[1],[2]

[ iPod]

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit

[ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the

iPod

Photo and video data on the iPod can be viewed on the monitor.

(Only for iPod equipped with slideshow or video functions.)

1Press and hold [SEARCH] to set the Remote mode.

“Remote iPod” is displayed on the AVP-A1HDCI’s display.

2Watching the iPod’s screen, use ui to select

“Photos” or “Videos”.

3Press ENTER until the image you want to view is

displayed.

• “TV Out” at the iPod’s “Slideshow Settings” or “Video Settings”

must be set to “On” in order to display the iPod’s photo data or videos

on the monitor. For details, see the iPod’s operating instructions.

• When unable to operate by the remote control unit, use the iPod

unit.

Shufﬂing playback

Press [CHANNEL +] or [RANDOM] on the sub remote control unit.

[Selectable items] Albums

Songs

OFF

: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” –

”Playback Mode (iPod)” – “Shufﬂe” (vpage 48)

Searching up or down pages

Press [SEARCH], then press o (down) or p (up).

To cancel, press ui or [SEARCH].

To switch between the Browse and Remote modes

Either press and hold [SEARCH].

• The title name, artist name and album name can be checked by

pressing <STATUS> during playback.

• On the AVP-A1HDCI, folder and ﬁle names can be displayed as

titles. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “ .

(period)”.

• The time for which the GUI are displayed can be set at GUI menu

“Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “iPod” (vpage 42).

(Main remote control unit)

To pause

During playback, press ENTER or [1].

Press again to resume playback.

Fast-forwarding or fast-reversing

During playback, either press and hold u (to fast-reverse) or i (to

fast-forward), or press [6] or [7].

To cue to the beginning of a track

During playback, either press u (to cue to the previous track) or i (to

cue to the next track), or press [8] or [9].

To stop

During playback, either press and hold ENTER or press [2].

Playing repeatedly

Press [CHANNEL –] or [REPEAT] on the sub remote control unit.

[Selectable items] All

One

OFF

: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” –

”Playback Mode (iPod)” – “Repeat” (vpage 48)

Listening to Music

1Use ui to select the menu, then press ENTER or p

to select the music le to be played.

2Press ENTER or p.

Playback starts.

[REPEAT]

[8]

[2]

[9]

[1/3]

[RANDOM]

uiop

ENTER

(Sub remote control unit)

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

n USB memory devices

A USB memory device can be connected to the AVP-A1HDCI’s

USB port to play music and still picture (JPEG) ﬁles stored on the

USB memory device.

· Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and

MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on the

AVP-A1HDCI.

· The AVP-A1HDCI is compatible with USB memory devices in

“FAT16” or “FAT32” format.

GAlbum art functionH

When an MP3 music ﬁle includes album art data, the album art can

be displayed while playing the ﬁle.

GSlide show functionH

Still picture (JPEG) ﬁles stored on USB memory devices can be

played as slide shows.

The time for which each picture is displayed can be set.

Installing Windows Media Player ver. 11

q If Windows XP Service Pack 2 has not yet been installed, either

download it free of charge from Microsoft or install it via a

Windows update installer.

w Download the latest version of Windows Media Player ver.

11, either directly from Microsoft or using a Windows update

installer.

b When using Windows Vista, there is no need to download a new

version of Windows Media Player.

GSlide show functionH

Still picture (JPEG) ﬁles stored in folders on a media server can be

played as slide shows.

The time for which each picture is displayed can be set.

When still picture (JPEG) ﬁles are played on the AVP-A1HDCI, they are

played in the direction in which they are stored in the folder, so store

in them in the direction in which you want them to play.

When still picture (JPEG) ﬁles are played on the AVP-A1HDCI, they are

played in the direction in which they are stored in the folder, so store

in them in the direction in which you want them to play.

[Compatible formats]

Internet

radio

Media server

bUSBb

WMA (Windows

Media Audio) S S Sz

MP3 (MPEG-1

Audio Layer-3) S S S

WAV –S S

MPEG-4 AAC – Sz Sz

FLAC (Free

Lossless Audio

Codec)

–S S

JPEG –S S

A server or server software compatible with distribution in the

corresponding formats is required to play music ﬁles via a network.

z: Only ﬁles that are not protected by copyright can be played on the

AVP-A1HDCI.

Contents downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright

protected. Also, ﬁles encoded in WMA format when ripped from a

CD, etc., on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on

the computer’s settings.

b Media server and USB

• The AVP-A1HDCI is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2)

standards.

• The AVP-A1HDCI is compatible with WMA META tags.

[Playable formats]

Sampling

frequency Bit rate Extension

WMA (Windows

Media Audio) 32/44.1/48 kHz 48~192 kbps .wma

MP3 (MPEG-1

Audio Layer-3) 32/44.1/48 kHz 32~320 kbps .mp3

WAV 32/44.1/48 kHz – .wav

MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16~320 kbps .aac/.m4a/.mp4

FLAC (Free

Lossless Audio

Codec)

32/44.1/48 kHz – .ﬂac

WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits.

n Rhapsody

Rhapsody is a paid music broadcast service of RealNetworks.

When you ﬁrst listen to Rhapsody, take advantage of the “30-day

free trial”. When the free trial period has expired, it is necessary to

subscribe to a Rhapsody account at the Rhapsody homepage and

www.rhapsody.com/denon/signup

Playing Network Audio, USB

Memory Devices or Rhapsody

This procedure can be used to play Internet radio stations or music

or still picture (JPEG) ﬁ les stored on a computer or USB memory

device or Rhapsody.

n About the Internet radio function

• Internet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the

Internet. Internet radio stations from around the world can be

tuned in.

The AVP-A1HDCI is equipped with the following Internet radio

functions:

· Stations can be selected by genre and region.

· Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset.

· Internet radio stations in MP3 and WMA (Windows Media Audio)

format can be listened to.

· Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing an

exclusive DENON Internet radio URL from a Web browser on a

computer.

b The function is managed for individual users, so you must

provide your MAC or e-mail address.

Exclusive URL: http://www.radiodenon.com

b The radio station database service may be suspended without

notice.

• The AVP-A1HDCI’s Internet radio station list is created using a radio

station database service (vTuner). This database service provides a

list edited and created for the AVP-A1HDCI.

n Media server

This function lets you play music ﬁles and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored

on a computer (media server) connected to the AVP-A1HDCI via a

network.

With the AVP-A1HDCI’s network audio playback function,

connection to the server is possible using one of the technologies

below.

· Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service

· Windows Media DRM10

GAlbum art functionH

When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC ﬁle

includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the

music ﬁles are playing.

For music ﬁles in WMA (Windows Media Audio) format, the album art

is only played when using Windows Media Player ver. 11.

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

To pause

During playback, press ENTER.

Press again to resume playback.

To stop

During the play or pause mode, press and hold ENTER.

Searching up or down pages

Press [SEARCH], then press o (down) or p (up).

To cancel, press ui or [SEARCH].

Searching by ﬁrst letter (Character search)

This operation is convenient for choosing items from the menu screens

for Internet radio stations or ﬁles stored on the computer.

q When the menu screen is displayed, press [SEARCH] twice.

w Use o p to select the ﬁrst letter you want to search for.

If there are multiple items starting with the selected letter, they are

displayed in alphabetical order.

If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list.” is displayed.

To cancel, press or ui or [SEARCH].

• Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency

components of compressed audio ﬁles and achieve a richer sound.

The default setting is “Mode3”.

• The time for which the GUI are displayed can be set at GUI menu

“Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “NET/USB” (vpage

42).

• Use <STATUS> to switch between displaying the title name, artist

name or album name.

• The track display order differs with the server speciﬁcation. When,

due to the server speciﬁcation, track display is not in alphabetical

order, character search may not operate correctly.

1Make the necessary preparations.

q Check the network environment, then turn on the AVP-A1HDCI’s

power. (vpage 21 “Network Audio”)

w If settings are required, make the network settings.

(vpage 35 ~ 38 “Network Setup”)

e Prepare the computer. (vComputer’s operating instructions)

Install “Windows Media Player ver. 11”.

2Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [NET/USB]

(AMP mode) to select “NET/USB”.

: “Source Select” –“NET/USB” –“Play”

(vpage 46)

3To operate using the main remote control unit, set the

remote control unit to the NET/DTU ( ) mode.

(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

4Use ui to select the menu, then press ENTER or p

to select the le you want to play.

5Press ENTER or p.

Playback starts.

Basic Operation

ENTER uio p

uiop

[1 ~ 8]

ENTER

[MEMO]

[SEARCH]

[NET/USB]

[A ~ G]

[ NET/DTU]

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit

[ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

( mode)

(AMP mode)

Playing repeatedly

Press [REPEAT] on the sub remote control unit.

[Selectable items] All

One

OFF

: “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” –

“Repeat” (vpage 49)

Playing in random order

Press [RANDOM] on the sub remote control unit.

[Selectable items] ON

OFF

: “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” –

“Random” (vpage 49)

The repeat mode and random mode can only be used when playing

tracks recorded in USB/Media Server/Rhapsody.

[REPEAT] [RANDOM]

(Main remote control unit)

(Sub remote control unit)

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

1Press [MEMO] while the Internet radio station you

want to register is playing.

2Use ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.

3Press o to select “Yes”.

The Internet radio station is registered.

If you do not want to register it, press p.

1Use ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER or

2Use ui to select the Internet radio station, then

press ENTER or p.

The AVP-A1HDCI automatically connects to the Internet and

playback begins.

1Use ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER or

2Use ui to select the Internet radio station you want

to clear, then press [MEMO].

3Press o to select “Delete”.

The selected Internet radio station is cleared.

To cancel the operation without clearing the station, press p.

NOTE

If registered at a number that has already been preset, the previously

registered setting is cleared.

Press [A ~ G], then press [1 ~ 8].

The AVP-A1HDCI automatically connects to the Internet and playback

begins.

1While the Internet radio station you want to preset is

playing, press [MEMO].

2Use ui to select “Preset”, then press ENTER.

3Press [A ~ G], then press [1 ~ 8] to select the desired

preset number.

The Internet radio station is now preset.

• There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet, and the

quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the

tracks varies widely.

Generally, the higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but

depending on the communication lines and server trafﬁc, the music

or audio signals being streamed may be interrupted.

Inversely, lower bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less

tendency for the sound to be interrupted.

• “Server Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed if the station is

busy or not broadcasting.

• On the AVP-A1HDCI, folder and ﬁle names can be displayed as

titles. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “ .

(period)”.

1Use ui to select “Internet Radio”, then press ENTER

or p.

2Use ui to select the item you want to play, then

press ENTER or p.

The station list is displayed.

3Use ui to select the station, then press ENTER or

Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.

Listening to Internet Radio

1Use ui to select “Recently Played”, then press

ENTER or p.

2Use ui to select the item you want to play, then

press ENTER or p.

NOTE

Up to 20 stations stored in “Recently Played”.

n Recently Played Internet Radio Stations

Recently played internet radio stations can be selected from

“Recently Played” in top menu.

Presetting Internet Radio Stations

Preset Internet radio stations can be selected directly.

n Listening to Preset Internet Radio Stations

Registering Internet Radio Stations as Your Favorites

Favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen, so when a station

is registered as a favorite it can be tuned in easily.

n Listening to Internet Radio Stations Registered in

Your Favorites

n Clearing Internet Radio Stations from Your Favorites

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Playing Files Stored on USB Memory

Devices

Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and

MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on the

AVP-A1HDCI.

Basic Operation

1Make the necessary preparations.

• Set the USB port to be used.

: “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” –

“USB Select” (vpage 49)

• Connect the USB memory device to the set USB port.

2Use ui to select “USB”, then press ENTER or p.

3Use ui to select the search item or folder, then press

ENTER or p.

4Use ui to select the le, then press ENTER or p.

Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.

• By default, the front panel’s USB port will be used.

• Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) ﬁle, some time may

be required for the ﬁle to be displayed.

Playing ﬁles that have been Preset or Registered in

Your Favorites

Files can be preset, registered in your favorites and played using the

same operations as for Internet radio stations.

NOTE

• Presettings are erased by overwriting them.

• When the operation described below is performed, the media

server’s database is updated and it may no longer be possible to

play preset or favorite music ﬁles.

• When you quit the media server and then restart it.

• When music ﬁles are deleted or added on the media server.

• When using an ESCIENT server, place “ESCIENT” before the server

name.

Playing Files Stored on a Computer

Use this procedure to play music ﬁles, image ﬁles or playlists.

1Use ui to select “Media Server”, then press ENTER

or p.

2Use ui to select the host name of the computer on

which the music le you want to play is located, then

press ENTER or p.

3Use ui to select the search item or folder, then press

ENTER or p.

4Use ui to select the le, then press ENTER or p.

Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.

• When playing still picture (JPEG) ﬁles, ﬁles can also be selected

using the operation described below.

During playback, either press [d] (previous ﬁle) or [f] (next ﬁle).

• Connections to the required system and speciﬁc settings must be

made in order to play music ﬁles (vpage 21).

• Before starting, you must launch the computer’s server software

and set the ﬁles as server contents. For details, see the operating

instructions of your server software.

• Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) ﬁle, some time may

be required for the ﬁle to be displayed.

Selecting tracks

During playback, either press u (previous track) or i (next track).

ENTER

ui p

ui p ENTER

[df]

[ NET/DTU]

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit

[ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

[USB]

(Main remote control unit)

(Sub remote control unit)

( mode)

Selecting tracks

During playback, either press u (previous track) or i (next track).

• When playing still picture (JPEG) ﬁles, tracks can also be selected

using the operation described below.

During playback, either press [d] (previous ﬁle) or [f] (next ﬁle).

• If the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions, only the

top partition can be selected.

• The AVP-A1HDCI is compatible with MP3 ﬁles conforming to

“MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3” standards.

• When [USB] is pressed, playback starts from the ﬁrst track on the

USB memory device.

Playback

0

Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

NOTE

• The AVP-A1HDCI is equipped with two USB ports, one each on the

front and rear panels. It is not possible to use the set with USB

memory devices connected to both the ports at the same time.

Select the USB port you want to use at the “Source Select” – “NET/

USB” – “Playback Mode” – “USB Select” menu.

• DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss or

damage to data on USB memory devices when using the USB

memory device connected to the AVP-A1HDCI.

• USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.

• DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate

or receive power. When using a USB connection type portable hard

disk of the type for which power can be supplied by connecting an

AC adapter, we recommend using the AC adapter.

• It is not possible to connect and use a computer via the AVP-

A1HDCI’s USB port using a USB cable.

• The AVP-A1HDCI is not compatible with the iPod shufﬂe.

n Username :

[Input characters]

a ~ z A ~ Z 0 ~ 9

! “ # $ % & ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ˜ (space)

n Password :

[Input characters]

a ~ z A ~ Z 0 ~ 9

! “ # $ % & ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ ` { | } ˜ (space)

1Use ui to select “Rhapsody”, then press ENTER or

2Use ui to select “I have a Rhapsody account” or

“Start 30-day free trial”, then press ENTER or p.

3q When selecting “I have a Rhapsody account”

Enter Username and Password.

Select “OK”, then press ENTER.

w When selecting “Start 30-day free trial”

Select “Accept” then press ENTER.

b To cancel, select “Reject”, then press ENTER.

NOTE

• The password should be no longer than 99 characters.

• The password may not contain underscores ( _ ).

Listening to Rhapsody

Preparations

1Use ui to select “Rhapsody Music Guide”, then

press ENTER or p.

2Use ui to select the information for track selection,

then press ENTER or p.

After selecting, the information is displayed.

3Use ui to select the track, then press ENTER or p.

1Use ui to select “Search”, then press ENTER or p.

2Use ui to select the search item, then press ENTER

or p.

The search display appears.

b You can search by artist name, album name or track name.

3Enter the characters, then press ENTER.

Search From Rhapsody Latest Information

Enter a Character Search For the Track You Want to

Listen to

1Use ui to select “Rhapsody Channels”, then press

ENTER or p.

2Use ui to select radio station, then press ENTER or

1Press p while the track you wish to register is

playing.

2Use ui to select “Add to My Library”, then press

ENTER.

The track is entered in the Library.

1Use ui to select “My Library”, then press ENTER

or p.

2Use ui to select the information or track, then press

ENTER.

After selecting, the information is displayed.

1Press p during playback.

2Use ui to select the search item, then press ENTER

or p.

Search From the Rhapsody Internet Radio Station

Registering Tracks in My Library

n Listening to Tracks Registered In My Library

Displaying the Track Menu During Play

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Operating the AVP-A1HDCI Using a

Browser (Web control)

This function lets you operate the AVP-A1HDCI using Internet

Explorer.

1Switch “OFF” the “Power Saving” setting under

“Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” – “Other” on the

GUI menu (vpage 38).

2Check the AVP-A1HDCI’s IP address with “Manual

Setup” – “Network Setup” – “Network Information”

on the GUI menu (vpage 38).

3Enter the AVP-A1HDCI IP address in Internet

Explorer’s address box.

For example, if the IP address of AVP-A1HDCI is “192.168.11.3”,

enter “http://192.168.11.3”.

Checking the IP address.

Entering the IP address.

4When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu

you want to operate.

5Operate.

[Example 1] Main zone control screen

*1 : Normally, there is a change to the latest information each time

you operate. When operated from the main unit, click because

the screen is not updated.

*2 : Displayed when setting “Top Menu Link Setup” to “ON” in

[Example 3].

*3 : To avoid mistakenly performing menu operations of a zone you

are not operating, we recommend that you register the setting

contents for each zone under Favorites in your browser.

Click when

you operate

each zone.

(vExample 1)

Click when you

operate the setup

menu. (vExample 2)

Click to change

zone name.

(vExample 3)

Click when you

operate a small screen

such as a PDA screen,

etc. (vExample 4)

Click when you update to

the latest information. (*1)

Click to perform each

operation.

Changes to each operation

screen.

(vExample 5)

Click to add a setting to the “Favorites” in your browser. (*3)

Click to return to the top

menu. (*2)

[Example 2] Setup menu screen

[Example 3] Zone name change screen

Click “v” and select from

the displayed items.

Click to

determine a

setting.

After entering

characters, click “Set”

to set, or click “Def” to

return to initial setting.

Enter ﬁgures or click

“<” or “>” to make

the setting, and then

click “Set”.

Click the menu from which you want to make

settings.

The display on the right becomes each setting

screen.

Click “SAVE” when you want to save settings, and click

“LOAD” when you want to call settings.

Becomes each operation screen.

Enter zone

name.

Click to set

zone name.

Click when

changing the

background

color of each

operation

screen.

Click to

return to the

top menu.

Click “ON” when

performing Top Menu

Link Setup.

When set up, return to

the top menu from each

operation screen.

(Default setting : “OFF”)

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

[Example 4] PDA menu screen

NOTE

You cannot change setup menu operations and zone name on the

PDA menu screen.

[Example 5] Net Audio operating screen

Select to

operate each

zone.

Click the menu from which you want to

make settings.

Click to move up/down the menu

pages.

Click to repeat play.

When registering presets, click “v” to

select the channel you want to register,

and then click “MEMORY”.

Click to stop play.

Click to random play.

Click when selecting menu.

Click “v” to select the preset channel you want

to play.

When searching using an acronym, click “v” and select

from the displayed characters.

NOTE

• To perform web control, you must connect a web control device

such as a PC to the same network as the AVP-A1HDCI.

• With web control, some network settings, etc., cannot be set.

• When updating ﬁrmware, settings made by the web controller may

be reset.

SOURCE SELECT INPUT MODE

INPUT MODE

[ AMP]

SOURCE

SELECT

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit

[ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

Surround mode Other Operations and

Functions

Other Operations

Playing Super Audio CD

1Assign “DENON LINK” with the “Digital” setting or

assign “HDMI” with the “HDMI” setting (vpage

48).

2Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [SOURCE

SELECT] to select the input source assigned in step 1.

The “ ” or “ ” indicator lights on the display.

3Select “AUTO” for the INPUT MODE (vpage 47).

4Select the surround mode (vpage 50 ~ 52).

We recommend playing in the DIRECT mode.

5Start playing the Super Audio CD.

The “ ” indicator lights on the display.

For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s

operating instructions.

• When playing DSD signals in the DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode,

the DSD signals are converted as such into analog signals. When

playing in other surround modes, the DSD signals are ﬁrst converted

into PCM format, then into analog signals.

• “DSD DIRECT” is shown on the display when playing DSD 2-channel

signals in the DIRECT mode. “DSD MULTI DIRECT” is shown on

the display when playing DSD multi--channel signals in the DIRECT

mode.

• The DSD signal may not be output depending on the equipment

that is connected.For further details, refer to the user manual for the

equipment being used.

Surround mode

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

<ZONE2/3/4 /

REC SELECT> <PHONES>

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit

[ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

Recording on an External Device

(REC OUT mode)

You can listen to one program source while recording a different

program source.

1Press <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT>.

“ZONE3 SOURCE” is shown on the display.

2Turn <SOURCE SELECT> until “RECOUT SOURCE”

is displayed.

The “ ” indicator lights.

ZONE3 SOURCE ZONE3 TUNER ZONE3 HD Radio····

RECOUT HD Radio RECOUT XM RECOUT SOURCE····

3Turn <SOURCE SELECT> to choose the input source

to be recorded.

4Play the program source.

For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s

operating instructions.

To record FM or AM broadcasts, select the broadcast (vpage

59).

5Start recording.

For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s

operating instructions.

• To cancel, press <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT>, then turn <SOURCE

SELECT> until “ZONE3 SOURCE” is displayed.

• Make a test recording before starting the actual recording.

• Signals are only output to the analog REC OUT connectors when

the digital signals input to the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/

COAXIAL) are PCM (2-channel) signals.

• Digital audio signals input to the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors

are not output to the REC OUT connectors, so connect using the

OPTICAL or COAXIAL connectors.

• Sources selected with the REC OUT mode are output from ZONE3

as well.

• In the REC OUT mode, the remote control unit’s ZONE3 mode

buttons cannot be operated.

• When the “Digital Out” setting is set to “ZONE4 Select”, the

OPTICAL4 output connector becomes the ZONE4 output. When

using for recording, set to “Rec Select”.

• Copyright protected network audio (Internet radio, media server,

USB and Rhapsody) signals cannot be output from the digital output

connectors (OPTICAL).

NOTE

• Recordings you make are for your personal enjoyment and should

not be used for other purposes without permission of the copyright

holder.

• When “DENON LINK” is assigned at the GUI menu “Assign” setting,

the PCM signals, network audio signals (Internet radio, media server,

USB and Rhapsody), XM signals and HD Radio signals input from the

digital input connectors cannot be output from the analog REC OUT

connectors.

• Input sources for which “Delete” is selected at “Source Delete”

cannot be selected.

Dolby Headphone recording

When REC OUT mode is set to “SOURCE”, with the AVP-A1HDCI it

is possible to output signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode

from the recording output terminal and record them on a separate

recorder.

1The Dolby Headphone play mode is set when

headphones are connected to <PHONES> during

playback in the STANDARD (DOLBY/DTS

Surround) mode.

When this is done, signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone

mode are automatically output from the recording output

terminals (analog and digital) and can be recorded.

2Select the parameters and set the desired mode.

Start recording.

Refer to the “Dolby Headphone” (vpage 51).

NOTE

Do not disconnect the headphones during recording.

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Convenient Functions

HDMI Control Function

When connecting the AVP-A1HDCI to a television or player compatible with the HDMI control function, the following operations are

possible.

• Turn power ON/OFF (Synchronize with television)

• Switch to sound output equipment (TV and AVP-A1HDCI)

• Adjust volume

• Switch input source

065

015*$"-

065

"6%*0

065

)%.*

When using these functions set as follows: GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “HDMI Control” (vpage 32).

Connections

Player compatible

with HDMI

control function

Television compatible with

HDMI control function

NOTE

When using the HDMI control function, do not assign HDMI input to “TV/CBL” by setting “Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Assign” in the

GUI menu.

1Connect the HDMI to the AVP-A1HDCI with

equipment compatible with the HDMI control

function.

2Put the power on for all the equipment connected to

the HDMI.

3Check the settings for all the equipment connected to

the HDMI and make HDMI available to them.

b Please consult the operating instructions for the connected

equipment to check the settings.

b Operations 1 ~ 3 do not have to be repeated once started.

b Carryout Operations 2 and 3 should any of the equipment be

plugged out.

4Switch the television input to the HDMI connected to

the AVP-A1HDCI.

5Switch the AVP-A1HDCI input to the HDMI input

source and check if the picture from the player is ok.

6Put the television power on standby and check if the

AVP-A1HDCI goes into standby.

If the AVP-A1HDCI does not work please check the following.

• Is the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “HDMI Control”

– “Control” (vpage 32) set to “ON”?

• Is the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “HDMI Control”

– “Control Monitor” (vpage 32) set for the monitor output

connected to television?

• Is the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “HDMI Control”

– “Power Off Control” (vpage 32) set to “ON”?

• Is the control function used for the television HDMI properly set?

(Check the television operating instructions for details.)

• Should any of the operations below be performed, the interlocking

function may be reset, in which case, repeat Operation's 2 and 3.

• GUI menu “Source Select” – (input source) – “Assign” – “HDMI”

(vpage 48) setting has changed

• There is a change to the connection between the equipment and

the HDMI, or an increase in equipment.

• Change of HDMI monitor output in AVP-A1HDCI setup.

Operations

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

CH SELECT

<POWER>

<STANDARD> <HOME THX CINEMA>QUICK SELECT

uio p

CH SELECT

QUICK SELECT

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit

[ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

1Set the input source, input mode, surround mode,

room EQ settings and volume to the conditions you

want to store.

2Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT.

Keep pressing the button until the quick select indicator lights.

• To call out the settings, press QUICK SELECT at which the desired

settings were stored.

• The Quick Select name can be changed (vpage 42).

NOTE

Input sources stored with the quick select function cannot be selected

if they have been deleted at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option

Setup” – “Source Delete” (vpage 41). In this case, store them

again.

Input Source Volume

Quick Select 1 DVD –40 dB

Quick Select 2 TV/CBL –40 dB

Quick Select 3 VCR –40 dB

[Quick Select Defaults]

1Press CH SELECT.

2Press ui or CH SELECT to select “Fader”.

3Use o p to adjust the volume of the speakers.

(o: front, p: rear)

• The fader function does not affect the subwoofer.

• The fader can be adjusted until the volume of the speaker adjusted

to the lowest value is –12 dB.

1Press CH SELECT.

2Use ui or CH SELECT to select the speaker.

The speaker that can be set switches each time one of the

buttons is pressed.

3Use o p to adjust the volume.

b ”OFF” can be set by pressing o when the subwoofer’s volume

is set to –12dB.

The surround parameters, tone control, room EQ settings and the

volumes of the different speakers are stored for the individual surround

modes.

Quick Select Function

With this function, the currently playing input source, input mode,

surround mode, room EQ settings and volume can be stored in

the memory.

Fader Function

This function lets you adjust (fade) the sound from all the front or

rear speakers at once.

Channel Level

You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback

sources or to suit your taste, as described below.

Personal Memory Plus Function

This function sets the settings (input mode, surround mode,

HDMI output mode, Picture Adjust, Audio Delay etc.) last selected

for the individual input sources.

When you switch to an input source, the settings are automatically

set to the ones that were set the last time that input source was

used.

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

1Turn off the power using <POWER>.

2Press <POWER> while simultaneously pressing

<STANDARD> and <HOME THX CINEMA>.

3Once the display starts ashing at intervals of about 1

second, release the two buttons.

If in step 3 the display does not ﬂash at intervals of about 1 second,

start over from step 1.

Resetting the Microprocessor

Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations

cannot be performed.

All settings are reset when the microcomputer is reset.

Last Function Memory

This stores the settings as they were directly before the standby

mode was set.

When the power is turned back on, the settings are restored to as

they were directly before the standby mode was set.

Backup Memory

The various settings are backed up for about 1 week, even if the

power is turned off or the power cord is disconnected.

Playback



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Remote Control Unit Operations

Main Remote Control Unit

• On the main remote control unit, the display switches according

to the device being operated and the mode.

• In modes other than iPod, the mode switches between“ ”

and “ ” each time the [MODE SELECTOR] is pressed.

• In the AMP, TUNER, NET/DTU and iPod modes, when the remote

ID is set, the AVP-A1HDCI can be used independently even in an

environment containing multiple DENON ampliﬁers.

Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your equipment,

some buttons may not operate.

NOTE

The device mode (“ ” or “ ”) cannot be changed while the

setting is being made.

1Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the component to be

operated.

The indicator for the component to be operated ﬂashes.

: AMP / ZONE2 / ZONE3 / ZONE4 /

SYSTEM CALL

: TUNER (FM/AM) / XM

: NETWORK/USB /

DIGITAL TUNER (HD Radio)

: Satellite Receiver / Cable TV

: iPod

: DVD player (recorder) /

CD player (recorder)

: VCR / TAPE

: TV

b The mode switches each time [AMP] is pressed.

GAMP modeH GZONE2 modeH GZONE3 modeH

GSYSTEM CALL modeH GZONE4 modeH

2Operate the component.

b For details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.

1Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

preset.

2Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

3Press [NUMBER] and input the 5-digit number of the

brand of the component to be preset. The numbers

are shown in the Preset Code Table (vEnd of this

manual).

When the code is registered, the signal transmission indicator

ﬂashes twice.

When the preset code is transmitted, the mode indicator for the

component to which that code belongs ﬂashes.

b The input mode is canceled if no button is operated for 10

seconds.

Some brands have more than one preset code. If the component does

not operate, try inputting a different code.

1Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the component to be

operated.

The mode indicator of the device to be operated ﬂashes.

2Operate the component.

b For details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.

[NUMBER]

[MODE SELECTOR]

[RC SETUP]

[HOME]

[ AMP]

Signal transmission

indicator

[HOME] is used to return to the AMP mode (AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3,

ZONE4 or SYSTEM CALL) when in any mode other than AMP.

Operating DENON Audio Components Presetting

The included main remote control unit can be preset to operate

devices of various brands.

Operating Preset Components

Remote Control



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

[MENU]

[MODE

SELECTOR]

[CH + /

SHUFFLE],

[CH – /

REPEAT]

[SETUP/

SEARCH]

[ENTER]

[RETURN]

[0 ~ 9, +10]

[uiop]

[1],

[8 9],

[6 7], [3],

[2],

[SOURCE ON],

[SOURCE OFF]

EL Display

MODE SELECTOR DVD VCR iPod

Device Mode

Device operated DVD

(Default setting) DVD Recorder CD

(Default setting) CD Recorder VCR TAPE iPod

1Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback/Pause

8 9 Auto search

(cue)

Auto search

(cue)

Auto search

(cue)

Auto search

(cue)

Auto search

(cue)

Auto search

(cue)

Auto search

(cue)

6 7

Manual search

(fast-reverse/

fast-forward)

Manual search

(fast-reverse/

fast-forward)

Manual search

(fast-reverse/

fast-forward)

Manual search

(fast-reverse/

fast-forward)

Manual search

(fast-reverse/

fast-forward)

Manual search

(fast-reverse/

fast-forward)

Manual search

(fast-reverse/

fast-forward)

3Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause –

2Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop

SOURCE ON Power on Power on – – Power on – –

SOURCE OFF Power off Power off – – Power off – –

Buttons

MENU Menu/guide Menu/guide – – Menu/guide – Menu

u i o p Cursor Cursor – – Cursor – Cursor

ENTER Enter setting Enter setting – – Enter setting – Enter

SETUP/SEARCH Set up Set up – – Set up –

Page forward

screen / Browse/

Remote mode

switching (Press

and hold)

RETURN Return Return – – Cancel – Return

CH + / SHUFFLE – – – – Switch channels – 1-track/album

shufﬂe play

CH - / REPEAT – – – – Switch channels – 1-track/all-track

repeat play

0 ~ 9, +10 Select track Select track Select track Select track – – –

Special Remarks q, w q q q –

Functions of Buttons by Component

GSpecial RemarksH

q Only one component can be preset for each mode. If a new code is preset, the previous code is automatically cleared.

w The names of the functions for the DVD remote control buttons differ from brand to brand. Check beforehand.

NOTE

• Preset a DVD player or DVD recorder for the “DVD” ( ) mode. Preset a CD player or CD recorder for the “DVD” ( ) mode.

• Preset a VCR for the “VCR” ( ) mode. Preset a tape deck for the “VCR” ( ) mode.

EL Display

Buttons

Remote Control



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

[MENU]

[CH +/–]

[TV/VCR]

[ENTER]

[DISPLAY]

[0 ~ 9, +10]

[uiop]

[SETUP]

[1],

[8 9],

[6 7], [3],

[2],

[SOURCE ON],

[SOURCE OFF]

[MODE

SELECTOR]

EL Display

MODE SELECTOR TV Satellite Receiver / Cable TV

Device Mode

Device operated TV (HITACHI) TV (SONY) SAT SAT

Punch through Punch through Punch through Punch through

8 9

6 7

SOURCE ON Power on Power on Power on Power on

SOURCE OFF Power off Power off Power off Power off

Buttons

MENU Menu/guide Menu/guide Menu/guide Menu/guide

u i o p Cursor Cursor Cursor Cursor

ENTER Enter setting Enter setting Enter setting Enter setting

SETUP Set up Set up Set up Set up

DISPLAY Display Display Display Display

CH + / – Switch channels Switch channels Switch channels Switch channels

0 ~ 9, +10 Channel selection Channel selection Channel selection Channel selection

TV/VCR Switch inputs Switch inputs – –

Special Remarks q, e q, e q, e q, e

GSpecial RemarksH

q Only one component can be preset for each mode. If a new code is preset, the previous code is automatically cleared.

e The CD, VCR or DVD buttons (one only set) can be assigned to the TV, satellite receiver and cable TV mode (vpage 81 “Punch Through

Function”).

EL Display

Buttons

[CH +/–]

[SEARCH]

[SHIFT]

[A ~ G], [d f],

[BAND],

[MODE],

[MEMO]

[ENTER]

[0 ~ 9]

[uiop]

[MODE

SELECTOR]

EL Display

MODE SELECTOR TU NET / DTU

Device Mode

Device operated Analog tuner XM NET / USB HD Radio

A ~ G Preset memory block selection Preset memory block selection Preset memory block selection Preset memory block selection

d f Tuning + / –Channel selection – Tuning + / –

BAND AM/FM switching – – AM/FM switching

MODE Switch search modes – – Switch search modes

MEMO Preset memory registration Preset memory registration Preset memory registration Preset memory registration

Buttons

u i o p – Category search Cursor Multicast switching (ui)

ENTER – – Enter, Playback/Pause –

SEARCH RDS search Direct search Search Multicast switching

CH + / – Preset channel selection Preset channel selection Preset channel selection Preset channel selection

0 ~ 9 Preset channel selection

(1 ~ 8)

Preset channel selection

(1 ~ 8) /

Direct channel search

(0 ~ 9)

Preset channel selection

(1 ~ 8)

Preset channel selection

(1 ~ 8)

SHIFT Switch memory block Switch memory block – Switch memory block

EL Display

Buttons

Remote Control

0

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Setting the Remote ID

When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room,

make this setting so that only the desired AV receiver operates.

1Press [AMP] to set the main remote control unit to the

AMP mode.

2Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

3Refer to the table at the right, and use [NUMBER] to

input the 5-digit number corresponding to the remote

ID to be changed.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

4Press [TU], [iPod] or [NET/DTU] to select the mode to

be set.

5Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set the remote IDs for all modes.

NOTE

• When changing a setting, be sure to set the same remote ID as the

AVP-A1HDCI’s (vpage 43).

• When changing the AMP mode’s remote ID, also change the

“TUNER”, “iPod” and “NET/DTU” remote ID at the same time.

• Set the remote ID of an analog tuner for “TUNER” ( ), the XM

remote ID for “ ”.

5Point the main remote control units directly at each

other and press and hold the button on the other

device’s remote control unit that you want to learn.

Once learning is completed normally, the display lights and the

signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

b If you want to learn other buttons, repeat steps 4 and 5.

b The mode can be switched by pressing [MODE SELECTOR].

b The signal transmission indicator lights once for a long time if

learning was not possible

6Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice and the setting

is completed.

[NUMBER]

[MODE SELECTOR]

[RC SETUP]

[ NET/DTU]

[ TU]

[ AMP]

[ iPod]

Other device’s

remote control unit

AVP-A1HDCI’s main remote

control unit (RC-1067)

Learning Function

If your AV devices are of a brand other than DENON or if they

cannot be operated with the preset memory function, their remote

control signals can be transfered to stored in the AVP-A1HDCI’s

main remote control unit.

1Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

set.

2Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

3Press [9], [7] and [5], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice and the learning

mode is set.

4Press the button to be set.

The main remote control unit’s display turns off.

b If a button that cannot be learned is pressed, the signal transmission

indicator lights but the signal is not learned.

• With some remote control units, the signals cannot be learned or the

device will not operate properly even when the signals have been

learned. In this case, use the device’s own remote control unit.

• Learned buttons have priority over the preset memory. If you no

longer need the learned setting, reset the learning function (vpage

82).

NOTE

• [HOME] cannot be learned.

• Do not learn any remote control signals at [RC SETUP].

• The AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3, ZONE4 and SYSTEM CALL modes

cannot be learned.

Signal transmission

indicator

MODE

SELECTOR

Remote ID

AMP

(MAIN)

TUNER

iPod

NET/DTU

(Analog

TUNER)

(XM) (Net

Audio)

(HD

Radio)

(Default) 81001 52863 52864 72815 62865 62840

2 82001 52795 52812 72816 62837 62841

3 83001 52800 52813 72817 62838 62842

4 84001 52805 52814 72818 62839 62843

Remote Control



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

System Call Function

This function lets you register a series of operations at a single

button.

For example, the ampliﬁer can be turned on, the input source

selected, the monitor’s power turned on, the source device’s

power turned on and the play mode set all by pressing a single

button.

Up to 32 signals each can be registered at [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2

or 3).

1Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

2Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

3Press [9], [7] and [8], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice and the system

call registration mode is set.

4Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) at which you want to

5Press the buttons you want to register in the same

sequence as the operations you want to perform.

The signal transmission indicator lights when a button is

pressed.

Example : Press [POWER ON].

↓

Press [MODE SELECTOR] – [DVD].

↓

Press [1].

b The mode can be switched by pressing [MODE SELECTOR].

b Perform the registration procedure for all the buttons you want to

6Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice and the setting

is completed.

Calling out

1Press [AMP], to select “SYSTEM CALL”.

2Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) at which the signals

were registered.

The registered signals are transmitted in the registered

sequence.

Registering Punch Through Function

CD, DVD or VCR mode buttons can be stored at unused TV or

SAT/CBL mode buttons.

For example, when DVD mode buttons are assigned to the TV

mode, the DVD mode operations can be performed while in the

TV mode.

1Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

punch through (CD, DVD or VCR).

2Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

3Press [9], [8] and [4], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice and the punch

through setting mode is set.

4Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

punch through (CD, DVD or VCR).

5Press the button you want to punch through (1, 2,

6, 7, 8, 9 or 3).

6Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the equipment (TV or

SAT/CBL) you want to set to punch-through.

7Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice and the setting

is completed.

Signal

transmission

indicator

[NUMBER]

[MODE

SELECTOR]

[RC SETUP]

[CHANNEL+/–]

[SYSTEM CALL]

[ AMP]

[POWER ON]

[8], [9],

[1],

[6], [7],

[3], [2]

Remote Control



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

1Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

reset.

2Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

3Press [9], [7] and [6], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

4Press the button you want to reset twice.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit

Learning Function

GResetting button by buttonH

1Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

reset.

2Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

3Press [9], [7] and [6], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

4Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

reset twice.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

GResetting by device modeH

1Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

2Press [9], [7] and [8], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

3Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) you want to reset.

4Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

1Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to

reset (TV or SAT/CBL).

2Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

3Press [9], [8] and [4], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

4Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

1Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

2Press [9], [8] and [1], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes 4 times.

All the settings are restored to their defaults.

System call function

Punch-through function

All settings

Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit

1Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

2Press [9], [7] and [3], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice and the backlight

on time setting mode is set.

3Set the light on time.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

[Settable times] : [1] : 5 sec.

[2] : 10 sec. (Default)

[3] : 15 sec.

[4] : 20 sec.

[5] : 25 sec.

Adjusting the Backlight’s Brightness

The display’s brightness can be adjusted in 5 steps.

(Default: Step 3)

1Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.

The signal transmission indicator ﬂashes twice.

2Press [CHANNEL +] or [CHANNEL –].

The display gets one step brighter when [+] is pressed.

The display gets one step darker when [–] is pressed.

3Press [RC SETUP] to complete the setting.

Remote Control



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Sub Remote Control Unit Operations

• The sub remote control unit is equipped with frequently used

buttons, so it can be used for simple remote control unit

operations.

• The sub remote control unit can also be used for multi-zone, so

you can use it to control the AVP-A1HDCI from other rooms.

• The operations listed below can be performed with the sub

remote control unit.

• Switching the input source

• Adjusting the volume

• Tuner (AM/FM), XM, HD Radio and iPod operations

• NET/USB direct play

• GUI menu and ZONE2 on-screen display operations

• Zone power on/off

• It is not possible to operate devices other than the ampliﬁer.

[USB]

[ALL MUSIC], [FAVORITES]

[8 9], [2], [1/3],

[TUNING d f]

[ZONE SELECT]

[ZONE ON]

[ZONE OFF]

[MENU]

[SEARCH]

[MUTE]

[CHANNEL +/–]

[RANDOM]

[REPEAT]

[SOURCE SELECT]

[VOLUME +/–]

[SHIFT]

[ENTER]

[RETURN]

[uiop]

Device operated DVD, HDP, TV / CBL, DVR-1, DVR-2, VCR,

V.AUX, SAT, CD, PHONO

TUNER

(AM/FM)

DTU

(HD Radio)

Zone selection M Z2 Z3 Z4 M Z2 Z3 Z4 M Z2 Z3 Z4

ZONE SELECT Zone operation mode selection Zone operation mode selection Zone operation mode selection

ZONE OFF Power turned off (b1) Power turned off (b1) Power turned off (b1)

ZONE ON Power turned on (b1) Power turned on (b1) Power turned on (b1)

SOURCE SELECT Input source selection (b2) Input source selection – Input source selection –

CHANNEL + / – – Preset channel selection – Preset channel selection –

SHIFT –Preset channel memory

block selection –Preset channel memory

block selection –

VOLUME + / – Adjustment of volume (b1) –Adjustment of volume (b1) –Adjustment of volume (b1) –

MUTE Muting (b1) –Muting (b1) –Muting (b1) –

MENU Selected zone menu – Selected zone menu – Selected zone menu –

u i o p – – Multicast switching (u i)–

SEARCH – RDS search Multicast switching –

8 9,

TUNING d f – Tuning – Tuning –

USB b3–b3–b3–

ALL MUSIC *

(Media server only) b4–b4–b4–

FAVORITES * b5–b5–b5–

b1: Affects the currently selected zone.

b2: In ZONE4, it is not possible to select “XM”, “HD Radio”, or sources with no digital input signals (“TUNER”, “PHONO”, “iPod”, etc.).

Network audio signals (Internet radio, media server, USB) can be played as long as they are not copyright-protected.

b3: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the ﬁles on the USB memory device are played.

b4: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the ﬁles in “All Music” on the media server are played.

b5: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the ﬁles in “Favorites” are played.

*: Whether “All Music” or “Favorites” is selected depends on the “Direct Play” setting (vpage 49).

Functions of Buttons by Component

DIRECT PLAY button

• Playback is possible in the mode selected at GUI menu “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” – “Direct Play”.

FAVORITES: Playback starts from the ﬁrst track registered in the favorites.

ALL MUSIC: Playback starts from the ﬁrst track registered in the “All Music” folder.

• When [USB] is pressed, playback starts from the ﬁrst track on the USB memory device.

NOTE

When the media server is stopped or restarted, it may no longer be possible to play tracks stored in the favorites.

Remote Control



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Device operated SAT TU

(XM) NET / USB iPod

Zone selection M Z2 Z3 Z4 M Z2 Z3 Z4 M Z2 Z3 Z4

ZONE SELECT Zone operation mode selection Zone operation mode selection Zone operation mode selection

ZONE OFF Power turned off (b1) Power turned off (b1) Power turned off (b1)

ZONE ON Power turned on (b1) Power turned on (b1) Power turned on (b1)

SOURCE SELECT Input source selection – Input source selection (b2)

Input source selection

–

CHANNEL + / – Preset channel selection – Preset channel selection –

SHIFT Preset channel memory

block selection – – –

VOLUME + / – Adjustment of volume (b1) –Adjustment of volume (b1) –Adjustment of volume (b1) –

MUTE Muting (b1) –Muting (b1) –Muting (b1) –

MENU Selected zone menu – Selected zone menu – Selected zone menu –

u i o p Category search – File operations – File operations –

ENTER – File operations – File operations –

SEARCH Direct access of channel Page forward screen /

Character search –

Page forward screen /

Browse/Remote mode

switching (press and hold)

–

RETURN – File operations – File operations –

8 9,

TUNING d f Channel selection – Track search Track search –

2– Stop Stop –

1/3– Play/pause Play/pause –

REPEAT –1-track/all-track repeat play

(USB / Media server) 1-track/all-track repeat play –

RANDOM – Random play (USB / Media server) Song/album shufﬂe play –

USB b3–b3b3–

ALL MUSIC *

(Media server only) b4–b4b4–

FAVORITES * b5–b5b5–

b1: Affects the currently selected zone.

b2: In ZONE4, it is not possible to select “XM”, “HD Radio”, or sources with no digital input signals (“TUNER”, “PHONO”, “iPod”, etc.).

Network audio signals (Internet radio, media server, USB) can be played as long as they are not copyright-protected.

b3: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the ﬁles on the USB memory device are played.

b4: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the ﬁles in “All Music” on the media server are played.

b5: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the ﬁles in “Favorites” are played.

*: Whether “All Music” or “Favorites” is selected depends on the “Direct Play” setting (vpage 49).

Remote Control



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

[USB]

[ALL MUSIC/

FAVORITES]

[ZONE SELECT]

[ZONE OFF]

[MENU]

[RANDOM]

[REPEAT]

[ADVANCED SETUP]

1Press [ZONE SELECT].

The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.

2While the multi-zone indicator is light, press [ZONE

SELECT] to select the zone to be operated.

The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.

1Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].

All the multi-zone indicators light.

2Select the multi-zone to be set.

The selected multi-zone indicator lights.

q To set to “MAIN ZONE” : Press [REPEAT].

w To set to “ZONE2” : Press [RANDOM].

e To set to “ZONE3” : Press [USB].

r To set to “ZONE4” : Press [ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES].

3Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].

The multi-zone indicator turns off.

To Cancel

1Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].

The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.

2Press [ZONE SELECT].

All the multi-zone indicators light.

3Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].

The multi-zone indicator turns off.

1While pressing [MENU], press [ADVANCED SETUP]

with the tip of a pen.

The multi-zone indicator corresponding to the currently selected

remote ID ﬂashes.

2Select the remote ID to be set.

q To set to 1 : Press [REPEAT].

The “M” indicator ﬂashes.

w To set to 2 : Press [RANDOM].

The “Z2” indicator ﬂashes.

e To set to 3 : Press [USB].

The “Z3” indicator ﬂashes.

r To set to 4 : Press [ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES].

The “Z4” indicator ﬂashes.

3While pressing [MENU], press [ADVANCED SETUP]

with the tip of a pen.

The multi-zone indicator turns off.

While pressing [ZONE OFF], press [ADVANCED SETUP]

with the tip of a pen.

All the multi-zone indicators ﬂash 4 times, then all the settings are

restored to their defaults.

NOTE

When changing a setting, be sure to set the same remote ID as the

AVP-A1HDCI’s (vpage 43).

Multi-zone indicator

Switching Zones

Use this procedure to select the zone to be operated by the sub

remote control unit.

Setting the Zone for Which the Sub

Remote Control Unit is Used (ZONE

SELECT LOCK Mode)

We recommend always using the sub remote control unit for the

same room. When this is done, the unit can be set so that the

zone does not switch when buttons are operated.

Setting the Remote ID

When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room,

make this setting so that no AV receiver other than the desired

one operates.

Resetting the Settings

Remote Control



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Multi-Zone Connections and Operations

Connectors for audio output Audio signals Connectors for video output

ZONE2

ZONE2 PRE OUT Stereo ZONE2 VIDEO OUT,

ZONE2 S-VIDEO OUT,

ZONE2 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

ZONE2 OPTICAL OUT Bit-stream

ZONE3 ZONE3 PRE OUT Stereo ZONE3 VIDEO OUT

ZONE4 ZONE4 OPTICAL4 OUT Bit-stream –

Multi-Zone Connections

• For ZONE2, it is necessary to set in sequence with the signal connected to either the power ampliﬁer or bit stream amps.

The amp should be the power ampliﬁer in the case of ZONE3, and the bit-stream for ZONE4.

• If the signal inputted to ZONE2 is analog, change to PCM(2-channel) signal, and output it from ZONE2 optical output connectors.

'- 48 48

4- 43

'- '3

4- 43

'- '3

4- 43

ZONE3 audio output

MAIN ZONE (7.1-channel system)

Monitor

ZONE2

ZONE3

DVD player

Input

Remote

control unit

ZONE2 audio

output

ZONE2 video

output

AVP-A1HDCI

Monitor

Power ampliﬁer

: Video cable

: Audio cable

• When only using one speaker for ZONE2 or ZONE3, set to “Mono”.

In this case, the ZONE2 (ZONE3) monaural output is output from

the ZONE2 (ZONE3) pre-out L and R connectors, so connect as

desired.

• Separate power ampliﬁers are needed for ZONE2 and ZONE3.

AV ampliﬁer

ZONE4

digital output

Monitor

ZONE3 video

output

AV ampliﬁer

Power ampliﬁer or

ZONE2 digital output

Power ampliﬁer

Multi-Zone



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Information Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Multi-Zone Operations

Turning the Power On and Off

GOperation on the main unitH

Press <ZONE2 ON/OFF>, <ZONE3 ON/OFF> or <ZONE4 ON/OFF> for

the zone to be operated.

When the power turns on, the multi-zone indicator lights on the display.

GOperation on the remote control unitH

In the zone mode you want to operate, press [ON] or [OFF].

Selecting the Input Source

GOperation on the main unitH

q Press <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT> and select the zone to be adjusted.

w Turn <SOURCE SELECT>.

GOperation on the remote control unitH

In the zone mode you want to operate, press [SOURCE SELECT].

Adjusting the Volume

GOperation on the main unitH

q Press <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT> and select the zone to be adjusted.

w Turn <VOLUME> to adjust.

GOperation on the remote control unitH

In the zone mode whose volume you want to adjust, press [VOLUME].

[Variable range] – – – –70dB ~ –40dB ~ 18dB

• The volume can be adjusted when GUI menu “Manual Setup”

– “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)” – “Volume Level” is set to

“Variable”. The volume can be increased up to the value set at

GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)”

– “Volume Limit” (vpage 39).

• The volume for ZONE2 and ZONE3 can be adjusted with the remote

control unit.

SOURCE SELECT

VOLUME

[ON]

[OFF]

[MUTE]

VOLUME

[ AMP]

SOURCE

SELECT

(ZONE2 mode)

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit

[ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

ZONE2 MENU

INPUT :DVD

SIGNAL:ANALOG

VOL. :-40dB

>Bass 0dB

HPF OFF

Treble 0dB

Lch Lev. 0dB

Rch Lev. 0dB

ZONE2 MENU

>Channel STEREO

Vol.Lev. VAR

P.On Lev. LAST

Vol.Limit OFF

Mute Lev. FULL

Turning off the Sound Temporarily

In the zone mode for which you want to mute the sound, press

[MUTE].

The sound is reduced to the level set at GUI menu “Manual Setup”

– “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)” – “Mute Level” (vpage 39).

To cancel, either adjust the volume or press [MUTE] again.

The setting is canceled when the zone’s power is turned off.

• The source selected for ZONE3 is also output from the recording

output connectors.

• When the [MENU] is selected, it is possible to carryout “Zone

Setup” looking at the on-screen display in ZONE2. Also, when the

“OSD” is set as “ZONE2/ZONE3”, the on-screen display comes on

the ZONE2 monitor when ZONE3 has been operated so it is possible

to operate it looking at this.

NOTE

• The digital signal from the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/

COAXIAL) are output to the analog audio connectors in ZONE2 and

ZONE3 in the case of PCM (2-channel) signals only.

• Digital audio signals input from the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors

cannot be played in multi-zone.

• “XM” or “HD Radio” cannot be selected with digital output

(OPTICAL) in ZONE2. Copyright-protected Network audio signals

(Internet radio, media server, USB, Rhapsody) cannot be output.

• In ZONE4, it is not possible to select “XM”, “HD Radio”, or sources

with no digital input signals (“TUNER”, “PHONO”, “iPod”, etc.).

Network audio signals (Internet radio, media server, USB, Rhapsody)

can be played as long as they are not copyright-protected.

• When certain digital signals are being input, noise may be output

from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors.

(ZONE3 or

ZONE4 mode)

[OFF]

[ON]

[MENU]

[ZONE SELECT]

[OFF]

[MUTE]

Multi-zone

indicator

[ON]

VOLUME

[MENU]

SOURCE SELECT

(Main remote control unit)

(Sub remote control unit)

Multi-Zone



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Surround back speakers

The THX Surround EX format adds new “Surround Back” (SB)

channels to the conventional 5.1 channel system. This makes it easy

to achieve sound positioned directly behind the listener, something

that was previously difﬁcult with sources designed for conventional

multi surround speakers. In addition, the acoustic image extending

between the sides and the rear is narrowed, thus greatly improving

the expression of the surround signals for sounds moving from the

sides to the back and from the front to the point directly behind the

listening position.

'- $

43DI4-DI

Change of positioning and acoustic image

with 5.1-channel systems

Movement of acoustic image from SR to SL

'- $

4-DI 43DI

4#DI

Change of positioning and acoustic image

with 6.1-channel systems

Movement of acoustic image from

SR to SB to SL

In addition to sources recorded in 6.1-channels, the surround effect of

conventional 2- to 5.1-channel sources can also be enhanced.

Other Information

About Speaker Installation

Number of surround back speakers

With THX Surround EX, the surround back channel consists of one

channel of playback signals, but we recommend using two speakers.

The modes that use the new ASA technology from THX (vpage

91) are most effective when using two monopole type surround back

speakers placed close together.

Using two speakers results in a smoother blend with the sound of the

surround channels and better sound positioning of the surround back

channel when listening from a position other than the center.

Placement of the surround left and right channels

when using surround back speakers

Using surround back speakers greatly improves the positioning of the

sound at the rear. Because of this, the surround left and right channels

play an important role in achieving a smooth transition of the acoustic

image from the front to the back. As shown on the diagram above, in a

movie theater the surround signals are also produced from diagonally

in front of the listeners, creating an acoustic image as if the sound

were ﬂoating in space.

To achieve these effects, we recommend placing the speakers for the

surround left and right channels slightly more towards the front than

with conventional surround systems. Doing so sometimes increases

the surround effect when playing conventional 5.1 channel sources in

the THX Surround EX mode. Check the surround effects of the various

modes before selecting the surround mode.

Examples of speaker layouts

Below we introduce examples of speaker layouts. Refer to these to

arrange your speakers according to their type and how you want to

use them.

G1H For THX surround EX systems

(Using surround back speakers)

q When mainly playing movies

Recommended when your surround speakers are single or 2-way

speakers.

Surround back speakers

Subwoofer

Surround

speakers

Monitor

Center speaker

Front speakers

60°

Surround

speaker

Surround back

speaker

Front speaker

Point slightly

downwards

GAs seen from aboveH GAs seen from the sideH

2 to 3 feet /

60 to 90 cm

Speaker(s) for one or two channels are required in order to achieve

a THX Surround EX system with the AVP-A1HDCI. Adding these,

however, allows you to achieve stronger surround effects not only

with sources recorded in THX Surround EX, but also with conventional

2- to 5.1 channel sources. The WIDE SCREEN mode is a mode for

achieving surround sound with up to 7.1 channels using surround back

speakers, for sources recorded in conventional Dolby Surround as well

as Dolby Digital 5.1 channel and DTS Surround 5.1 channel sources.

Furthermore, all the DENON original surround modes (vpage 51

“DSP Simulation Playback”) are compatible with 7.1 channel playback,

so you can enjoy 7.1 channel sound with any signal source.

Information



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

G2H When not using surround back speakers

Subwoofer

Surround speakers

Monitor

Center speaker

Front speakers

60°

120°

Front speaker

Surround speaker

GAs seen from aboveH GAs seen from the sideH

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital signal format developed by Dolby

Laboratories.

A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels (“FL” , “FR” and

“C”), 2 surround channels (“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for

low frequencies.

Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic

sound ﬁeld with a “three-dimensional” feeling (sense of distance,

movement and positioning) is achieved.

A real, overpowering sense of presence is achieved when playing

movie sources in AV rooms as well.

Surround

Dolby Surround

The AVP-A1HDCI is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit

that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve

the same sense of presence as in a movie theater.

w Setting for primarily watching movies using diffusion type

speakers for the surround speakers

For the greatest sense of surround sound envelopment, diffuse

radiation speakers such as bipolar (THX) types, or dipolar types,

provide a wider dispersion than is possible to obtain from a direct

radiating speaker (monopolar). Place these speakers at either side

of the prime listening position, mounted above ear level.

Surround

speakers

60°

Surround back speakers

Surround

speaker

Surround back

speaker

Front speaker

Point slightly

downwards

GAs seen from aboveH GAs seen from the sideH

Path of the surround sound from the

speakers to the listening position

Center speaker

Front speakers

Subwoofer

Monitor

45° ~ 60°

120°

Surround back

speaker

Surround

speaker A

Surround speaker B

Surround

speaker A

Surround back

speaker

Front speaker

Point slightly

downwards

Surround

speaker B

GAs seen from aboveH GAs seen from the sideH

e When playing movies and music

To activate the appropriate speakers for movies and music, we

suggest that during setup, choose Dolby Digital/DTS with THX and

Surround Speakers A (the bipolar or dipolar speakers mounted at

the sides of the listening position).

Choose Dolby Digital/DTS without THX and Surround Speakers B

(the direct radiating speakers mounted at the rear corners of the

listening room). Then, by simply activating the THX function (used

during movie playback, the Surround A speakers are automatically

activated. For multi-channel music listening (Dolby Digital or DTS

music programs), turn off the THX enhancements by touching the

THX button on the remote control, and the Surround B speakers

will be automatically activated.

Example: Movie sources (Dolby, DTS Surround, etc.)

“THX” or “THX Cinema” mode … Speakers A

Music sources (DVD video, DTS CD, etc.)

“Dolby/DTS Surround” … Speakers B

The speakers can be switched at the touch of a button by turning

HOME THX CINEMA on when playing movies and off when playing

multi-channel music.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is a high deﬁnition audio technology developed by Dolby

Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce

the sound of the studio master.

This format is compatible with a maximum sampling frequency of 96

kHz and up to 7.1-channels, so it is used for applications particularly

prioritizing sound quality.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is

compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also

improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It

is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers

greater ﬂexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions

of the playback equipment.

2 to 3 feet /

60 to 90 cm

2 to 3 feet /

60 to 90 cm

2 to 3 feet /

60 to 90 cm

Information

0

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Dolby Pro Logic gx

Dolby Pro Logic gx is a further improved version of the Dolby Pro

Logic g matrix decoding technology.

Audio signals recorded in 2-channels are decoded to achieve a natural

sound with up to 7.1-channels.

There are 3 modes: “Music” suited for playing music, “Cinema”

suited for playing movies, and “Game” which is optimized for playing

games.

b Sources recorded in Dolby Surround

Sources recorded in Dolby Surround are indicated with the following

logo marks.

Dolby Surround support mark :

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

DTS Surround

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS,

Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up

to 5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the

conventional DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible

with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels

of discrete digital sound. High data bit rate performance provides

high quality sound. This format is fully compatible with conventional

products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel

data.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is DTS, Inc’s lossless audio format compatible

with up to 96 kHz/7.1-channels. The lossless audio coding technology

faithfully reproduces the sound of the studio master. It is fully

compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS

digital surround 5.1-channel data.

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format

adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound.

Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible

according to the decoder.

DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1

DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format

inserting a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround

sound through matrix encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel

audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.

DTS NEO:6™ Surround

DTS NEO:6™ is a matrix decoding technology for achieving 6.1-

channel surround playback with 2-channel sources. It includes “DTS

NEO:6 CINEMA” suited for playing movies and “DTS NEO:6 MUSIC”

suited for playing music.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;

5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535 & other

U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered

trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality

playback in 5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24

bit quantization on DVD-Video.

Dolby Pro Logic g

Dolby Pro Logic g is a matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby

Laboratories.

Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into 5-channels to

achieve an excellent surround effect.

The surround channel signals are converted into stereo and full band

signals (with a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater) to

create a “three-dimensional” sound image offering a rich sense of

presence for all stereo sources.

Home THX Cinema Surround

THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by

the world-renowned ﬁlm production company, Lucasﬁlm Ltd. THX

grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your experience of

the ﬁlm soundtrack, in both movie theaters and in your home theater,

as faithful as possible to what the director intended.

Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theaters called dubbing

stages and are designed to be played back in movie theaters with

similar equipment and conditions. The soundtrack created for movie

theaters is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape,

DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theater

environment.

THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate

the sound from the movie theater environment into the home, correcting

the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On the AVP-A1HDCI, when the

Home THX Cinema mode is on, THX post-processing is automatically

added after the Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS decoder:

Re-EQ™ (Re-Equalization)

The tonal balance of a ﬁlm soundtrack will be excessively bright and

harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because

ﬁlm soundtracks are designed to be played back in large movie

theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization

restores the correct tonal balance for listening to a movie soundtrack

in a normal home environment.

Dolby Headphone

This is a three-dimensional sound technology developed jointly by

Dolby Laboratories and Lake Technology Ltd. of Australia for achieving

surround sound using regular headphones.

Previously, when using headphones all the sounds resonated inside

the head and it was uncomfortable to listen with headphones for long

periods of time. Dolby Headphone simulates speaker playback in a

room and places the sound at the front or the sides, outside the head,

to achieve a powerful sound like the sound of movie or home theaters.

This technology is mainly for multichannel audio/video equipment with

Dolby Digital or Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoding functions and

works with a high performance digital signal processing (DSP) chip.

Dolby Headphone is effective not only for multichannel sources but

also for stereo programs.

On the AVP-A1HDCI, it is possible to output signals encoded in the

Dolby Headphone mode from the recording output terminal and record

them on a separate recorder.

Information

Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX is a 6.1-channel surround format proposed by Dolby

Laboratories that allows users to enjoy in their homes the “DOLBY

DIGITAL SURROUND EX” audio format jointly developed by Dolby

Laboratories and Lucas Films.

The 6.1 channels of sound, including surround back channels, provide

improved sound positioning and expression of space.



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Adaptive Decorrelation™

In a movie theater, a large number of surround speakers help create an

enveloping surround sound experience, while in a home theater there

are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers

sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The

surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you

move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation

slightly changes one surround channel’s time and phase relationship

with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening

position and creates—with only two speakers—the same spacious

surround experience as in a movie theater.

THX Ultra2™

Before any home theater component can be THX Ultra2 certiﬁed,

it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous

series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product

feature the THX Ultra2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home

Theater products you purchase will give you superb performance for

many years to come. THX Ultra2 requirements cover every aspect

of the product including power ampliﬁer performance, pre-ampliﬁer

performance and operation, as well as hundreds of other parameters

in both the digital and analog domain.

In addition to improvements to the power ampliﬁer with respect

to previous THX Ultra standards, three surround modes have been

added: the THX Ultra2 Cinema mode, THX Music Mode and THX

Games Mode.

THX Ultra2 Cinema

THX Ultra2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers giving

you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode, new

THX processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround

speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround

sounds.

DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX

encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Ultra2 Cinema

mode if the appropriate ﬂag has been encoded.

Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital

ﬂag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that

you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select

the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Ultra2 Cinema

mode will apply processing to provide optimum replay.

THX Music Mode

For the replay of 5.1 multi-channel music the THX Music Mode should

be selected. In this mode new THX processing is applied to the

surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS and

Dolby Digital to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.

THX Games Mode

For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX Games

Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied

to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game sources

such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately places all

game audio surround information, providing a full 360 degree playback

environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives you a smooth

transition of audio in all points of the surround ﬁeld.

ASA (Advanced Speaker Array)

ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to

2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround

sound experience. When you set up your home theater system using

all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround

Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and Subwoofer) placing

the two Surround Back speakers close together facing the front of the

room as shown in the diagram will provide the largest sweet spot. If

for practical reasons you have to place the Surround Back speakers

apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the

setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which

will re-optimize the surround sound-ﬁeld.

ASA is used in three new modes; THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Music

Mode and THX Games Mode.

Boundary Gain Compensation

If your chosen listening room layout (for practical or aesthetic reasons)

results in the most of the listeners being close to the rear wall, the

resulting bass level can be sufﬁciently reinforced by the boundary that

the overall sound quality becomes “boomy”. THX Ultra2 receivers

and controllers contain the BGC (Boundary Gain Compensation)

feature to provide an improved bass balance. BGC can be selected

by choosing “THX Ultra2 Subwoofer–Yes” from the “Boundary Gain

Compensation” section of the THX Audio setup menu.

THX and Re-EQ, THX Timbre Matching, THX Adaptive Decorrelation,

and THX Advanced Speaker Array are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX

In 1999, a new surround system was launched simultaneously with the

release of the movie “Star Wars Episode I”. “Dolby Digital Surround

EX” is a new movie sound track that greatly enhances the sense

of spatial expression and the positioning of the surround channel

sound. The result is 360 degrees of movement and moving sound

effects that seem to pass right over the listener’s head. This system

was developed jointly by THX and Dolby Laboratories, fusing THX’s

idea of improving spatial expression and achieving a uniform 360

degree sound positioning with Dolby Laboratories’ matrix encoding

technology. Emphasis was placed on compatibility with the existing

system Dolby Digital 5.1 channel, and the new “surround back (SB)

channel” was added to achieve improvements over the conventional

5.1 channel system in terms of the positioning of the sound at the

rear, the acoustic image of sound moving from the two sides to the

back as well as sound moving from the front to the center rear with

the multi surround speaker systems used in movie theaters, thereby

enabling various types of surround sound. The surround back channel

signal is a matrix-encoded signal inserted into both the Dolby Digital

SL (surround left) and SR (surround right) channels. Upon playback, the

signals are decoded by a high precision digital matrix decoder within

the Dolby Digital decoder into the SL, SR and SB channels and output

as 6.1 channels of signals. With the AVP-A1HDCI, the signals further

undergo Home THX Cinema processing to achieve a THX Surround

EX system. Even without the proper environment for playing the SB

channel, Dolby Digital Surround EX signals are 100% compatible with

existing 5.1 channel playback systems, so they can be played as such.

In this case, the SB channel signal is produced as a monaural signal

from both the SL and SR channels, so none of the signal components

are missing. The effects speciﬁc to THX Surround EX (the sense of

spatial expression and the positioning of the sound), however, are the

same as with conventional 5.1 channel surround systems.

Timbre Matching™

The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the

direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theater, there

is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is

all around you. In a home theater, only two speakers located to the

side of your head are used. The Timbre Matching feature ﬁlters the

information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely

match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front

speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and

surround speakers.

THX™ Surround EX™

Information



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Audyssey

HDCD® is an encoding/decoding technology that greatly reduces

the distortion that occurs upon digital recording while maintaining

compatibility with the conventional CD format, thus expanding the

dynamic range and achieving a high resolution.

Conventional CDs and HDCD compatible CDs are identiﬁed

automatically to select the optimum digital processing.

HDCD®

(High Deﬁnition Compatible Digital®)

Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories.

U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT is a

registered trademark of Audyssey Laboratories. Dynamic EQ™ is

a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.

®, HDCD®, High Deﬁnition Compatible Digital® and

Microsoft® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation, Inc. in the United States and/or other

countries. HDCD system manufactured under license from

Microsoft Corporation, Inc. This product is covered by one or more

of the following: In the USA: 5,479,168, 5,638,074, 5,640,161,

5,808,574, 5,838,274, 5,854,600, 5,864,311, 5,872,531, and in

Australia: 669114. Other patents pending.

DENON LINK

Advanced AL24 Processing Multi

channel

DENON LINK is a unique digital, balanced transfer type interface

developed by DENON. It offers high speed, high quality transfer of

digital audio data with low signal loss. It can be used together with

DENON DVD players equipped with a special DENON LINK connector

using a single cable to enable playback with high sound quality.

It allows digital transfer of the 192 kHz/24 bit 2-channel digital signals

of DVD-Audio discs, PCM multi-channel signals, etc. Full-spec digital

transfer of the audio contents of Super Audio CD is possible by

connecting a player equipped for DENON LINK 3rd Edition.

Equipped with “Advanced AL24 Processing” time axis region

information volume expansion

In addition to the existing “AL24 Processing Plus” bit expansion

technology, DENON has also developed “Advanced AL24 Processing”

that dramatically improves information volume in the time axis region

using high-speed signal detection and processing technology. In

addition to expanding original 16-bit digital data to 24 bits, “Advanced

AL24 Processing” uses data interpolation along the time axis or up-

converted sampling to achieve natural interpolation without losing the

original data. A digital ﬁlter is used to further expand adaptability and

perform optimum ﬁltering calculations for ringing-free pulse response,

pulsive music data and attack sounds.

This results in the reproduction of such spatial information as the

delicate nuances in the music, the positions of the performers, and

the breadth, height, and depth of the concert hall. “Advanced AL24

Processing” is conducted for all channels and modes other than DSD

DIRECT.

Audyssey MultEQ® XT

Audyssey MultEQ® XT is the ﬁrst technology to properly measure

sound information throughout a listening area, then combine this

information to accurately represent the acoustical problems in

the room. Based on these measurements, MultEQ XT calculates

an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency

response problems in every seat. Audyssey MultEQ XT not only

corrects frequency response problem in a large listening area but also

performs a fully automated surround system setup.

For a detailed description, see page 26.

Audyssey Dynamic EQ™

Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound

quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception

and room acoustics. Dynamic EQ selects the best possible frequency

response and surround levels moment-by-moment as volume is

changed. The result is bass response, tonal balance and surround

impression that remain constant despite changes in volume. This

is the ﬁrst technology to combine information from incoming source

levels with actual output sound levels in the room, a pre-requisite

for delivering a loudness correction solution. Audyssey Dynamic EQ

works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ to provide well-balanced

sound for every listener at any volume level.

THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be registered

trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permission.

For more information, visit www.audyssey.com.

Neural Surround™, a breakthrough in audio technology, will bring the

excitement of surround music to more of America’s listening audience.

It provides the rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround

sound in a format 100 % compatible with stereo. With superior

spectral resolution and channel separation, Neural Surround™ draws

the brain’s attention to sonic details in musical instruments, vocals,

and ambience that are typically masked by other playback systems.

This allows the listener to fully experience the richness and subtleties

in recorded performance as never before. As the chosen format for XM

Satellite Radio’s new XM HD surround programming, Neural Surround

will help deliver more surround music to more listeners than any other

broadcast format. XM Satellite Radio will be the ﬁrst radio company to

broadcast surround sound on the radio 24 hours a day and will offer

three channels fully dedicated to Neural Surround™ music. This alone

will amount to more than 25,000 hours of Neural Surround™ music

each year.

Neural Surround

This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio

Corporation.

D&M Holdings Inc. hereby grants the user a non-exclusive,

nontransferable, limited license right exercisable to use the NA

SURROUND Technology and other US and World Wide Patents

Pending technology.

“Neural” and “Neural Audio” and “Neural Surround” are

Information



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

HDMI

(High-Deﬁnition Multimedia Interface)

HDMI is a digital interface standard for next generation TVs based

on DVI (Digital Visual Interface) standards and optimized for use in

consumer equipment.

Non-compressed digital video and multi-channel audio signals are

transmitted with a single connection.

HDMI is also compatible with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Contents

Protection), a technology for protecting copyrights that encrypts digital

video signals in the same was as with DVI.

“HDMI”, “HDMI logo” and “High-Deﬁnition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

Deep Color

Eliminates on-screen color banding, for smooth tonal transitions and

subtle gradations between colors.

Enables increased contrast ratio.

Can represent many times more shades of gray between black and

white.

At 30-bit pixel depth, a four times improvement would be the minimum,

and the typical improvement would be eight times or more.

xvYCC

Next-generation “xvYCC” color space supports 1.8 times as many

colors as existing HDTV signals.

Lets HDTVs display colors more accurately.

Enables displays with natural, vivid colors.

Lip Sync

Because consumer electronics devices are using increasingly

complex digital signal processing to enhance the clarity and detail of

the content, synchronization of video and audio in user devices has

become a greater challenge and could potentially require complex end-

user adjustments. HDMI 1.3 incorporates an automatic video/audio

synching capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization

automatically with total accuracy.

Surround Mode

Signals and adjustability in the different modes

Channel output Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)

Front L/R Center Surround

L/R

Surround

Back L/R Subwoofer D. COMP

DRC

LFE

AFDM

z1SB CH Out Cinema

EQ.

PURE DIRECT, DIRECT S A A A D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A A A

DSD DIRECT S A A A A A A A A A A

DSD MULTI DIRECT S D D D D A A S (0 dB) A S A

MULTI CH DIRECT S D D D D A A S (0 dB) S (ON) S A

STEREO S A A A D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) AAA

EXT. IN S D D D D A A A A S (NOTE6) A

MULTI CH IN S D D D D A A S (0 dB) S (ON) S A

WIDE SCREEN S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S S (OFF)

HOME THX CINEMA

(2ch) S D D D D A A A A S A

HOME THX CINEMA

(5.1ch) S D D D D A A S (0 dB) S (ON) S A

DOLBY PRO LOGIC gxS D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) A A S S (NOTE1)

DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S D D A D S (OFF) S (Auto) A A S S (NOTE2)

DTS NEO:6 S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) A A S S (NOTE1)

DOLBY DIGITAL S D D D D S (OFF) A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF)

DOLBY DIGITAL Plus S D D D D S (OFF) A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF)

DOLBY TrueHD S D D D D A S (Auto) S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF)

DTS SURROUND S D D D D S (OFF) A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF)

DTS 96/24 S D D D D S (OFF) A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF)

DTS-HD S D D D D S (OFF) A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF)

neural S D D D D A A A A S A

7CH STEREO S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A

SUPER STADIUM S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A

ROCK ARENA S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) ASA

JAZZ CLUB S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A

CLASSIC CONCERT S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A

MONO S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A

VIDEO GAME S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A

MATRIX S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A

DOLBY HEADPHONE S A A A A A A A A A A

S : Signal / Adjustable

A : No signal / Not adjustable

D : Turned on or off by speaker conﬁguration setting

NOTE1 : This parameter is availabe when the GUI menu “Parameter” – “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” – “Mode” is set to “Cinema”

(vpage 52).

NOTE2 : This parameter is availabe when the GUI menu “Parameter” – “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” – “Mode” is set to “Cinema”

or “Pro Logic” (vpage 52).

NOTE6 : This parameter can be used when GUI menu “Manual Setup”– “Audio Setup”– “ EXT. IN Setup”– “Mode” is set to “DSP”

(vpage 33)

NOTE:

z1 : When playing Dolby Digital and DTS signals.

z2 : When playing Dolby True HD signal.

z3 : When playing Dolby Digital, DTS, DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD.

Surround Modes and Parameters

Information



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Surround Mode

Signals and adjustability in the different modes

Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)

Mode Decoder Room Size Effect Level Delay Time Subwoofer

PRO LOGIC g/gx MUSIC mode

only

NEO:6

MUSIC

mode only

EXT. IN only

Tone z1 Night Mode Room EQ Dynamic

EQ z2RESTORER

Panorama Dimension Center

Width

Center

Image

Subwoofer

Att.

Input

Channel

(NOTE6)

PURE DIRECT, DIRECT A A A A A S A A A A S S A S (OFF) S (NOTE5) S (NOTE5) S

DSD DIRECT A A A A A S A A A A A A A A A A A

DSD MULTI DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

MULTI CH DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A S S A S (OFF) S (NOTE5) S (NOTE5) A

STEREO A A A A A A A A A A S S S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

EXT. IN A A A A A A A A A A S S A A A A A

MULTI CH IN A A A A A A A A A A S S S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) A

WIDE SCREEN A A A S (ON, 10) A A A A A A S S S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

HOME THX CINEMA

(2ch) S (PLIIx C) S A A A A A A A A S S A S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

HOME THX CINEMA

(5.1ch) A A A A A A A A A A S S A S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) A

DOLBY PRO LOGIC gxS (Cinema) A A A A A S (OFF) S (3) S (3) A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S (Cinema) A A A A A S (OFF) S (3) S (3) A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

DTS NEO:6 S (Cinema) A A A A A A A A S (0.3) A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

DOLBY DIGITAL A A A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) A

DOLBY DIGITAL Plus A A A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) A S (OFF) S (OFF) A

DOLBY TrueHD A A A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) A S (OFF) S (OFF) A

DTS SURROUND A A A A A A A A A A S S S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) A

DTS 96/24 A A A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) A

DTS-HD A A A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) A S (OFF) S (OFF) A

neural A A A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

7CH STEREO A A A A A A A A A A S S S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

SUPER STADIUM A A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A S S S (NOTE3) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

ROCK ARENA A A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A S S S (NOTE4) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

JAZZ CLUB A A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A S S S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

CLASSIC CONCERT A A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A S S S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

MONO A A S (Medium) S (0) A A A A A A S S S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

VIDEO GAME A A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A S S S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

MATRIX A A A A S (30 ms) A A A A A S S S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

DOLBY HEADPHONE A S A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

S : Signal / Adjustable

A : No signal / Not adjustable

NOTE3 : BASS +6 dB, TREBLE 0 dB

NOTE4 : BASS +6 dB, TREBLE +4 dB

NOTE5 : Can be used according to the “Direct Mode” setting.

NOTE6 : “DSP” mode only

z1 : When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “ON”, you cannot use the “Tone” setting.

z2 : Can be set when GUI menu “Parameter” – “Audio” – “Room EQ” is set to “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Flat”, “Audyssey Byp.L/R”.

Information



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Button

Note

Input signals

ANALOG

LINEAR

PCM /

WAV

WMA

(Windows

Media Audio)

/ MP3 /

MPEG-4

AAC / FLAC

DTS-HD DTS DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL DVD-AUDIO Super Audio CD

Surround mode DTS-HD

Master

Audio

DTS-HD

High

Resolution

Audio

DTS ES

DSCRT

(With

Flag)

DTS ES

MTRX

(With

Flag)

DTS

(5.1ch)

DTS

96/24

DOLBY

TrueHD

DOLBY

DIGITAL

Plus

DOLBY

DIGITAL

EX (With

Flag)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

EX (With

no Flag)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(5.1/5/4ch)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(4/3ch)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(2ch)

DVD-

Audio

(multi ch)

DVD-

Audio

(2ch)

DSD

(multi ch)

DSD

(2ch)

HOME THX CINEMA

ES DSCRT6.1 + THX z1A A A S S D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

ES MTRX6.1 + THX z1A A A S S A D S S A A A A A A A A A A A

THX SURROUND EX z1A A A A A A A A A S S D S S S A S A S A

THX Ultra2 Cinema z2A A A S S S S S S S S S S S S A S A S A

THX Music Mode z2A A A S S S S S S S S S S S S A S A S A

THX Games Mode z2S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

THX Cinema A A A S S S S S S S S S S S S A S A S A

PLgx C + THX z3S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

PLg C + THX S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S

DOLBY PL + THX S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S

NEO:6 + THX S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S

MULTI CH 7.1 + THX A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S (7.1) AAA

MULTI CH 5.1 + THX A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A

STANDARD

DTS SURROUND

DTS-HD MSTR AA A F A A A A A A A A A A A A AAA A

DTS-HD HI RES A A A A F A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

DTS ES DSCRT6.1 z1A A A A A F D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

DTS ES MTRX6.1 z1A A A A A A F D A A A A A A A A A A A A A

DTS SURROUND A A A A A S S F A A A A A A A A A A A A

DTS 96/24 A A A A A A A A F A A A A A A A A A A A

DTS (–HD) + PLgx CINEMA z2A A A S S S S S S A A A A A A A A A A A

DTS (–HD) + PLgx MUSIC z1A A A S S S S S S A A A A A A A A A A A

DTS (–HD) + NEO:6 z1A A A S S A S S S A A A A A A A A A A A

DTS NEO:6 CINEMA S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S

DTS NEO:6 MUSIC S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S

F : Mode selectable in initial status

D : Mode ﬁxed when “AFDM” is “ON”

S : Selectable mode

A : Non-selectable mode

NOTE:

z1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “None” (vpage 29).

z2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None” (vpage 29).

z3: For input signals other than 2 channel signals, this mode cannot be selected when surround back speaker is set

to “1spkr” or “None”.

Differences in Surround Mode Names Depending on the Input Signals

Information



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Button

Note

Input signals

ANALOG

LINEAR

PCM /

WAV

WMA

(Windows

Media

Audio) / MP3

/ MPEG-4

AAC / FLAC

DTS-HD DTS DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL DVD-AUDIO Super Audio CD

Surround mode DTS-HD

Master

Audio

DTS-HD

High

Resolution

Audio

DTS ES

DSCRT

(With

Flag)

DTS ES

MTRX

(With

Flag)

DTS

(5.1ch)

DTS

96/24

DOLBY

TrueHD

DOLBY

DIGITAL

Plus

DOLBY

DIGITAL

EX (With

Flag)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

EX (With

no Flag)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(5.1/5/4ch)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(4/3ch)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(2ch)

DVD-Audio

(multi ch)

DVD-

Audio

(2ch)

DSD

(multi ch)

DSD

(2ch)

STANDARD

DOLBY SURROUND

DOLBY TrueHD A A A A A A A A A F A A A A A A A A A A

DOLBY DIGITAL+ AAAA A A A A A A F A A A A A A A A A

DOLBY DIGITAL EX z1A A A A A A A A A A A S S S S A A A A A

DOLBY (D+) (HD) +EX z1AAAA A A A A A S S A A A A A A A A A

DOLBY DIGITAL AAAA A A A A A A A S F F F A A A A A

DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx

CINEMA

z2A A A A A A A A A S S F D S S S A A A A A

DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx

MUSIC

z1AA A A A A A A A S S S S S S A A A A A

DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx CINEMA z1S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S

DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MUSIC z1SS S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S

DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx GAME z1S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S

DOLBY PRO LOGIC g CINEMA SS S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S

DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S

DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S

DOLBY PRO LOGIC S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S

DOLBY HEADPHONE z4S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

neural S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

MULTI CH IN

MULTI CH IN A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A F A F A

MULTI IN + PLgx CINEMA z2A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A

MULTI IN + PLgx MUSIC z1A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A

MULTI IN + Dolby EX z1A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A

MULTI CH IN 7.1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A F D

(7.1)

A A A

DIRECT

DIRECT S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S A S A S

DSD DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S

DSD MULTI DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A

MULTI CH DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A

M DIRECT + PLgx CINEMA z2A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A

M DIRECT + PLgx MUSIC z1A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A

M DIRECT + Dolby EX z1A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A

M DIRECT 7.1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S

(7.1)

A A A

NOTE:

z1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “None” (vpage 29).

z2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None” (vpage 29).

z4: You can select this when the headphone plug is inserted into the headphone jack.

F : Mode selectable in initial status

D : Mode ﬁxed when “AFDM” is “ON”

S : Selectable mode

A : Non-selectable mode

Information



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Button

Note

Input signals

ANALOG

LINEAR

PCM /

WAV

WMA

(Windows

Media Audio)

/ MP3 /

MPEG-4

AAC / FLAC

DTS-HD DTS DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL DVD-AUDIO Super Audio CD

Surround mode DTS-HD

Master

Audio

DTS-HD

High

Resolution

Audio

DTS ES

DSCRT

(With

Flag)

DTS ES

MTRX

(With

Flag)

DTS

(5.1ch)

DTS

96/24

DOLBY

TrueHD

DOLBY

DIGITAL

Plus

DOLBY

DIGITAL

EX (With

Flag)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

EX (With

no Flag)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(5.1/5/4ch)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(4/3ch)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(2ch)

DVD-

Audio

(multi ch)

DVD-

Audio

(2ch)

DSD

(multi ch) DSD (2ch)

PURE DIRECT

PURE DIRECT S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S A S A S

DSD PURE DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S

DSD MULTI PURE A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A

MULTI CH PURE DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A

M PURE D + PLgx CINEMA z2A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A

M PURE D + PLgx MUSIC z1A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A

M PURE D + Dolby EX z1A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A

M CH PURE DIRECT 7.1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S

(7.1)

AAA

DSP SIMULATION

7CH STEREO z5S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

WIDE SCREEN S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

SUPER STADIUM S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

ROCK ARENA S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

JAZZ CLUB S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

CLASSIC CONCERT S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

MONO S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

VIDEO GAME S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

MATRIX S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

STEREO

STEREO F F F S S S S S S S S S S S S F S F S F

F : Mode selectable in initial status

S : Selectable mode

A : Non-selectable mode

NOTE :

z1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “None” (vpage 29).

z2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None” (vpage 29).

z5: If the surround back speaker setup is set to “None” and when using headphones, then “5CH STEREO” is displayed.

“9CH STEREO” is displayed when surround (A+B) and the surround back speaker are used.

Information



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Windows Media Player ver.11

vTuner

This is a free online contents server for Internet radio. Note that usage

fees are included in upgrade costs.

For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below.

vTuner website: http://www.radiodenon.com

This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of

Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of

such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license

from Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized

subsidiary.

Windows Media DRM

A copyright-protected technology developed by Microsoft.

• Windows Vista and the Windows logo are trademarks of the

Microsoft group of companies.

• The PlaysForSure logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are

trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

• Content providers are using the digital rights management technology

for Windows Media contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect

the integrity of their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual

property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated.

This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (WM-

DRM Software). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this

device has been compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure

Content Owners) may request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM

Software’s right to acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or play

Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM Software’s

ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked WM-DRM

Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license

for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may,

in conjunction with such license, also download revocation list onto

your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.

About Networks

This is a media player distributed free of charge by Microsoft

Corporation.

It can be used to play playlists created with Windows Media Player

ver. 11 as well as ﬁles in such formats as WMA, DRM WMA, MP3

and WAV.

About Wireless LAN

Wi-Fi®

Wi-Fi Certiﬁcation assures tested and proven interoperability by the

Wi-Fi Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN

devices.

IEEE 802.11b

This is one wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group

that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE (Institute of

Electrical and Electronics Engineers) of the United States. It uses the

2.4 GHz band usable freely without a radio frequency license (ISM

band), enabling communications at a maximum speed of 11 Mbps.

IEEE 802.11g

This is another wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group

that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE (Institute of

Electrical and Electronics Engineers) of the United States, and is

compatible with IEEE 802.11b. It also uses the 2.4 GHz band, but

enables communications at a maximum speed of 54 Mbps.

Infrastructure Communications

“Infrastructure Communications” refers to networks using wireless

LAN access points.

This function can be used to connect to the Internet or a wired LAN

via a wireless LAN access point. Wireless LAN access points include

wireless broadband routers.

Ad-hoc Communications

Signal transfer through wireless interconnection of computers is referred

to as “ad hoc communications”. With such ad hoc communications

there is no connection to the Internet. Ad hoc communications are

suited for establishing simple temporary networks.

The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the

wireless LAN standard, and does not indicate the actual data transfer

rate.

The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the

wireless LAN standard, and does not indicate the actual data transfer

rate.

Network Names (SSID: Security Set Identiﬁer)

When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent

interference, data theft, etc. This grouping is done by “SSID” or

“Security Set Identiﬁers”. For further security, a WEP key is set and

signal transfer is not possible unless the SSID and WEP key match.

WEP Key (Network Key)

This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting

data transfer. On the AVP-A1HDCI, the same WEP key is used for

data encryption and decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on

both devices in order for communications to be established between

them.

DLNA

• DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of

Digital Living Network Alliance.

• Some contents may not be compatible with other DLNA CERTIFIED™

products.

Information



Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)

This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition

to the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key),

it also uses a user identiﬁcation function and encrypting protocol for

stronger security.

WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2)

This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,

compatible with more secure AES encryption.

WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key)

This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when

a preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point

and client.

Passphrase

This refers to the code key used for WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK authentication,

a WPA authentication method.

TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)

This is a network key used for WPA. The encryption algorithm is RC4,

the same as for WEP, but the security level is increased by changing

the network key used for encryption for each packet.

AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)

This is a next generation standard encryption method replacing the

current DES and 3DES, and because of its high security it is expected

to be applied widely to wireless LANs in the future. It uses the

“Rijndael” algorithm developed by two Belgian cryptographers to

divide the data into blocks of ﬁxed lengths and encrypt each block. It

supports data lengths of 128, 192 and 256 bits and key lengths of 128,

192 and 256 bits as well, offering extremely high encryption security.

Information

00

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Video Convert Input signal Monitor output Monitor output (when GUI menu displayed)

HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO

A A A A bb z4z4z4z4

A A A S b VIDEOz1VIDEOz1 VIDEOz1 z5 VIDEOz1 z5b VIDEOz3VIDEOz3 VIDEOz3 VIDEOz3

A A S A b S-VIDEOz1S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1b S-VIDEOz3S-VIDEOz3 S-VIDEOz3 S-VIDEOz3

A A S S b S-VIDEOz1S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1b S-VIDEOz3S-VIDEOz3 S-VIDEOz3 S-VIDEOz3

A S (1080p) A A A COMPONENT A A b z4z4z4z4

A S (480p ~ 720p) A A b COMPONENTz1COMPONENTz1A A b COMPONENTz3COMPONENTz3A A

A S (480i/576i) A A b COMPONENTz1COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1b COMPONENTz3COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3

A S (1080p) A S b VIDEOz1COMPONENT VIDEO z1 z5 VIDEO z1 z5b VIDEOz3VIDEOz3 VIDEOz3 VIDEOz3

A S (480p ~ 720p) A S b COMPONENTz1COMPONENTz1AVIDEO b COMPONENTz3COMPONENTz3AVIDEO

A S (480i/576i) A S b COMPONENTz1COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1b COMPONENTz3COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3

A S (1080p) S A b S-VIDEOz1COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1b S-VIDEOz3S-VIDEOz3 S-VIDEOz3 S-VIDEOz3

A S (480p ~ 720p) S A b COMPONENTz1COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO b COMPONENTz3COMPONENTz3 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

A S (480i/576i) S A b COMPONENTz1COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1b COMPONENTz3COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3

A S (1080p) S S b S-VIDEOz1COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1b S-VIDEO*3 S-VIDEOz3 S-VIDEOz3 S-VIDEOz3

A S (480p ~ 720p) S S b COMPONENTz1COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO b COMPONENTz3COMPONENTz3 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

A S (480i/576i) S S b COMPONENTz1COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1b COMPONENTz3COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3

With HDMI

monitor

S A A A HDMIz2AAAHDMIz3AAA

S A A S HDMIz2 VIDEOz1 VIDEO z1 z5 VIDEO z1 z5 HDMIz3 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO

S A S A HDMIz2 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 HDMIz3 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

S A S S HDMIz2 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 HDMIz3 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

S S (1080p) A A HDMIz2 COMPONENT A A HDMIz3 COMPONENT A A

S S (480p ~ 720p) A A HDMIz2 COMPONENTz1A A HDMIz3 COMPONENT A A

S S (480i/576i) A A HDMIz2 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 HDMIz3 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT

S S (1080p) A S HDMIz2 COMPONENT VIDEO z1 z5 VIDEO z1 z5 HDMIz3 COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO

S S (480p ~ 720p) A S HDMIz2 COMPONENTz1AVIDEO HDMIz3 COMPONENT AVIDEO

S S (480i/576i) A S HDMIz2 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 HDMIz3 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT

S S (1080p) S A HDMIz2 COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 HDMIz3 COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

S S (480p ~ 720p) S A HDMIz2 COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMIz3 COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

S S (480i/576i) S A HDMIz2 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 HDMIz3 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT

S S (1080p) S S HDMIz2 COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 HDMIz3 COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

S S (480p ~ 720p) S S HDMIz2 COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMIz3 COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

S S (480i/576i) S S HDMIz2 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 HDMIz3 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT

Without HDMI

monitor

with HDMI

monitor off

S A A A A A A A A z4z4z4

S A A S A VIDEOz1 VIDEOz1 z5 VIDEOz1 z5AVIDEOz3 VIDEOz3 VIDEOz3

S A S A A S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1AS-VIDEOz3 S-VIDEOz3 S-VIDEOz3

S A S S A S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1AS-VIDEOz3 S-VIDEOz3 S-VIDEOz3

S S (1080p) A A A COMPONENT A A A z4z4z4

S S (480p ~ 720p) A A A COMPONENTz1A A A COMPONENTz3A A

S S (480i/576i) A A A COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1ACOMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3

S S (1080p) A S A COMPONENT VIDEOz1 z5 VIDEO z1 z5AVIDEOz3 VIDEOz3 VIDEOz3

S S (480p ~ 720p) A S A COMPONENTz1AVIDEO ACOMPONENTz3AVIDEO

S S (480i/576i) A S A COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1ACOMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3

S S (1080p) S A A COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1AS-VIDEOz3 S-VIDEOz3 S-VIDEOz3

S S (480p ~ 720p) S A A COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO ACOMPONENTz3 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

S S (480i/576i) S A A COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1ACOMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3

S S (1080p) S S A COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1AS-VIDEOz3 S-VIDEOz3 S-VIDEOz3

S S (480p ~ 720p) S S A COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO ACOMPONENTz3 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

S S (480i/576i) S S A COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1ACOMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3

Relationship Between Video Signals and Monitor Output

n MAIN ZONE

S : Signal present

A : No signal

480p ~ 720p : 480p / 576p / 1080i / 720p

A : No output

z1 : The “Picture Adjust” setting can be made (“Contrast”, “Brightness”,

“Chroma Level”, “Hue”).

z2 : The “Picture Adjust” setting can be made (“DNR”, “Enhancer”,

“Sharpness”).

z3 : Superimposed over video signal

z4 : Only displayed when the MENU button is pressed

z5 : If the input signal is in SECAM format, it is converted to PAL for output

b : Output according to “Resolution” setting (i/p Scaler : When “A to H” is

set) (vpage 46).

: Wallpaper or set background color displayed

: Output according to “Resolution” setting (i/p Scaler : When “H to H”

is set) (vpage 46).

: GUI menu not displayed

• The MAIN ZONE video conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4,43, PAL -N, PAL -M and PAL -60.

• When SECAM signals of video input are up-converted, the signals are output in PAL format from the S-Video connector.

• If the input signal is a component 1080p signal, up-converting to HDMI is not possible.

• The GUI menu display cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component 1080p signal, computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) are input.

Information

0

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Video Convert Input signal Monitor output (Normally) Monitor output (when GUI menu displayed)

HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO

OFF

A A A A A A A A S S S S

A A A S A A A S (VIDEO) SSSS

A A S A A A S (S-VIDEO) ASSSS

A A S S A A S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO) SSSS

A S A A A S (COMPONENT) A A S S S S

A S A S A S (COMPONENT) A S (VIDEO) SSSS

A S S A A S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) A SSSS

A S S S A S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO) SSSS

S A A A S (HDMI) A A A S (HDMI)zAAA

S A A S S (HDMI) A A S (VIDEO) S (HDMI)zAAA

S A S A S (HDMI) A S (S-VIDEO) A S (HDMI)zAAA

S A S S S (HDMI) A S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO) S (HDMI)zAAA

S S A A S (HDMI) S (COMPONENT) A A S (HDMI)zAAA

S S A S S (HDMI) S (COMPONENT) A S (VIDEO) S (HDMI)zAAA

S S S A S (HDMI) S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) A S (HDMI)zAAA

S S S S S (HDMI) S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO) S (HDMI)zAAA

S : Signal present

A : No signal

S : Output present

A : No output

z : Superimposed over video signal

To display the GUI menu on an HDMI monitor, output with a resolution of 480p/576p.

n ZONE2

Video Convert Input signal Monitor output

COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO

A A A A A A

A A S S (VIDEO) S (VIDEO) S (VIDEO)

A S A S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO)

A S S S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO)

S (1080p) A A S (COMPONENT) A A

S (480p ~ 720p) A A S (COMPONENT) A A

S (480i / 576i) A A S (COMPONENT) S (COMPONENT) S (COMPONENT)

S (1080p) A S S (COMPONENT)z1S (VIDEO) S (VIDEO)

S (480p ~ 720p) A S S (COMPONENT)z1S (VIDEO) S (VIDEO)

S (480i / 576i) A S S (COMPONENT)z1S (COMPONENT) S (VIDEO)

S (1080p) S A S (COMPONENT)z2S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO)

S (480p ~ 720p) S A S (COMPONENT)z2S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO)

S (480i / 576i) S A S (COMPONENT)z2S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO)

S (1080p) S S S (COMPONENT)z2S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO)

S (480p ~ 720p) S S S (COMPONENT)z2S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO)

S (480i / 576i) S S S (COMPONENT)z2S (S-VIDEO) S (S-VIDEO)

S : Output present

A : No output

z1 : With On-screen display, the VIDEO signal is superimposed output.

z2 : With On-screen display, the S-VIDEO signal is superimposed output.

COMPONENT :

When you operate the MENU button, on-screen display is displayed.

Information

0

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Troubleshooting Speciﬁcations

Input signal Monitor output

S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO

AAA

A S S (VIDEO)

S A S (S-VIDEO)

S S S (S-VIDEO)

Video Convert S-VIDEO

Monitor Out

Input signal Monitor output

COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO

OFF

–A A A A A A

–A A S A A S (VIDEO)

–A S A A S (S-VIDEO) A

Used A S S A S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO)*2

Not used A S S A –S (VIDEO)

–S A A S (COMPONENT) A A

–S A S S (COMPONENT)z1A S (VIDEO)

–S S A S (COMPONENT)z2S (S-VIDEO) A

Used SS S S (COMPONENT)z2S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO)*2

Not used S S S S (COMPONENT)z1–S (VIDEO)

S : Output present

A : No output

z1 : With On-screen display, the VIDEO signal is superimposed output.

z2 : With On-screen display, the S-VIDEO signal is superimposed output.

n ZONE3

S : Signal present

A : No signal

S : Output present

A : No output

Information

0

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Speciﬁcations

If a problem should arise, ﬁrst check the following:

1. Are the connections correct?

2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner’s manual?

3. Are the other components operating properly?

If this unit does not operate properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist,

there may be a malfunction.

In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

Power does not

turn on, or turns

off directly after it

was turned on.

• Connection of the power cord is

faulty.

• Check that the power plug is

securely inserted into the AVP-

A1HDCI’s AC inlet and the wall

power outlet.

No sound is

produced from

speakers.

• The connection with the input

devices or power amp is faulty.

• Device you want to play and set

input source do not match.

• Master volume is turned too

low.

• Mute mode is set.

• Headphones are connected.

• No digital signals are being

input.

• The connectors to which the

digital inputs are assigned and

the settable input modes do not

match.

• Check the connections.

• Select an appropriate input

source.

• Adjust the master volume to an

appropriate level.

• Cancel the mute mode.

• Disconnect the headphones.

• Select an input source for which

the digital input setting has been

made.

• Set the input mode.

45, 48

Display is off. • The “Dimmer” setting is set to

“OFF”.

• The PURE DIRECT mode is set.

• Set to something other than

“OFF”.

• Set a surround mode other than

the PURE DIRECT mode.

“DOLBY DIGITAL”

indicator does not

appear on display.

• DVD player’s digital audio output

setting is not proper.

• Check the DVD player’s audio

output setting. For details, read

the DVD player’s operating

instructions.

–

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

Power turns off

suddenly and

power indicator

ﬂashes red.

• Set is damaged. • Turn off the power and contact a

DENON service center.

–

GGeneralH

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

Set does not work

properly when

remote control

unit operated.

• Batteries are worn.

• You are operating outside of the

speciﬁed range.

• Obstacle between main unit and

remote control unit.

• The batteries are not inserted in

the proper direction, as indicated

by the polarity marks in the

battery compartment.

• The set’s remote control sensor

is exposed to strong light (direct

sunlight, inverter type ﬂuorescent

bulb light, etc.).

• The remote ID of the main unit

and remote control unit do not

match.

• Replace with new batteries.

• Operate within the speciﬁed

range.

• Remove the obstacle.

• Insert the batteries in the

proper direction, following the

polarity marks in the battery

compartment.

• Move the set to a place in which

the remote control sensor will

not be exposed to strong light.

• Set the same remote IDs for the

main unit and remote control

unit.

3, 4

–

3, 4

43, 80, 85

GRemote Control UnitH

Troubleshooting

0

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Speciﬁcations

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

No sound is

produced from

center speaker.

• You are playing a monaural

source (TV, AM radio broadcast,

etc.) in the “STANDARD” (Dolby/

DTS Surround) or “HOME THX

CINEMA” mode.

• The mode is set to something

other than “STANDARD” (Dolby/

DTS Surround) or “HOME THX

CINEMA” .

No sound

is produced

from surround

speakers.

• The surround mode is set to

“STEREO”, “DIRECT” or “PURE

DIRECT”.

• Set to a surround playback

mode.

50 ~ 52

No sound is

produced from

surround back

speaker.

• Surround back speaker setting is

set to “None”.

• Surround mode not set to a mode

for 6.1- or 7.1-channel playback.

• Set to something other than

“None”.

• Select a surround playback

mode.

50 ~ 52

No sound is

produced from

subwoofer.

• Subwoofer’s power not turned

on.

• The “Subwoofer” setting at

“Speaker conﬁguration” is set to

“No”.

• The subwoofer is not properly

connected.

• The subwoofer’s volume is

turned off.

• Turn on the subwoofer’s power.

• Set to “Yes”.

• Check the connections.

• Adjust the subwoofer’s volume

to an appropriate level.

–

No test tones are

produced when

main remote

control unit’s TEST

button is pressed.

• Surround mode not set

to “STANDARD” (Dolby/DTS

Surround) or “HOME THX

CINEMA” mode.

• Set to the “STANDARD” (Dolby/

DTS Surround) or “HOME THX

CINEMA” mode.

DTS sound is not

output.

• DVD player’s audio output setting

is not set to bitstream.

• DVD player is not compatible

with DTS sound playback.

• The AVP-A1HDCI’s “Decode

Mode” setting is set to “PCM”.

• Set the DVD player. For details,

refer to the DVD player’s

operating instructions.

• Use a DTS-compatible player.

• Set to the “Auto” or “DTS”

mode.

–

HDMI audio

signals are not

output from

speakers.

• The “Manual Setup” – “HDMI

Setup” – “Audio” setting is set to

“TV”.

• Set to “Amp”. 32

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

No sound is

output from

the monitor

connected

with HDMI

connections.

• The “Manual Setup” – “HDMI

Setup” – “Audio” setting is set to

“Amp”.

• Set to “TV”. 32

GAudioH

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

The on-screen

display does not

appear.

• The format of the GUI and TV

(NTSC or PAL) do not match.

• Match the format of the GUI and

TV.

No picture

appears.

• The connections between the

AVP-A1HDCI and monitor are

faulty.

• The monitor’s input setting is

wrong.

• PURE DIRECT mode is set.

• The player is connected using the

component input connectors, the

monitor is connected using the

video (yellow) or S-Video output

connectors.

• Check the connections.

• Set properly.

• Cancel the PURE DIRECT mode.

• High deﬁnition (1080i/720p) and

progressive (480p/576p) video

signals are not down-converted.

Set the player to interlace

(480i/576i) signals.

12, 13

–

No picture

appears

with HDMI

connections.

• The connections to the HDMI

connectors are faulty.

• HDMI input setting is improper.

• The monitor is not compatible

with copyright protection

(HDCP).

• The HDMI format of the player

and monitor do not match.

• Depending on the monitor you

have connected, the display may

not be correct when you set to

“Auto (Dual)”.

• Check the connections.

• Check the HDMI input setting.

• Connect a monitor that is

compatible with copyright

protection (HDCP).

• Match the HDMI format of the

player and monitor.

• Set to either “Monitor 1” or

“Monitor 2”.

Picture cannot be

recorded.

• Input source does not match

recorder’s video connection

connector (video or S-Video).

• The video conversion function

does not work for the REC

OUT connectors. Match the

input source and recorder

connections.

16, 17

DVDs cannot be

copied on a VCR. –

• This is not a malfunction. Most

movie software includes copy

prevention signals and cannot be

copied.

–

GVideoH

Troubleshooting

0

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Speciﬁcations

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

When a USB

memory device

is connected,

“USB” is not

displayed on the

GUI menu.

• The set cannot recognize a USB

memory device.

• A USB memory device not

conforming to mass storage class

or MTP standards is connected.

• The set port and the connected

port do not match.

• A USB memory device that

the set cannot recognize is

connected.

• USB memory device is connected

via USB hub.

• Check the connection.

• Connect a USB memory device

conforming to mass storage

class or MTP standards.

• Connect to the port set at “USB

Select”.

• This is not a malfunction. DENON

does not guarantee that all USB

memory devices will operate or

receive power.

• Connect the USB memory device

directly to the USB port.

–

Files on a USB

memory device

cannot be played.

• USB memory device is in format

other than FAT16 or FAT32.

• USB memory device is divided

into multiple partitions.

• Files are stored in a non-

compatible format.

• You are attempting to play a ﬁle

that is copyright protected.

• Set the format to FAT16 or

FAT32. For details, refer to the

USB memory device’s operating

instructions.

• When divided into multiple

partitions, only ﬁles stored in the

top partition can be played.

• Record the ﬁles in a compatible

format.

• Files that are copyright protected

cannot be played on this set.

–

The ﬁle names

are not displayed

properly (“...”, etc.).

• Characters that cannot be

displayed are used.

• This is not a malfunction. On

this set, characters that cannot

be displayed are replaced with a

“ . (period)”.

–

GNET/USB / RhapsodyH

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

iPod cannot be

played.

• The input source assigned to

“iPod dock” is not selected.

• Cable is not properly connected.

• Control Dock for iPod’s AC

adapter is not connected to

power outlet.

• Switch to the input source

assigned at “iPod dock”.

• Reconnect.

• Plug the Control Dock for iPod’s

AC adapter into a power outlet.

–

GiPodHSymptom Cause Countermeasure Page

Internet radio

cannot be played.

• Ethernet cable is not properly

connected or network is

disconnected.

• Program is being broadcast in

non-compatible format.

• The computer’s or router’s

ﬁrewall is activated.

• Radio station is not currently

broadcasting.

• IP address is wrong.

• Check the connection status.

• Only Internet radio programs in

MP3 and WMA can be played on

this set.

• Check the computer’s or router’s

ﬁrewall settings.

• Choose a radio station that is

currently broadcasting.

• Check the set’s IP address.

–

Files stored on a

computer cannot

be played.

• Files are stored in a non-

compatible format.

• You are attempting to play a ﬁle

that is copyright protected.

• Set and computer are connected

by USB cable.

• Record in a compatible format.

• Files that are copyright protected

cannot be played on this set.

• The set’s USB port cannot

be used for connection to a

computer.

–

Server is not

found, or it is

not possible to

connect to the

server.

• The computer’s or router’s

ﬁrewall is activated.

• Computer’s power is not turned

on.

• Server is not running.

• Set’s IP address is wrong.

• Check the computer’s or router’s

ﬁrewall settings.

• Turn on the power.

• Launch the server.

• Check the set’s IP address.

–

Cannot connect to

preset or favorite

radio stations.

• Radio station is not currently

broadcasting.

• Radio station is not currently in

service.

• Wait a while before trying again.

• It is not possible to connect to

radio stations that are no longer

in service.

–

For some

radio stations,

“Server Full”

or “Connection

Down” is

displayed and

station cannot be

connected to.

• Station is congested or not

currently broadcasting.

• Wait a while before trying again. –

Sound is broken

during playback.

• Network’s signal transfer speed

is slow or communications lines

or radio station is congested.

• This is not a malfunction. When

playing broadcast data with a

high bit rate, the sound may

be broken, depending on the

communications conditions.

–

Sound quality is

poor or played

sound is noisy.

• File being played has a low bit

rate.

• This is not a malfunction. –

Troubleshooting

0

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Speciﬁcations

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

Cannot login

to Rhapsody.

(“Username

or Password

is incorrect” is

displayed)

• Login information is incorrect.

• Trial period has expired.

• Check if the Username for

Rhapsody has been properly

entered.

•

Re-enter the Password. (Password

is not displayed.)

• Get a full account.

www.rhapsody.com/denon/signup

66, 70

Cannnot play. • When the trial period has ﬁnished,

there is a limit to the playing time

and number of tracks that can be

played.

• Get a full account.

www.rhapsody.com/denon/signup

66, 70

Stops in the

middle of playing.

• When the trial period has ﬁnished,

there is a limit to the playing time

and number of tracks that can be

played.

• Get a full account. 66, 70

Cannot compile

Playlist.

• The AVP-A1HDCI does not

respond to playlist compilation.

• When the playlist is compiled in

“PC Application”, it is registered

to “My Library”. In this way, the

playlist can be played in AVP-

A1HDCI.

b Need full account.

–

Cannot delete

Rhapsody

Channel

registered in “My

Channels”.

• Cannot be done with AVP-

A1HDCI.

• Delete from “PC Application”. –

Cannot delete

Tracks, Playlists,

Channels

registered in “My

Library”.

• Cannot be done with AVP-

A1HDCI.

• Delete from “PC Application”.

b Need full account.

–

GXM Satellite RadioH

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

“CHECK XM

TUNER” is

displayed.

• The XM Mini-Tuner is not

installed or not fully seated in the

XM Mini-Tuner Dock or the XM

Mini-Tuner dock is not connected

to the AVP-A1HDCI.

• Conﬁrm the XM Mini-Tuner is

fully seated in the dock and check

the XM Mini-Tuner dock cable is

connected to the AVP-A1HDCI.

”CHECK

ANTENNA” is

displayed.

• AVP-A1HDCI’s XM connector and

the XM Mini-Tuner and Home

Dock is not properly connected.

• Check that the connections are

correct.

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

Cannot connect

to network.

• The settings of the SSID

and network key (WEP) are

incorrect.

• The reception is poor and the

signals cannot be received.

• There are multiple networks and

the usable channels overlap.

• Match the network settings with

the AVP-A1HDCI’s settings.

• Shorten the distance from the

wireless LAN’s access point,

remove any obstacles and

otherwise improve visibility, then

try reconnecting. Also install

away from microwave ovens

and the access points of other

networks.

• Set the access point’s channel

settings away from the channels

used for other networks.

Alternatively, connect using a

network cable.

35 ~ 38

–

Played sound is

interrupted or

sound cannot be

played.

• There are multiple networks and

the usable channels overlap.

• Set the access point’s channel

settings away from the channels

used for other networks.

Alternatively, connect using a

network cable.

–

GWireless LANH

Troubleshooting

0

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Speciﬁcations

GXM Satellite RadioH

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page

”NO SIGNAL” is

displayed.

• The signal cannot be received. • Reposition your XM Mini-Tuner

and Home Dock antenna.

–

”OFF AIR” is

displayed.

• The selected channel is not

currently broadcasting.

• Select another channel. –

Receiving only

XM channels 0

and 1.

• The XM Mini-Tuner is not

activated.

• Contact XM Radio. –

“

XM - - -

” is

displayed.

• You selected an XM channel that

is blocked or cannot be receive

with your XM subscription

package.

• Consult the latest channel

guide at www.xmradio.com or

www.xmaradio.ca for the current

list of channels. For cases of

a new radio or a radio that has

not received XM’s signal for an

extended period, allow the radio

to receive the XM satellite signal

for at least 5 minutes and then

try to select the channel again.

–

“

UPDATING

” is

displayed.

• The selected channel is not

available. The channel may have

been reassigned to a different

channel number. This message

may occur initially with a new

radio or a radio that has not

received XM’s signal for an

extended period.

• Consult the latest channel

guide at www.xmradio.com or

www.xmaradio.ca for the current

list of channels. For information

on receiving this channel,

visit www.xmradio.com or

www.xmaradio.ca contact XM

Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346

or 1-877-438-9677.

–

Troubleshooting

0

Getting Started Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

n HD Radio section [FM] [AM]

(note: µV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10-15 W)

Receiving Range: 87.5 MHz ~ 107.9 MHz 530 kHz ~ 1710 kHz

Usable Sensitivity: 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) 20 µV

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: MONO 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf)

STEREO 23 µV (38.5 dBf)

S/N (IHF-A): MONO 77 dB

STEREO 72 dB

HD 85 dB 85 dB

Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz): MONO 0.2 %

STEREO 0.3 %

HD 0.01 % 0.01 %

n Wireless LAN

Network type (wireless LAN standards) :

Conforming to IEEE 802.11b

Conforming to IEEE 802.11g

(Conforming to Wi-Fi®)z

Transfer rate: DS-SS: 11 / 5.5 / 2 / 1 Mbps (Automatic switching)

OFDM: 54 / 48 / 36 / 24 / 18 / 12 / 9 / 6 Mbps (Automatic switching)

Security: SSID (Network name)

WEP key (network key) (64/128 bits)

WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES)

WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES)

Used frequency range: 2,412 MHz ~ 2,472 MHz

No. of channels: Conforming to IEEE 802.11b : 11ch (DS-SS) (Of which 1 channel used)

Conforming to IEEE 802.11g : 11ch (OFDM) (Of which 1 channel used)

n General

Power supply: AC 120 V, 60 Hz

Power consumption: 2 A

0.3 W (Standby)

Maximum external dimensions: 434 (W) x 214 (H) x 488 (D) mm (17-3/32” x 8-27/64” x 19-7/32”)

Weight: 27 kg (Approx 59 lbs 8 oz)

n Main remote control unit (RC-1067)

Batteries: LR6/AA Type (two batteries)

Maximum external dimensions: 63 (W) x 238 (H) x 31 (D) mm

Weight: 190 g (Approx 6.7 oz) (including batteries)

n Sub remote control unit (RC-1070)

Batteries: R03/AAA Type (two batteries)

Maximum external dimensions: 49 (W) x 220 (H) x 24.5 (D) mm

Weight: 114 g (Approx 4 oz) (including batteries)

z: Wi-Fi® conformity indicates tested and proven interoperability by the “Wi-Fi Alliance”, a group certifying interoperability

among wireless LAN devices.

b For purposes of improvement, speciﬁcations and design are subject to change without notice.

n Audio section

• Analog

Input sensitivity / Input impedance: RCA Pre output (unbalanced) : 200 mV / 47 kΩ/kohms

XLR Pre output (balanced) : 400 mV / 100 kΩ/kohms

Frequency response: 10 Hz ~ 100 kHz +1, –3 dB (DIRECT mode)

S/N: 102 dB (IHF–A weighted, DIRECT mode)

Distortion: 0.005 % (20 Hz ~ 20 kHz) (DIRECT mode)

Rated output: RCA Pre output (unbalanced) : 1.2 V

XLR Pre output (balanced) : 2.4 V

• Digital

D/A output: Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)

Total harmonic distortion — 0.005 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)

Dynamic range — 110 dB

Digital input: Format — Digital audio interface

• Phono equalizer (PHONO input — REC OUT)

Input sensitivity: 2.5 mV

RIAA deviation: ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

S/N: 74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input)

Rated output: 150 mV

Distortion factor: 0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)

n Video section

• Standard video connectors

Input / output level and impedance: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

Frequency response: 5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”)

• S-Video connectors

Input / output level and impedance: Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

C (color) signal — 0.286 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

Frequency response: 5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”)

• Color component video connector

Input / output level and impedance: Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

PB / CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

PR / CR signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

Frequency response: 5 Hz ~ 100 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”)

n Tuner section [FM] [AM]

(note: µV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10-15 W)

Receiving Range: 87.5 MHz ~ 107.9 MHz 520 kHz ~ 1710 kHz

Usable Sensitivity: 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) 19 µV

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: MONO 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf)

STEREO 23 µV (38.5 dBf)

S/N (IHF-A): MONO 77 dB

STEREO 72 dB

Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz): MONO 0.2 %

STEREO 0.3 %

Speciﬁcations

PRESET CODE



List of preset codes

Denon Amp

DDenon 81001, 82001, 83001, 84001

Denon Tuner

DDenon (Analog) 52863, 52795, 52800, 52805

Denon (XM Radio) 52864, 52812, 52813, 52814

Denon Digital Tuner

DDenon (NET) 62865, 62837, 62838, 62839

Denon (HD Radio) 62840, 62841, 62842, 62843

Denon iPod

DDenon 72815, 72816, 72817, 72818

Cable

AA-Mark 00008, 00144

ABC 00237, 00003, 00008

Accuphase 00003

Acorn 00237

Action 00237

Active 00237

ADB 01230

Aichi Denshi 01512

Americast 00899

Amstrad 01222

Archer 00237

Auna 01230

Austar 00276

BBCC 00276

Bell South 00899

Bestlink 00303

Birmingham Cable

Communications 00276

British Telecom 00003

CCable & Wireless 01068

Century 00008

Coship 01462

DDaehan 00778

Daeryung 01877, 00877, 00477, 00008

Digeo 01187

Director 00476

DX Antenna 01500

EEmerson 00303

Encon 00008

FFosgate 00276

Foxtel 01222

France Telecom 00817

Freebox 01482

Fujitsu 01497

GGalaxi 00008

GE 00237, 00144

Gehua 00476

General Instrument 00476, 00810, 00276, 00003

Gibralter 00003

GNI 01466

GoldStar 00144

HHitachi 00003, 00008

Hongtian Jiangsu 01462

Hwalin 00303

IInsight 00476, 00810

JJerrold 00476, 00810, 00276, 00003

Jiuzhou 01445

KKNC 00008

LLG 00144

MMacab 00817

Madritel 01230

Maspro 01510

Matav 01082

Memorex 00000

Mitsubishi 00003

Motorola 01376, 00476, 00810, 00276,

01187

MS 00303

NNEC 01496

Noos 00817

Nova Vision 00008

Novaplex 00008

NTL 00276, 00003, 01060, 01068

OOak 00303

Ono 01068

Optus 00276, 01060

PPace 01877, 00877, 00237, 00008,

01060, 01068, 01577

Panasonic 00000, 00008, 00144, 01488

Paragon 00000, 00008, 00525

Penney 00000

Philips 01305, 00317, 00817

Pioneer 01877, 00877, 00144, 00533,

01500

Pulsar 00000

PVP Stereo Visual

Matrix 00003

QQuasar 00000

RRadioShack 00303

Regal 00276

Runco 00000

SSagem 00817

Salora 00000

Samsung 00003, 00000, 00144, 00778,

00840, 01060, 01666

Scientiﬁc Atlanta 01877, 00877, 00477, 00237,

00003, 00000, 00008, 01510

Skyworth 01464

Sony 01006, 01460

Sprucer 00144

Starcom 00003

StarHub 00276

Sumitomo 01500, 01504

Supercable 00276

TTaihan 00778

TCL 01445

Telewest 01068

Time Warner cable 01877

TongKook 00840

Torx 00003

Toshiba 00000, 01509

Trans PX 00276, 00303

TS 00003, 00303

UUnited Cable 00276, 00003

US Electronics 00276, 00003, 00008

VVideoway 00000

Visiopass 00817

ZZenith 00000, 00525, 00899

Cable/PVR Combination b1

AAmericast 00899

DDigeo 01187

FFreebox 01482

GGeneral Instrument 00810

JJerrold 00810

MMotorola 01376, 00810, 01187

PPace 01877, 00237

Pioneer 01877, 00877

SScientiﬁc Atlanta 01877, 00877

Sony 01006

Supercable 00276

TTime Warner cable 01877

ZZenith 00899

CD Player

AAcoustic Research 40420

Advantage 40032

Aiwa 40157

Arcam 40157

Audio Research 40157

Audiolab 40157

Audiomeca 40157

Audioton 40157

AVI 40157

Balanced Audio

Technology

40157

Burmester 40420

Bush 40388

CCairn 40157

California Audio Labs

40029, 40303

Cambridge 40157

Cambridge Audio 40157

Cambridge

Soundworks 40157

Carver 40157, 40179

CDC 40420

CEC 40420

Copland 40393

Curtis Mathes 40032

Cyrus 40157

DDenon 40873, 40003, 40766,

[42867]z, 42868

DKK 40000

DMX Electronics 40157

Dual 40003

Dynaco 40157

Dynamic Bass 40179

FFisher 40000, 40179

GGarrard 40393, 40420

Genexxa 40000, 40032, 40037, 40179

Goldmund 40157

Grundig 40157

HHaﬂer 40173

Harman/Kardon 40100, 40157, 40173

Hitachi 40032

IInkel 40157

Integra 40101

JJerrold 40003

JVC 40032, 40072

KKenwood 40681, 40000, 40029, 40157,

40028, 40037, 40036, 40190

KLH 41318

Krell 40157

LLinn 40157

Loewe 40157

Luxman 40393

LXI 40179

MMagnavox 40157

Marantz 40029, 40157

Matsui 40157

MCS 40029

Memorex 40000, 40032, 40179, 40420,

40468

Meridian 40157

Micromega 40157

Miro 40000

Mission 40157

Modulaire 40000, 40032, 40087, 40179,

40420, 40468

MTC 40420

Musical Fidelity 40393

Myryad 40157

NNAD 40000, 40721

Naim 40157

NSM 40157

OOnkyo 40868, 40101

Optimus 40000, 40032, 40037, 40087,

40179, 40393, 40420, 40468

Orion 40393

PPanasonic 40029, 40303, 40388, 40752

Parasound 40420

Penney 40029

Philips 40157

Pioneer 40032, 40101, 40468

Polk Audio 40157

Proceed 40420

Proton 40157

QQED 40157

Quad 40157

Quasar 40029

RRadiola 40157

RadioShack 40000, 40032, 40179, 40420,

40468

RCA 40032, 40053, 40179, 40420,

40468

Realistic 40000, 40032, 40087, 40179,

40420, 40468

Restek 40157

Revox 40157

Roksan 40420

Rotel 40157, 40420

Royal 40420

SSAE 40157

Saisho 40000

Sansui 40000, 40157

Sanyo 40000, 40087, 40179

SAST 40157

Sears 40179

Sharp 40037

Siemens 40157

Silsonic 40036

Simaudio 40157

Sonic Frontiers 40157

Sony 40490, 40000, 40100, 41364,

40185

Sugden 40157

Sylvania 40157

TTAG McLaren 40157

Tandy 40032

Tascam 40393, 40420

PRESET CODE 

Teac 40490, 40393, 40420

Technics 40029, 40303

Techwood 40303

Thomson 40053

Thorens 40157

Thule Audio 40157

Tokai 40420

UUniversum 40157, 40053

VVictor 40072

Wadia 40393

Wards 40000, 40032, 40157, 40053,

40087, 40179

YYamaha 40490, 40868, 40032, 40036

Yorx 40000

CD Recorder

DDenon 40766, 42868

JJVC 40072

RRCA 40053, 40420

SSony 40000, 40100, 41364

TTeac 40420

Thomson 40053

Tape Deck

AAiwa 20029, 20197, 20200, 21315

Akai 20283, 20439

Arcam 20076

Audiolab 20029

CCarver 20029

DDenon 20076, 20371, 21311,

[22471]z

FFisher 20074

GGarrard 20308, 20309, 20375, 20439

Genexxa 20439

GoldStar 20375

Grundig 20029, 20375

HHarman/Kardon 20182, 20029, 21314

IInkel 20070, 20071, 20337

JJVC 20244, 20273, 20274, 20303,

20304, 20310, 21309

KKenwood 20070, 20071, 20092, 20233,

20234, 21364

LLG 20375

Luxman 20308, 20309

MMagnavox 20029

Marantz 20029, 20009

Memorex 20099

Mitsubishi 20283, 20439

Myryad 20029

OOnkyo 20135, 20136, 20282

Optimus 20027, 20220, 20337, 20439

Orion 20308, 20309

PPalladium 20375

Panasonic 20229

Philips 20029, 20229

Phonotrend 20337

Pioneer 20027, 20220, 20099, 20109,

21306, 21312

Polk Audio 20029

RRadiola 20029

RCA 20027, 20220

Revox 20029

SSansui 20029, 20009

Sanyo 20074

Sharp 20231, 20371

Sherwood 20337

Sonic 20375

Sony 20243, 20170, 20291, 20234,

21313

TTaeKwang 20439

Tandberg 20109

Teac 20280, 20283, 20289, 20308,

20309

Technics 20229

Technovox 20229

Thorens 20029

UUniversum 20375, 20439

VVictor 20244, 20273, 20274

Wards 20027, 20029

Wharfedale 20439

YYamaha 20097, 20094

HDTV Tuner b1

AABS 01272

Accurian 01653

Alienware 01272

CCyberPower 01272

DD-Link 01554

Dgtec 01363

EEpson 01563

GGateway 01272

HHewlett Packard 01272, 01267

Howard Computers 01272

HP 01272, 01267

Hush 01272

IiBUYPOWER 01272

LLG 01415

Linksys 01272, 01365

MMedia Center PC 01272

Microsoft 01272, 01805

Mind 01272

Motorola 01363

NNiveus Media 01272

Northgate 01272

PPackard Bell 01272

Panasonic 01120

Pioneer 01010

RRicavision 01272

SSamsung 01190, 01490

Sensory Science 01126

Sharp 01010

SMC 01456

Sony 01272, 01324, 01364

Stack 9 01272

Sylvania 01563

Systemax 01272

TTagar Systems 01272

Toshiba 01272

Touch 01272

VViewsonic 01272, 01329

Vizio 01126

Voodoo 01272

XXbox 01805

ZZT Group 01272

Satellite Receiver

A@sat 01300

@Sky 01334

A-Mark 00345

ABsat 00123, 00713

ADB 00642, 01259, 01367, 01418,

01473, 01491

AGS 00710

Aiwa 01514

Akai 00200

Alba 00455, 00713, 01284, 01659,

01811

Allsat 00200, 01043

Alltech 00713

Allvision 01232, 01334, 01412

AlphaStar 00772

Amitronica 00713

Amstrad

00345, 00713, 00795, 00847,

00863, 00882, 01113, 01175,

01693, 01801

Anglo 00713

Ankaro 00713

AntSat 01083

Apollo 00455

Arcon 01043, 01075

Armstrong 00200

Arnion 01300

Asat 00200

ASCI 01334

ASLF 00713

AssCom 00853

Astacom 00710

Aston 00142

Astra 00713

Astratec 01743

Astro 00173, 00658, 01099, 01100,

01113

Atlantic Telephone 01333

Atsat 01300

AtSky 01334

Audioline 01672

Aurora 00642, 00879, 01333, 01433

Austar 00497, 00642, 00863, 00879,

01176, 01259

Axiel 00710

Axil 01457, 01659

Axis 01111

BB@ytronic 01412

Beko 00455

Bell ExpressVu 00775

Big Sat 01457

Black Diamond 01284

Blaupunkt 00173

Blue Sky 00713

Boca 00713, 01232, 01366

Boston 00710, 01251

Brainwave 00658, 01672

British Sky

Broadcasting 00847, 01175, 01662, 01847

Broco 00713

BskyB 00847, 01175, 01662

BT 00710, 01296

Bubu Sat 00713

Bush 01284, 01645, 01672, 01743,

01811

CCanal 00853

Canal Digital 00853, 01622

Canal Satellite 00853, 01339, 01853

Canal+ 00853

Centrex 01457

CGV 01413, 01567

Chaparral 00216

Cherokee 00123, 00710

Chess 00713, 01085, 01334, 01626

Chili 01718

CityCom 00299, 00394, 00818, 01075,

01176, 01232

Classic 01672

Clatronic 01413

CNS 01367

Comag 01232, 01366, 01412, 01413

Condor 01700

Conia 01695

Contec 00394

Continental Edison 01695

Coship 01457

Crossdigital 01109

Crown 01284

Cryptovision 00455, 00795

Cyfra+ 01076

Cyrus 00200

DD-box 00723, 00873, 01114

Daewoo 00713, 01111, 01296, 01743

Delfa 00863

Deltasat 01075

Dgtec 01542, 01631, 01242

Digenius 00299

Digiality 01685

Digifusion 01645, 01743

DigiLogic 01284

DigiQuest 00863, 01300, 01457, 01473

DigiSat 01232

Digisky 01457

DigitAll World 01227

Digiturk 01076

Digiwave 01631

Dijam 01296

DiPro 01367, 01543

DirecTV

01377, 00392, 00566, 00639,

01639, 01142, 00247, 00749,

01749, 00724, 00819, 01856,

01076, 01108, 00099, 01109,

01414, 01442, 01609, 01392,

01640

Discovery 00710

Dish Network System

01505, 01005, 00775, 01775

Dishpro 01505, 01005, 00775, 01775

Distratel 01283, 01704

DMT 01075

DNT 00200

Dream Multimedia 01237

DSE 01375

DSTV 00642, 00879, 01433

Durabrand 01284

DX Antenna 01530

EEchostar

01505, 01005, 00775, 00455,

00610, 00713, 00853, 00871,

01086, 01200, 01323, 01409,

01418, 01473, 01775

Einhell 00713

Elap 00713, 01567

Elsat 00713

Elta 00200, 01659

Emme Esse 00871

Energy Sistem 01631

Engel 00713, 01251

EP Sat 00455

Esat 00879

Eurieult 00882

Eurocrypt 00455

EuroLine 01251

Europa 00863

Europhon 00299

Eurosky 00262, 00299

Eurostar 00818

Eutelsat 00713

Expressvu 00775, 01775

FFenner 00713

Ferguson 00455, 01291, 01743

Finlandia 00455

Finlux 00455

Flair Mate 00713

FMD 01251, 01413, 01457

Force 01101

Fortec Star 01083

Foxtel 00455, 00497, 00795, 00879,

01162, 01176, 01356

Fracapro Planet 00871

Fracarro 00125, 00871

France Telecom 00871

Freesat 00882

FTE 00863

FTEmaximal 00713, 00863

Fuba 00173, 00262, 00299, 00394,

01214, 01251, 01801

Fugionkyo 00125

Funai 01377

GGalaxis 00853, 00863, 01101, 01111,

01557

Gardiner 00818

Garnet 01075

GbSAT 01214

GE 00392, 00566

Gecco 01412

General Instrument 00869

General Satellite 01176

GF Good Friends 01043

GF Star 01043

Globo 01251, 01334, 01412, 01429,

01626

GOD Digital 00200

GOI 00775, 01775

Gold Box 00853

Gold Vision 01631

Golden Interstar 01283

GoldStar 00394

Goodmans 00455, 01284, 01291

Gradiente 00887

Granada 00455

Grundig 00173, 00345, 00847, 00853,

00879, 01291

HHandan 01622

Hanseatic 01099, 01100

Hauppauge 01672

HB 01214, 01801

HDT 01159

Hills 01232

Hirschmann

00125, 00173, 00299, 00710,

00882, 01085, 01111, 01232,

01412

Hisense 01535

Hitachi 00749, 00819, 00455, 01250,

01284, 01518, 01523, 01525

Homecast 01214, 01680, 01700

Hornet 01300

Houston 00775

HTS 00775, 01775

Hughes Network

Systems 01142, 00749, 01749, 01442

Humax

00863, 01176, 01225, 01406,

01427, 01675, 01743, 01790,

01915

Huth 01075

Hyundai 01075, 01159

IiCan 01367

ID Digital 01176

ILLUSION sat 01557, 01631

iLo 01535

Imperial 01334, 01429, 01672

Indovision 00887

Ingelen 00882

Innova 00099

Interstar 01214

InVideo 00871

ISkyB 00887

Italtel 00871

ITT Nokia 00455, 00723, 00873

JJadeworld 00642

Jaeger 01334

Jerrold 00869

Jiuzhou 01450

JOK 00710

JVC 00775, 01507, 01531, 01775

KK-SAT 00713

Kamm 00713

Kaon 01300

KaTelco 01111

Kathrein

00123, 00173, 00200, 00249,

00394, 00442, 00480, 00504,

00658, 00713, 00818, 01221,

01416, 01561, 01567

Kennex 00125

Kenwood 00853

Klap 00710

Kocmoc TB 01333

Koscom 01043

Kosmos 00442, 01333

Kreiling 00249, 00658

Kreiselmeyer 00173

Kross 01695

LL&S Electronic 01043, 01334

Labgear 01296

LaSAT 00173, 00299

Lava 01631

Legend 01718

Legrand 01718

Lemon 01334

Lenco 00713

Lenoxx 01611

LG 01075, 01414

Lifesat 00299, 00713, 01043

Lodos 01284

Logik 01284

Logix 01075

Lorenzen 00299

Luxor 00345, 00873

MM Electronic 00818

M vision 01557

Magnavox 00724, 00722

Manata 00710, 00713

Manhattan 00455, 00710, 01083

Marantz 00200

Maspro 00173, 00713, 01530

Master’s 00394

Matsui 00173, 00710, 01284, 01743

Maximum 01075, 01334, 01685

McIntosh 00869

MDS 01225

Mediabox 00853

Mediacom 01206

MediaSa 00853

Medion 00299, 00713, 01043, 01075,

01232, 01334, 01412, 01626

Medison 00713

Mega 00200

Memorex 00724

Metronic 00713, 00818, 01283, 01334,

01375, 01704

Metz 00173

MiCO 01811

Micro 00713

Micro Elektronic 00713

Micro Technology 00713

Micromaxx 00299

Microstar 01075

Microtec 00713

Mitsubishi 00749, 00455

Morgan’s 00200, 00713, 01232, 01412

Motorola 00869, 00856, 01473

MTEC 01214

Muller 01695

Multibroadcast 00642, 00879

Multichoice 00642, 00879, 01333, 01433,

01559, 01560

Mx Onda 01659

Myryad 00200

Mysat 00713

MySky 01693, 01848, 01850

NNEC 01519

NEOTION 01334

Netgem 01322

Netsat 00099, 00887

Neuf TV 01322

Neuhaus 00713

Neuling 01232

Neusat 00713

Nevir 01659

Next Level 00869

Nikko 00200, 00713, 00723

Noda Electronic 01704

Nokia 00455, 00723, 00751, 00853,

00873, 01023, 01223, 01723

Nordmende 00455, 01611

OOctalTV 01505

Okano 00442

Omega 00887

Opentel 01232, 01412

Optex 00394, 00713, 01043, 01283,

01611

Optimus 00724

Optus 00879

Orbis 01232, 01334, 01412

Orbitech 01099, 01100

Origo 00497

OSAT 00345

PP/Sat 01232

Pace

00200, 00329, 00455, 00497,

00795, 00847, 00853, 00887,

01175, 01323, 01356, 01423,

01693, 01717, 01848, 01850

Paciﬁc 01284, 01375

Packard Bell 01111

Packsat 00710

Palcom 00299, 01409

Panarex 01159

Panasat 00615, 00879, 01333, 01433

Panasonic

00247, 00701, 00455, 00847,

01304, 01404, 01508, 01526,

01527

Panda 00173, 00455

Pansat 01159

Patriot 00710

Paysat 00724

peeKTon 01457

Philips

01142, 00749, 01749, 00775,

00724, 00819, 01076, 00722,

00099, 00710, 00455, 00818,

00200, 00847, 00853, 00173,

01114, 00133, 01442, 01543,

01672

Phonotrend 00863, 01200

Pilotime 01339

Pino 01334

Pioneer 01142, 00329, 00853, 01308,

01442

Planet 00871

Plasmatic 00442

PMB 00713, 01611

Polytron 00394

Portland 01296

Preisner 00262, 01101, 01113, 01366

Premier 00723, 00853, 00873, 01429

Prima 00795

Primacom 01111

Primestar 00869

Proﬁle 00710

Promax 00455

Proscan 00392, 00566

Proton 01535

QQNS 01367, 01402, 01404

Quadral 00710

Quelle 00299

RRadiola 00200

RadioShack 00566, 00775, 00869

Radix 00394, 00882, 01113, 01317

RCA

00392, 00566, 01142, 00775,

00855, 00143, 01291, 01392,

01442

Rebox 01214

Regal 01251

RFT 00200

Roadstar 00713, 00853

Rollmaster 01413

Rover 00713

Rownsonic 01567

SSAB 01251

Saba 00710, 00820

Sabre 00455

Sagem 00820, 01114, 01253, 01307,

01690

Samsung

01377, 01142, 01276, 01108,

01109, 00853, 00863, 01206,

01442, 01458, 01570, 01609,

01700, 01916

Sat Control 01300

Sat Team 00713

SAT+ 01409

Satec 00713

Satelco 01232

Satplus 01100

PRESET CODE



Satstation 01083

Schaub Lorenz 01214

Schneider 00710, 01206, 01251

Schwaiger

00394, 00504, 00863, 01075,

01083, 01111, 01317, 01334,

01412, 01457

SCS 00299

Sedea Electronique 00125, 01206, 01283, 01626

SEG 01075, 01087, 01251, 01626

Seleco 00871

Septimo 01375

Serd 01412

Serino 00610

Servimat 01611

ServiSat 00713, 01251

Sharp 01517

Siemens 00173, 01334, 01429

Silva 00299

Skantin 00713

SKR 00713

SKY

00856, 00099, 00847, 00887,

01014, 01175, 01662, 01693,

01847, 01848, 01850

SKY Italia 00853, 01693, 01847, 01848

Sky Television 01014

Sky XL 01251, 01412

Sky+ 01175

Skymaster 00713, 01075, 01085, 01200,

01334, 01409, 01567, 01611

Skymax 00200

Skyplus 01232, 01334, 01412

SkySat 00713

Skyvision 01334

SL 00299, 01672

SM Electronic 00713, 01200, 01409

Smart 00713, 00882, 01101, 01113,

01232, 01404, 01413

Sony 00639, 01639, 00455, 00847,

00853, 01524, 01558, 01640

Star 00887

Star Choice 00869

Star Trak 00772, 00869

Starland 00713

Starlite 00200

Stream 01847, 01848

Strong

00125, 00713, 00820, 00853,

00879, 01159, 01284, 01300,

01409, 01626

Sunkai 00123

Sunny 01300

Sunsat 00713

Sunstar 00642

Supernova 00887

SVA 01455

Systec 01334

TTantec 00455

Tarbs 01225

Tatung 00455

TBoston 01659

Teac 01225, 01227, 01251, 01322

Tecatel 01200

TechniSat 00262, 00455, 00863, 01099,

01100, 01195, 01197, 01322

Technomate 01283, 01610

Technosonic 01672

Technotrend 01429

Techwood 01284, 01626

Tele System

Electronic 01251, 01409, 01611, 01801

Teleciel 01043

TeleClub 01367

Telefunken 00710

Teleka 00262, 00442

Telestar 01099, 01100, 01251, 01334,

01610, 01626

Telesystem 01801

Televes 00455, 01214, 01300, 01334

Televisa 00887

Telewire 01232

Tevion 00713, 01409, 01622, 01672

Thomson

00392, 00566, 00455, 00710,

00713, 00820, 00847, 00853,

01046, 01175, 01291, 01534,

01543, 01662

Thorn 00455

Tiny 01672

Tioko 00394

Tivo 01142, 01442

Tokai 00200

Tonna 00455, 00713, 01611

Topﬁeld 01206, 01208, 01545, 01783

Toshiba

00749, 01749, 00790, 00819,

00455, 01285, 01501, 01516,

01530

TPS 00820, 01253, 01307

Triax

00200, 00713, 00853, 01113,

01227, 01251, 01291, 01296,

01626

Trio 01075

TT-micro 01429

Turnsat 00713

Twinner 00713, 01611

UUEC 00879, 01162, 01333, 01356

UltimateTV 01392, 01640

Uniden 00724, 00722

Unisat 00200

United 01251

Universum 00173, 00299, 01087, 01099,

01251

US Digital 01535

USDTV 01535

VVariosat 00173

Ventana 00200

Vestel 01251

VH Sat 00299

Viasat 01682

ViewSat 01232

Visionic 00125, 01283

VisionNet 01557

Visiosat 00142, 00710, 00713, 01413,

01457, 01718

Viva 00856

Vivid 01162

Voom 00869

VTech 00818

Wavelength 01232, 01413

Wewa 00455

Wharfedale 01284

Winbox 01801

Wintel 00299

Wisi 00173, 00299, 00455

Worldsat 00123, 00710, 01214, 01251,

01543

XXcom 00123

XMS 01075

Xsat 00123, 00713, 00847, 01214,

01323

Xtreme 01300

YYakumo 01413

Yamada 01718

Yes 00887

ZZehnder

00394, 00504, 00818, 01075,

01232, 01251, 01334, 01412,

01413

Zenith 00856, 01856

Zeta Technology 00200

Zodiac 01801

Satellite Receiver/

PVR Combination b1, b3

A@sat 01300

Allvision 01412

Amstrad 01175

Atsat 01300

BB@ytronic 01412

British Sky

Broadcasting 01175

BskyB 01175, 01662

Bush 01645

CCanal Satellite 01339

Comag 01412

DDigifusion 01645

DigiQuest 01300

Digiturk 01076

DirecTV

01377, 00392, 00639, 01142,

01076, 00099, 01392, 01442,

01640

Dish Network System

01505, 00775

Dishpro 01505, 00775

DMT 01075

Dream Multimedia 01237

EEchostar 01505, 00775, 00610

Expressvu 00775

FFoxtel 01356

GGbSAT 01214

Gecco 01412

Globo 01412

HHDT 01159

Hirschmann 01412

Homecast 01680

Hughes Network

Systems 01142, 01442

Humax 01176, 01427, 01675

Huth 01075

Hyundai 01075, 01159

KKaon 01300

Kathrein 00249, 00658, 01221, 01561

LLG 01075

MMaximum 01334

Mediacom 01206

Medion 01412

Microstar 01075

Morgan’s 01412

Motorola 00869

MTEC 01214

Multichoice 01333, 01559, 01560

MySky 01693, 01848, 01850

NNEOTION 01334

Nokia 01023

OOpentel 01412

Orbis 01412

PPace 01175, 01356, 01423, 01850

Panasonic 01304

Philips 01142, 00099, 01442

Pilotime 01339

Proscan 00392

RRadix 01317

RCA 01392

Rebox 01214

SSagem 01253, 01307

Samsung 01206, 01442, 01570, 01609

Sat Control 01300

Schneider 01206

Schwaiger 01075, 01412

Sedea Electronique 01206

Serd 01412

SKY 01175, 01693, 01848, 01850

SKY Italia 01848

Sky XL 01412

Skymaster 01075

Skyplus 01412

Sony 00639, 01640

Star Choice 00869

Strong 01300

Sunny 01300

TTechniSat 01195, 01197

Thomson 01175, 01534, 01662

Topﬁeld 01206, 01545, 01783

TPS 01253, 01307

XXtreme 01300

ZZehnder 01075, 01412

HHughes Network

Systems 20739

PPhilips 20739

SSamsung 20739

Television

1888 10264

AA-Mark 10047, 10054, 10009

A.R. Systems 10037, 10352, 10374, 10455,

10556

Accent 10009, 10037

Accuscan 10047

Accuscreen 10001

Acoustic Research 11269

Action 10030, 10650

Acura 10009

Addison 10092, 10108, 10653

ADL 11217

Admiral

10047, 10054, 10017, 10051,

10093, 10463, 10180, 10163,

10264, 10418

Advent 10761, 10783, 10815, 10817,

10842, 10876, 11933

Adventuri 10000

Adyson 10217

AEG 11163, 11556

Agashi 10217, 10264

Agna 10150

Aiko

10092, 10009, 10035, 10037,

10217, 10264, 10361, 10371,

10433

Aim 10706, 10037, 10455, 10805

Aiwa 10264, 10701, 11904, 11911

Akai

10000, 10060, 10812, 10702,

10178, 10030, 10145, 10602,

10606, 10631, 10648, 10672,

10714, 10715, 11207, 11537,

11675, 11676, 11903, 10556,

10548, 10480, 10433, 10371,

10361, 10264, 10218, 10217,

10208, 10163, 10037, 10035,

10009

PRESET CODE 

Akashi 10009, 10860

Akiba 10037, 10218, 10455

Akira 10418

Akito 10037

Akura

10171, 10009, 10037, 10163,

10218, 10264, 10668, 10714,

11037, 11498, 11556, 11982

Alaron 10170

Alba

10009, 10036, 10037, 10073,

10163, 10218, 10352, 10370,

10371, 10418, 10443, 10487,

10668, 10714, 11037

Albatron 10700, 10843

Alﬁde 10672

All-Tel 10865, 11269

Alleron 10030, 10170

Allorgan 10217

Allstar 10037

Ambassador 10150

America Action 10180

American High 10000, 10060

Amplivision 10217, 10370

Amstrad

10000, 10171, 10009, 10011,

10037, 10163, 10218, 10264,

10362, 10371, 10433, 10648,

11037, 11982

Amtron 10000, 10180

Anam 10250, 10180, 10009, 10037,

10700, 10861

Anam National 10250, 10037, 10650

Andersson 11149, 11163

Anglo 10009, 10264

Anhua 10051

Anitech 10009, 10037, 10264

Ansonic 10009, 10037, 10163, 10370,

10374, 10668

AOC

10451, 10093, 10180, 10060,

10178, 10030, 10092, 10009,

10108

Aolinpike 10264

Apex Digital 10156, 10748, 10879, 10765,

10767, 11217, 11943

AR 10352, 10556

Arc En Ciel 10109

Arcam 10217

Ardem 10037, 10714

Aristocrat 10163

Aristona 10037, 10556

ART 11037

Arthur Martin 10163

ASA 10070

Asberg 10037

Asora 10009

Astra 10037

Asuka 10217, 10218, 10264

ATD 10698

Atlantic 10001, 10037

Atori 10009

Auchan 10163

Audinac 10180

Audiosonic

10009, 10037, 10109, 10217,

10218, 10264, 10370, 10374,

10486, 10714, 10715, 10820

Audioton 10217, 10264, 10370, 10486

Audiovox

10451, 10180, 10092, 10623,

10802, 10875, 11937, 11951,

11952

Audioworld 10698

Aumark 10060

Autovox 10217

Aventura 10171

AVP 10000

Awa

10451, 10009, 10011, 10036,

10108, 10217, 10264, 10374,

10606

Axion 11937, 11958

Axxent 10009

BBaier 10876

Baihe 10009, 10264

Baile 10001, 10009, 10374, 10661

Baird 10037, 10073, 10109, 10208,

10217, 10343, 11196

Bang & Olufsen 10565

Baohuashi 10264

Baosheng 10009, 10817

Barco 10163, 10556

Basic Line

10009, 10037, 10163, 10217,

10218, 10374, 10455, 10556,

10668, 11037, 11163

Bastide 10217

Bauer 10805

Baur 10037, 10195, 10361, 10455,

10512

Baysonic 10180

Bazin 10217

Beaumark 10017, 10178, 10030

Beijing

10812, 10001, 10009, 10208,

10226, 10264, 10374, 10661,

10817, 10821

Beko

10037, 10195, 10370, 10418,

10486, 10606, 10714, 10715,

10808, 11037

Belcor 10030

Bell & Howell 10054, 10017, 10154, 10093

Belson 10698, 11191

Belstar 11037

BenQ 11032, 11756

Beon 10037, 10163, 10218, 10418

Berthen 10668

Best 10370

Bestar 10037, 10370, 10374

Bestar-Daewoo 10374

Binatone 10217

Black Diamond 10614, 10820, 10821, 11037,

11163, 11909

Blackway 10218

Blaupunkt 10036, 10170, 10195, 10200,

10327, 10455

Blue Sky

10037, 10218, 10455, 10487,

10499, 10556, 10668, 10714,

10715, 11037, 11191, 11363

Boots 10009, 10217

BPL 10037, 10208

Bradford 10180

Brandt 10109, 10287, 10335, 10560,

10625, 10714

Brinkmann 10037, 10418, 10486, 10668

Brionvega 10037, 10362

Britannia 10217

Brockwood 10178, 10030

Broksonic 10236, 10463, 10180, 11911,

11938

Brother 10264

BSR 10163

BTC 10218

Bush

11900, 11556, 11037, 10778,

10714, 10698, 10668, 10661,

10614, 10556, 10487, 10374,

10371, 10361, 10335, 10264,

10218, 10217, 10208, 10163,

10037, 10036, 10009

CCaihong 10009, 10817

Cailing 10748

Candle 10030

Canton 10218

Capehart 10017, 10178, 10030, 10092,

10036

Capetronic 10030

Capsonic 10264

Carad 10610, 10668, 11037

Carena 10037, 10455

Carnivale 10030

Carrefour 10036, 10037, 10070

Carver 10054, 10170

Cascade 10009, 10037

Casio 10037

Cathay 10037, 10218

CCE 10037, 10217

Celebrity 10000

Celera 10765

Celestial 10767, 10819, 10820, 10821

Centrex 10780

Centrum 11037

Centurion 10037

CGE 10074, 10163, 10370, 10418

Changcheng 10051, 10001, 10009, 10264,

10374, 10661, 10817

Changfei 10009, 10374, 10817

Changfeng 10264, 10817

Changhai 10009, 10817

Changhong

10156, 10765, 10009, 10264,

10508, 10767, 10783, 10817,

10819, 10820, 10821, 11008,

11156

Chengdu 10009, 10817

Ching Tai 10092, 10009

Chun Yun 10000, 10180, 10092, 10009,

10700, 10843

Chunfeng 10009, 10264

Chung Hsin 10180, 10053, 10036, 10108

Chunsun 10009, 10817

Cimline 10009, 10218

Cinema 10672

Cineral 10451, 10092

Cinex 10648, 11556

Citek 10047

Citizen

10054, 10000, 10451, 10463,

10180, 10060, 10030, 10171,

10092, 10001, 10035

City 10009

Clarion 10180

Clarivox 10037, 10070, 10418

Classic 10030, 10092, 10499

Clatronic 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,

10264, 10370, 10371, 10714

Clayton 11037

CMS Hightec 10217

Colortyme 10047, 10054, 10017, 10060,

10178, 10030

Commercial Solutions

11447, 10047

Concorde 10009

Condor 10009, 10037, 10264, 10370,

10418

Conia 10820, 10821, 11498

Conic 10178

Conrac 10808

Conrowa 10156, 10145, 10009, 10264,

10698, 11156, 11170

Contec 10180, 10009, 10036, 10037

Continental Edison 10109, 10287, 10487

Cosmel 10009, 10037

Craig 10180, 10171

Crosley 10054, 10000, 10180, 10030,

10171, 10074, 10163, 10370

Crown

10093, 10180, 10053, 10009,

10037, 10208, 10370, 10418,

10486, 10487, 10606, 10672,

10712, 10714, 10715, 11037

Crown Mustang 10672

CS Electronics 10218

CTX 11756

Curtis Mathes

10047, 10054, 10154, 10000,

10051, 10451, 10093, 10180,

10060, 10702, 10178, 10030,

10145, 10166, 10037, 10035,

11147, 11347

CXC 10180

Cybertron 10218

Cytronix 11298

DD-Vision 10037, 10556, 11982

Daewoo

10154, 10451, 10180, 10178,

10030, 10092, 11661, 10634,

10661, 10672, 10700, 10860,

10865, 10876, 10880, 11755,

11756, 11909, 10623, 10556,

10499, 10374, 10264, 10218,

10217, 10170, 10109, 10108,

10037, 10036, 10009

Dainichi 10218

Dansai 10009, 10035, 10036, 10037,

10208, 10217

Dantax 10370, 10486, 10714, 10715

Datsura 10208

Dawa 10009, 10037

Daytek 10672, 11207

Dayton 10092, 10009, 11207

Daytron 10180, 10178, 10030, 10092,

10009, 10036, 10037, 10374

Dayu 10374, 10661

De Graaf 10163, 10208, 10548

Decca 10037, 10217

Degraff 10163, 10208

Deitron 10374

Dell 11080, 11178

Denko 10264

Denon 10145, 10511

Denver 10037, 10587

Desmet 10009, 10037

Diamant 10037

Diamond 10706, 10009, 10371, 10672,

10698, 10820, 10860

Digatron 10037

Digiline 10037, 10668

Digital Life 10872

Digitex 10820

Digitor 10037

Digix Media 10880

Dixi 10009, 10037, 10217

DL 10587, 10780, 10872

Domeos 10668

Domland 10394

Dongda 10009

Donghai 10009

Dream Vision 11164, 11704

DSE 10698, 10820, 11556

DTS 10009

Dual 10037, 10217, 10343, 10352,

10394, 11037, 11137

Dual Tec 10217

Dumont 10017, 10180, 10178, 10070,

10217

Durabrand 10463, 10180, 10178, 10171,

11034, 11463

Dux 10037

Dwin 10093

Dynatech 10217

Dynatron 10037

PRESET CODE



EEasy Living 11248

Eaton 10060

Ecco 10773

ECE 10037

Edison-Minerva 10487

Elbe 10037, 10217, 10218, 10362,

10610

Elcit 10163

Electroband 10000

Electrograph 11755

Electrohome 10154, 10000, 10463, 10150,

10178, 10030, 10073

Elekta 10009, 10264

Elfunk 11037, 11208

ELG 10037

Elin 10009, 10037, 10361, 10548

Elite 10037, 10218

Elta 10009, 10264

Emerald 10178

Emerson

10047, 10017, 10154, 10451,

10236, 10463, 10180, 10150,

10178, 10171, 11944, 11911,

11909, 10714, 10668, 10623,

10486, 10036, 10371, 10370,

10361, 10037, 10195, 10170,

10070, 10073

Envision 10030, 10813

Enzer 10860

Erae 11371

Erres 10037

ESA 10812, 10171, 11944

ESC 10037, 10217

Ether 10030, 10009

Etron 10001, 10009, 10163, 10820

Eurofeel 10217, 10264

Euroman 10037, 10217, 10264, 10370

Europa 10037

Europhon 10037, 10109, 10217

Evesham Technology 11248

Evolution 11756

Expert 10163

Exquisit 10037

FFeilang 10009

Feilu 10009, 10817

Feiyan 10264

Feiyue 10009, 10817

Fenner 10009, 10374

Fer0 10335

Ferguson

10053, 10037, 10073, 10109,

10195, 10287, 10335, 10343,

10443, 10548, 10560, 10625,

11037

Fidelity 10171, 10037, 10163, 10217,

10264, 10361, 10371, 10512

Filsai 10217

Finlandia 10163, 10208, 10346, 10361,

10548

Finlux

10037, 10070, 10163, 10217,

10346, 10480, 10556, 10631,

10714, 10715, 10808, 11556

Firstar 10236, 10009

Firstline

10009, 10037, 10208, 10217,

10361, 10374, 10556, 10668,

10714, 10808, 11037, 11191,

11363, 11371

Fisher

10047, 10054, 10154, 10000,

10036, 10208, 10217, 10361,

10370

Flint 10037, 10218, 10264, 10455,

10610

Force 11149

Formenti 10037, 10163

Fortress 10093

Fraba 10037, 10370

Friac 10009, 10037, 10370, 10499,

10610

Frontech 10009, 10163, 10217, 10264

Fujimaro 10865, 11498

Fujitsu 10009, 10217, 10352, 10683,

10809, 10853

Fujitsu General 10009, 10217, 10683

Fujitsu Siemens 10808, 10809, 11163, 11298

Funai 10000, 10180, 10171, 10264,

10668, 11271, 11904

Furi 10145, 10264, 10817

Furichi 10860

Futronic 10264, 10860

Futuretech 10180

GGalaxi 10037

Galaxis 10037, 10370

Ganxin 10817

Gateway 11755, 11756

GBC 10009, 10163, 10218, 10374

11447, 10047, 11454, 10000,

10051, 10451, 10093, 10180,

10060, 10178, 10030, 10092,

11922, 11917, 11347, 11147,

10625, 10560, 10335, 10035

GEC 10037, 10163, 10217, 10361

Geloso 10009, 10163, 10374

Gemini 10047

General 10109, 10287

General Technic 10009

Genesis 10009, 10037

Genexxa 10009, 10037, 10163, 10218

Gericom 10808, 10865, 10880, 11217,

11298

Gevalt 11371

Giant 10009, 10217

Gibralter 10017, 10000, 10030

Go Video 10060, 10886

Go Vision 11937

Goldfunk 10668

GoldStar

10047, 10054, 10154, 10178,

10030, 10715, 10714, 10606,

10455, 10361, 10217, 10163,

10109, 10073, 10037, 10036,

10009, 10001

Gooding 10487

Goodmans

10000, 11909, 11900, 11163,

11037, 10880, 10808, 10714,

10668, 10661, 10634, 10625,

10587, 10560, 10556, 10499,

10487, 10480, 10374, 10371,

10343, 10335, 10264, 10218,

10217, 10037, 10036, 10035,

10011, 10009

Gorenje 10370

GPM 10218

Gradiente 10053, 10037, 10170

Graetz 10163, 10361, 10371, 10487,

10714, 11163

Gran Prix 10648

Granada

10036, 10037, 10108, 10163,

10208, 10217, 10226, 10343,

10548, 10560

Grandin

10009, 10037, 10163, 10218,

10374, 10455, 10610, 10668,

10714, 10715, 10865, 10880,

11037, 11191

Gronic 10217

Grundig

10706, 10009, 10036, 10037,

10070, 10163, 10195, 10443,

10487, 10556, 10587, 10672,

10683, 11371

Grundy 10180, 10195

Grunkel 11163

Grunpy 10180

HH & B 10808

Haaz 10706

Haier 11034, 10037, 10508, 10587,

10698, 11017

Haihong 10009

Haiyan 10264, 10817

Halifax 10217, 10264

Hallmark 10236, 10180, 10178

Hampton 10217

Hanimex 10218

Hankook 10180, 10178, 10030

Hanseatic

10009, 10037, 10217, 10361,

10370, 10394, 10499, 10556,

10634, 10661, 10714, 10808

Hantarex 10009, 10037, 10865

Hantor 10037

Harley Davidson 10000, 10180, 10060, 10178,

10030, 11904

Harman/Kardon 10054

Harsper 10865

Harvard 10180

Harwa 10773, 11196, 11269

Harwood 10009, 10037, 10487

Hauppauge 10037

Havermy 10093

HCM 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,

10264, 10418

Heathkit 10017

Helios 10865

Hello Kitty 10451

Hema 10009, 10217

Hewlett Packard 11494, 11502

Hiﬁvox 10109

Highline 10037, 10264

Hikona 10218

Hikone 10218

Hinari

10009, 10036, 10037, 10163,

10208, 10218, 10264, 10352,

10443

Hisawa 10218, 10455, 10610, 10714

Hisense

10156, 10748, 10145, 10009,

10208, 10508, 10556, 10780,

10821, 10860, 11022, 11156,

11170, 11208, 11363

Hitachi

10047, 10054, 10017, 10000,

11256, 10156, 10051, 10150,

10178, 10030, 11145, 10145,

10092, 10744, 10877, 10634,

11037, 11137, 11149, 11156,

11170, 11225, 11576, 11904,

11960, 10578, 10548, 10508,

10499, 10481, 10480, 10343,

10217, 10163, 10109, 10108,

10037, 10036, 10035, 10009

Hitachi Fujian 10150, 10108, 10860

Hitec 10698

Hitsu 10009, 10218, 10455, 10610

Hoeher 10714, 10865, 11163, 11556

Home Electronics 10606

Hongmei 10093, 10009, 10264, 10817

Hongyan 10264, 10817

Hornyphon 10037

Hoshai 10218, 10455

HP 11494, 11502

Hua Tun 10009

Huafa 10145, 10009

Huanghaimei 10009

Huanghe 10009, 10817

Huanglong 10009

Huangshan 10009, 10264, 10817

Huanyu 10217, 10264, 10374, 10817

Huaqiang 10264

Huari 10145, 10264

Hugoson 11217

Huodateji 10051

Hygashi 10217

Hyper 10009, 10217

Hypersonic 10361

Hypson

10037, 10217, 10264, 10455,

10486, 10556, 10668, 10714,

10715, 11037

Hyundai 10849, 10860, 10865, 10876,

11556

IIberia 10037

ICE 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264,

10371

ICeS 10218

Iiyama 10877, 11217

Ima 10236, 10180, 10178

Imperial 10037, 10074, 10370, 10418

Imperial Crown 10001, 10009, 10264, 10374,

10661

Indiana 10037

Inﬁnity 10054

InFocus 11164

Ingelen 10163, 10487, 10610, 10714

Ingersol 10009

Inno Hit 10009, 10217, 10218, 11163

Innova 10037

Innowert 10865, 11298

Inotech 10773, 10820

Insignia 10171, 11517

Inteq 10017, 10145

Interbuy 10009, 10037, 10264

Interfunk 10037, 10109, 10163, 10200,

10327, 10361, 10512

Internal 10037, 11909

Intervision

10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,

10264, 10394, 10455, 10486,

10487

Irradio 10009, 10037, 10218, 10371

Isukai 10037, 10218, 10455

ITC 10217

ITS 10037, 10218, 10264, 10371

ITT 10163, 10208, 10346, 10361,

10480, 10548, 10610

ITT Nokia

10070, 10163, 10195, 10208,

10346, 10361, 10480, 10548,

10606, 10610

ITV 10037, 10264, 10374

IX 10877

JJBL 10054

JCB 10000

JDV 11982

Jean 10156, 10051, 10236, 10092,

10009, 10036

JEC 10035

Jensen 10761, 10815, 10817, 11933

Jiahua 10051

JiaLiCai 10009, 10264

JIL 10030

Jinfeng 10051, 10208, 10226, 10817

Jinque 10009, 10264, 10817

Jinta 10009, 10264

Jinxing

10054, 10156, 10145, 10009,

10037, 10264, 10556, 10698,

10817, 10821, 11011

JMB 10443, 10499, 10556, 10634

JNC 10876

Jocel 10712

Johnson 10455

Jubilee 10556

Juhua 10264, 10817

Jutan 10030

PRESET CODE 

JVC

10054, 10093, 10463, 10053,

10030, 10070, 10036, 10218,

10371, 10418, 10508, 10606,

10650, 10653, 10683, 10731,

11253, 11923

KKaige 10009, 10264, 10817

Kaisui 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,

10455

Kambrook 10217

Kamp 10017, 10180, 10217

Kangli 10001, 10009, 10264, 10374,

10661, 10817

Kangyi 10009, 10264

Kapsch 10163, 10361

Karcher 10264, 10370, 10606, 10610,

10714, 10778, 11556

Kathrein 10556

Kawa 10371

Kawasho 10030

KB Aristocrat 10163

KDS 11498

KEC 10180, 10060

Kendo 10037, 10362, 10370, 10610,

10648, 11037

Kennedy 10163

Kennex 10668, 11037

Kenwood 10180, 10030

Khind 10706

KIC 10217

Kiota 10001, 10371, 10455

Kioto 10706, 10556

Kiton 10037, 10668

KLH 10156, 10180, 10765, 10767,

11962

KLL 10037

Kloss 10030

Kneissel 10037, 10362, 10370, 10374,

10499, 10556, 10610

Kolin 10180, 10150, 10053, 10036,

10108, 11331

Kolster 10037, 10218

Kongque 10009, 10264, 10817

Konichi 10009

Konig 10037

Konka

10180, 10037, 10218, 10371,

10418, 10587, 10641, 10714,

10817, 11084

Kontakt 10487

Korpel 10037

Korting 10370

Kosmos 10037

Koyoda 10009

Kreisen 10876

KTV 10463, 10180, 10030, 10217

Kuaile 10009, 10264

Kulun 10009

Kunlun 10051, 10208, 10226, 10264,

10374, 10661, 10817

Kyoshu 10418

Kyoto 10163, 10217

LL&S Electronic 10714, 10808, 10865

Lark 10154

LaSAT 10486

Lavis 11037

Leader 10009

Lecson 10037

Legend 10009

Lenco 10037, 10374, 10587

Lenoir 10009

Lexsor 11196

Leyco 10037, 10264

10054, 11265, 10060, 10178,

10030, 11758, 11637, 11191,

11178, 10856, 10715, 10714,

10700, 10698, 10556, 10370,

10361, 10217, 10163, 10109,

10108, 10037, 10009, 10001

Liesenk & Tter 10037

Liesenkotter 10037, 10327

Lifetec

10009, 10037, 10218, 10374,

10668, 10683, 10714, 11037,

11137

Lihua 10817

Lloyd’s 10236, 10180, 10030, 10001,

10009, 11904

Local India TV 10009, 10208, 10602

Local Malaysia TV 10698

Lodos 11037

Loewe 10037, 10370, 10512, 10633,

10790

Logik

10236, 10180, 10060, 10001,

10009, 10011, 10371, 10698,

10773, 10880, 11037, 11217

Logix 10668

Longjiang 10264, 10817

Luker 11982

Luma 10009, 10163, 10362, 10374,

11037

Lumatron 10037, 10073, 10163, 10217,

10264, 10361, 10556

Lux May 10009, 10037

Luxor

10163, 10208, 10217, 10346,

10361, 10480, 10548, 10631,

11037, 11163

LXI

10047, 10054, 10017, 10154,

10000, 10156, 10051, 10093,

10060, 10053, 10178, 10030,

10171, 10166, 10037, 10036,

10035, 10001, 10208

MM Electronic

10009, 10037, 10109, 10163,

10195, 10217, 10287, 10343,

10346, 10374, 10480, 10512,

10634, 10661, 10714

Madison 10037

MAG 11498

Magnadyne 10054, 10163

Magnafon 10073

Magnasonic 10054, 10000, 10156, 10093,

10030, 10092, 10109

Magnavox

10047, 11454, 10054, 10154,

10000, 10250, 10051, 10180,

10060, 10030, 10171, 10092,

10706, 11944, 11904, 11755,

11254, 10802, 10780, 10011,

10035, 10037, 10036

Magnum 10037, 10648, 10714, 10715

Majestic 10017

Mandor 10264

Manesth 10035, 10037, 10217, 10264

Manhattan 10037, 10668, 10778, 10876,

11037, 11267

Marantz 11454, 10054, 10030, 10037,

10556, 10704, 10855

Mark 10009, 10037, 10217, 10374,

10714, 10715

Master’s 10499

Mastro 10053, 10706, 10698, 10780

Masuda 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,

10264, 10371

Matsui

11037, 10744, 10714, 10556,

10487, 10455, 10443, 10433,

10371, 10352, 10335, 10217,

10208, 10195, 10163, 10037,

10036, 10035, 10011, 10009

Matsushita 10250, 10051, 10650

Maxdorf 10773

Maxent 11755, 11756

Maxim 11556, 11982

MCE 10009

Meck 10698

Mediator 10037, 10556

Medion

10037, 10512, 10556, 10668,

10698, 10714, 10808, 10880,

11037, 11137, 11248, 11900

Megapower 10700

Megas 10610

Megatron 10047, 10178, 10145, 10009

MEI 11037

Meile 10264, 10817

Memorex

10154, 10250, 10463, 10180,

10150, 10060, 10178, 10030,

10009, 10035, 10037, 10195,

10877, 11037, 11911

Memphis 10009

Mercury 10060, 10001, 10009, 10037

Mermaid 10037

Metronic 10625

Metz

10037, 10195, 10367, 10388,

10447, 10587, 10668, 10746,

11163

MGA 10150, 10178, 10030, 10218,

10374

MGN Technology 10178

Micro Genius 10150

Micromaxx 10037, 10668, 10714, 10808,

11037

Microstar 10808

MicroTEK 10820, 10860

Midland 10047, 10017, 10051

Mikomi 11037, 11149

Minato 10037, 10556

Minerva 10070, 10108, 10195, 10487

Minoka 10037

Mirror 11900

Mitsubishi

10154, 10250, 10093, 10236,

10180, 11250, 10150, 10178,

10030, 11917, 11037, 10836,

10817, 10556, 10512, 10195,

10108, 10037, 10036, 10011

Mivar 10217

Monaco 10009

Monivision 10700, 10843

Morgan’s 10037

Motorola 10054, 10051, 10093, 10150

MTC 10180, 10060, 10030, 10092,

10011, 10370, 10512

MTlogic 10714

Mudan 10051, 10009, 10208, 10226,

10264, 10817

Multitec 10037, 10486, 10668, 11037,

11556

Multitech 10180, 10009, 10037, 10217,

10264, 10370, 10486

Murphy 10163

Musikland 10218

Mx Onda 11498

Myryad 10556

NNAD 10156, 10178, 10166, 10037,

10361, 10866, 11156

Naiko 10037, 10606, 11982

Nakimura 10037, 10374

Nanbao 10009, 10264

Nansheng 10264, 10817

Narita 11982

NAT 10226

National 10051, 10208, 10226, 10508

NEC

10047, 10154, 10156, 10051,

10053, 10178, 10030, 11704,

11270, 11170, 10817, 10704,

10661, 10653, 10508, 10499,

10455, 10374, 10264, 10217,

10170, 10036, 10011, 10009

Neckermann 10037, 10200, 10327, 10370,

10418, 10556

NEI 10037, 10163, 10371

Neovia 10865, 10876, 11371

Netsat 10037

NetTV 11755

Neufunk 10009, 10037, 10218, 10556,

10610, 10714

New Tech 10009, 10037, 10217, 10343,

10556

New World 10218

Newave 10093, 10178, 10092, 10009

Nikkai 10009, 10035, 10036, 10037,

10163, 10217, 10218, 10264

Nikkei 10714

Nikko 10178, 10030, 10092

Nikkodo 10178, 10030, 10092

Nishi 10030

Nobliko 10070

Nogamatic 10109

Nokia

10163, 10208, 10346, 10361,

10374, 10480, 10548, 10606,

10610, 10631

Norcent 10748, 10824

Nordic 10217

Nordmende 10037, 10109, 10195, 10287,

10343, 10560, 10714

Normerel 10037

Novatronic 10037, 10374

NTC 10092

Nu-Tec 10455, 10698, 10820

Nyon 10000

OOceanic 10163, 10208, 10361, 10548

Odeon 10264

Okano 10009, 10037, 10264, 10370

Olevia 11144, 11240, 11331, 11610

Omega 10264

Omni 10748, 10698, 10780, 10872

Onida 10053, 11253

Onimax 10714

Onwa 10180, 10218, 10371, 10433,

10602

Opera 10037

Optimus

10154, 10250, 10093, 10180,

10150, 10178, 10030, 10166,

10650

Optoma 10887

Optonica 10093

Orbit 10037

Orcom 11504

Orion

10017, 10236, 10463, 10180,

10178, 11463, 10011, 10037,

10264, 10443, 10556, 10714,

10880, 11196, 11911

Orline 10037, 10218

Ormond 10668, 11037

Osaki 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264,

10374, 10556

Osio 10037

Oso 10218

Osume 10036, 10037, 10218

Otic 11498

Otto Versand

10093, 10036, 10037, 10109,

10195, 10217, 10226, 10343,

10361, 10512, 10556

PPace 10092

Paciﬁc 10037, 10443, 10556, 10714,

11037, 11137

Palladium

10037, 10163, 10200, 10217,

10327, 10370, 10418, 10556,

10714, 11137

Palsonic

10001, 10037, 10217, 10218,

10264, 10418, 10698, 10773,

10778, 11196, 11269, 11904

Panama 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264

Panashiba 10001

PRESET CODE



Panasonic

10054, 10000, 10156, 10250,

10051, 10236, 10030, 11947,

11946, 11941, 11480, 11310,

11291, 11271, 10853, 10650,

10548, 10508, 10367, 10361,

10226, 10208, 10163, 10108,

10037, 10035

Panavision 10037

Panda

10051, 10706, 10009, 10208,

10226, 10264, 10508, 10698,

10780, 10817, 10821

Pathe Cinema 10163

Pathe Marconi 10109

Pausa 10009

Paxonic 10060, 10030

PCE 10156, 10060

Penney

10047, 10000, 10156, 10250,

10051, 10060, 10178, 10030,

10035, 10036, 10037, 10070,

10108, 11347

Perdio 10037, 10163

Perfekt 10037

Petters 11523

Philco

10054, 10451, 10463, 10180,

10178, 10030, 10145, 11661,

10037, 10074, 10163, 10370,

10418

Philharmonic 10217

Philips

11454, 10054, 10017, 10000,

10051, 10178, 10030, 10171,

10092, 11961, 11756, 11254,

10690, 10556, 10512, 10374,

10361, 10343, 10200, 10108,

10037, 10009

Phocus 10714

Phoenix 10037, 10163, 10370, 10486

Phonola 10037, 10556

Pilot 10051, 10060, 10178, 10030,

10706, 10011

Pioneer

10166, 10011, 10037, 10109,

10163, 10170, 10287, 10361,

10370, 10486, 10512, 10679,

10760, 10866, 11260

Pionier 10370, 10486, 11556

Plantron 10009, 10037, 10264

Playsonic 10037, 10217, 10714, 10715

Polaroid 10765, 10865, 11276, 11316,

11341, 11498, 11523

Poppy 10009

Portland 10451, 10092, 10374

Powerpoint 10037, 10487, 10698

Prandoni-Prince 10361

Precision 10236, 10180, 10217

Premier 10009, 10264

President 10860

Prima 10761, 10009, 10264, 10783,

10815, 10817, 11269, 11933

Princeton 10700

Prinston 11037

Prinz 10361

Prism 10250, 10051

Profex 10009, 10163, 10361

Proﬁ 10009

Proﬁlo 11556

Proﬁtronic 10037

Proline 10037, 10073, 10625, 10634,

11037

Proscan 11447, 10047, 11347, 11922

Prosco 10156

Prosonic 10037, 10217, 10370, 10371,

10374, 10668, 10714

Protec 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264

Protech 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264,

10418, 10486, 10668, 11037

Proton 10178, 10030, 10001, 10009

Proview 11498

ProVision 10037, 10556, 10714, 11037

Pulsar 10017, 10092

Pulser 10178, 10092

Pvision 10876, 11191

Pye 10037, 10374, 10556

Pymi 10009

QQingdao 10051, 10208, 10226, 10264,

10817

Quadral 10051, 10218

Quartz 10150, 10178

Quasar 10250, 10051, 10009, 10035,

10650, 10865

Quelle

10011, 10037, 10070, 10074,

10109, 10195, 10200, 10327,

10361, 10512, 10668, 11037

Questa 10036

Questar 10036

RR-Line 10037

Rabbit 10047

Radialva 10163, 10218

Radiola 10037, 10217, 10556

Radiomarelli 10037

RadioShack 10047, 10154, 10180, 10150,

10178, 10030, 10037, 11904

Radiotone 10009, 10037, 10264, 10370,

10418, 10648, 10668, 11037

Rank 10070

Rank Arena 10036, 10602

RBM 10070

RCA

11447, 10047, 11454, 10054,

10000, 10051, 10093, 10178,

10030, 10092, 11958, 11953,

11948, 11922, 11917, 11547,

11347, 11247, 11147, 11047,

10679, 10625, 10560, 10090

Realistic 10047, 10154, 10180, 10150,

10178, 10030

Recor 10037, 10418

Rectiligne 10037

Rediffusion 10036, 10163, 10346, 10361,

10548

Redstar 10037

Reﬂex 10037, 10668, 11037

Relisys 10865, 10876, 10877, 11207,

11298

Remotec 10250, 10093, 10145, 10171,

10037

Reoc 10714

Revox 10037

Rex 10163, 10264

RFT 10037, 10264

Rinex 10773

Roadstar

10009, 10037, 10218, 10264,

10418, 10668, 10714, 11037,

11900

Rolson 11371

Rover 10036, 10877

Rowa 10748, 10009, 10037, 10264,

10587, 10698, 10712, 10817

Royal Lux 10335, 10370

Runco 10017, 10060, 10030

Ruyi 10817

SSaba

10250, 10109, 10163, 10287,

10335, 10343, 10361, 10498,

10548, 10560, 10625, 10714

Sagem 10455, 10610, 10618

Saige 10009, 10817

Saisho 10009, 10011, 10163, 10217,

10264

Saivod 10037, 10668, 10712, 11037,

11163, 11556, 11982

Sakai 10163

Sakyno 10455

Salora 10163, 10208, 10361, 10480,

10548, 10631

Salsa 10335

Sampo

10047, 10154, 10093, 10178,

10030, 10171, 10092, 10009,

10036, 10650, 10700, 11755,

11756

Samsung

10047, 10054, 10017, 10154,

10156, 10093, 10060, 10812,

10702, 10178, 10030, 10092,

10814, 10766, 10718, 10618,

10587, 10817, 10821, 11060,

11249, 11312, 11903, 11959,

10556, 10371, 10370, 10362,

10264, 10226, 10217, 10208,

10163, 10090, 10037, 10036,

10035, 10009

Sandra 10217

Sanjian 10264

Sanky 10060, 10030

Sansui

10463, 10060, 10030, 10706,

10037, 10371, 10455, 10602,

10714, 10861, 11371, 11537,

11904, 11911

Santon 10009

Sanyo

10047, 10054, 10154, 10000,

10156, 10463, 10180, 10145,

10171, 11755, 11208, 10704,

10508, 10370, 10264, 10217,

10208, 10170, 10163, 10108,

10088, 10037, 10036, 10011,

10009

Sanyong 10037

Sanyuan 10093, 10009, 10817

Saville 10060

SBR 10037, 10556

Sceptre 11217

Schaub Lorenz 10361, 10374, 10486, 10548,

10606, 10714, 11191

Schneider

11982, 11904, 11137, 11037,

10714, 10668, 10648, 10556,

10394, 10371, 10361, 10352,

10343, 10218, 10217, 10163,

10070, 10037

Scotch 10178

Scotland 10163

Scott 10236, 10180, 10178, 10030

Sears

10047, 10054, 10017, 10154,

10000, 10156, 10051, 10093,

10060, 10053, 10178, 10030,

10171, 10166, 10035, 10036,

10037, 10001, 10208, 11904

Seaway 10634

Seelver 11037

SEG

10009, 10036, 10037, 10217,

10218, 10264, 10362, 10487,

10668, 11037, 11163

SEI 10037, 10163

Sei-Sinudyne 10037

Seleco 10163, 10264, 10346, 10362,

10371

Semivox 10180

Semp 10156

Sencora 10009

Sentra 10035

Serino 10093, 10455, 10610

Shancha 10264, 10817

Shanghai 10009, 10208, 10226, 10264,

10817

Shaofeng 10145, 10817

Sharp

10054, 10093, 10180, 10053,

10030, 10009, 10036, 10200,

10650, 10653, 10668, 11193,

11393, 11917

Shen Ying 10092, 10009

Shencai 10145, 10009, 10264

Sheng Chia 10093, 10236, 10009

Shenyang 10009, 10264, 10817

Sherwood 10009

Shintoshi 10037

Shivaki 10178, 10037, 10374, 10443,

10556

Show 10009, 10418

Siarem 10163

Siemens 10145, 10037, 10195, 10200,

10327

Siera 10037, 10556

Siesta 10370

Signature 10047, 10093, 10030

Silva 10037, 10361, 10648

Silva Schneider 10037, 11556

Silvano 10587

Silver 10036, 10361, 10455, 10715

SilverCrest 11037

Simpson 10178, 10030, 10011

Singer 10060, 10092, 10009, 10037,

10335, 10371, 10433, 11537

Sinotec 10773

Sinudyne 10037, 10163, 10361

Skantic 10163

SKY 10037, 10880, 11504

Sky Brazil 10880

Sky-North 10037

Skygiant 10180

Skyworth 10748, 10009, 10037, 10264,

10698, 10805, 10817, 11115

Sliding 10865, 10880

SLX 10668

Smaragd 10487

Soemtron 10865, 11298

Solar Drape 10000

Solavox 10037, 10163, 10361, 10548

Sole 10813

Sonawa 10218

Songba 10009

Soniko 10037

Sonitron 10208, 10217, 10370

Sonneclair 10037

Sonoko 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264

Sonolor 10163, 10208, 10361, 10548

Sontec 10009, 10037, 10370

Sony

10017, 10154, 11100, 10000,

10150, 10053, 10011, 10036,

10037, 10074, 10353, 10650,

11505, 11651, 11751, 11904

Sound & Vision 10218, 10374

Soundesign 10180, 10178

Soundwave 10037, 10418, 10715

Sova 11952

Sowa 10156, 10051, 10060, 10178,

10092, 10036, 10226

Soyea 10773

Spectra 10009

Spectravision 10156, 10178

Spectroniq 11498

Squareview 10171

SR2000 10154, 10171

Ssangyong 10009

SSS 10180

Staksonic 10009

Standard 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,

10374, 11037

Standard Components

10009, 10218

Starlite 10236, 10180, 10009, 10037,

10163, 10264

Stenway 10218

Stern 10163, 10264

Stevison 11982

Strato 10009, 10037, 10264

PRESET CODE 

Strong 11149, 11163

Studio Experience 10843

Stylandia 10217

Sunkai 10218, 10455, 10487, 10610,

10865

Sunstar 10009, 10037, 10264, 10371

Sunwatt 10455

Sunwood 10037

Superla 10217

Superscan 10093, 10864, 11944

Supersonic 10009, 10208, 10455, 10805

SuperTech 10009, 10037, 10218, 10556

Supra 10178, 10009, 10374

Supreme 10000

Susumu 10218, 10287, 10335

Sutron 10009

SV2000 10054

SVA 10748, 10587, 10865, 10870,

10871, 10872

Svasa 10455

Swisstec 10880, 11504

Sydney 10217

Sylvania

10047, 10054, 10154, 10000,

10051, 10178, 10030, 10171,

10092, 10036, 10037, 10876,

11271, 11904, 11944

Symphonic 10000, 10180, 10178, 10171,

11904, 11944

Synco 10000, 10451, 10093, 10060,

10178, 10092, 10036

Syntax 11144, 11240, 11331

Sysline 10037

TT+A 10447

Tacico 10178, 10092, 10009

Tai Yi 10009

Taishan 10009, 10374, 10817

Tandberg 10109, 10361, 10367

Tandy 10093, 10163, 10217, 10218

Targa 11371

Tashiko 10092, 10036, 10163, 10170,

10217, 10650

Tatung

10054, 10154, 10000, 10156,

10051, 10060, 10037, 10036,

10011, 10009, 10217, 11156,

11191, 11248, 11254, 11371,

11556, 11756

TCL 10706, 10698, 11027, 11537

TCM 10714, 10808

Teac

10154, 10178, 10171, 10706,

11755, 11149, 11037, 10714,

10712, 10698, 10668, 10512,

10455, 10418, 10264, 10217,

10170, 10037, 10009

Tec 10009, 10037, 10163, 10217,

10335

Tech Line 10037, 10668, 11163

Techica 10218

Technica 11982

Technics 10054, 10250, 10051, 10226,

10556, 10650

TechniSat 10556, 11267

Technisson 10714

Technosonic 10499, 10556

Technovox 10030, 10217

Techview 10847

Techwood 10250, 10051, 10060, 11163

Tecnimagen 10556

Teco

10051, 10093, 10178, 10092,

10009, 10036, 10218, 10264,

10653, 11040

Tedelex 10009, 10208, 10217, 10418,

10606, 10698, 11537

Teiron 10009

Tek 10820

Teknika 10054, 10463, 10180, 10150,

10060, 10178, 10092

Tele System

Electronic

10876

Teleavia 10287, 10343

Telecolor 10017

Telecor 10037, 10163, 10217, 10218,

10394

Telefunken

10702, 11504, 10821, 10820,

10819, 10714, 10712, 10698,

10625, 10587, 10560, 10498,

10486, 10346, 10343, 10335,

10287, 10109, 10074, 10073,

10037

Telefusion 10037

Telegazi 10037, 10163, 10218, 10264

Telemeister 10037

Telesonic 10037

Telestar 10009, 10037, 10556

Teletech 10009, 10037, 10668, 11037

Teleton 10036, 10217

Televideon 10163

Teleview 10037

Tempest 10009, 10264, 10455

Tennessee 10037

Tensai 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,

10371, 10374, 10715, 11037

Tenson 10009

Tera 10030, 10092

Tevion

10037, 10556, 10648, 10668,

10714, 10808, 11037, 11137,

11248, 11298, 11498, 11556

Texet 10009, 10217, 10218, 10374

Texla 10780

ThemeScene 10887

Thomas 10047, 10178, 10001, 11904

Thomson

11447, 10047, 10037, 10109,

10287, 10335, 10343, 10560,

10625

Thorn

10035, 10036, 10037, 10073,

10074, 10109, 10163, 10264,

10335, 10343, 10361, 10499,

10512

Thorn-Ferguson 10073, 10335, 10343, 10499

Tiane 10093, 10817

Tiny 11269

TMK 10236, 10180, 10178

TML 11756

TNCi 10017

Tobishi 10218

Tobo 10748, 10009, 10264

Tocom 10156

Tokai 10009, 10037, 10163, 10217,

10374, 10668, 11037

Tokaido 11037

Tokyo 10035

Tomashi 10218

Tongguang 10264

Tongtel 10587, 10780

Topline 10668, 11037

Toshiba

10154, 11256, 10156, 10150,

11265, 10060, 11145, 10145,

10166, 11037, 11156, 11163,

11164, 11356, 11508, 11556,

11656, 11704, 11945, 11971,

10845, 10821, 10718, 10650,

10618, 10508, 10264, 10217,

10195, 10109, 10070, 10036,

10035, 10011, 10009

Totevision 10051

Towada 10217

Toyoda 10009, 10264, 10371

Toyomenka 10178

Trakton 10217, 10264

Trans Continens 10037, 10217, 10668, 11037

TRANS-continents 10556, 10865

Transonic

10009, 10037, 10264, 10418,

10455, 10512, 10587, 10698,

10712, 10780

Triad 10218, 10556

Trident 10217

Trio 11498

Tristar 10218, 10264

Triumph 10037, 10346, 10556

Truetone 10250, 10051

Tuntex 10030, 10092, 10009

TVS 10463

TVTEXT 95 10556

UUher 10037, 10370, 10374, 10418,

10480, 10486

Ultra 10092

Ultravox 10037, 10163, 10374

Unic Line 10037, 10455

United 10037, 10587, 10714, 10715,

11037, 11982

Universal 10047, 10037

Universum

11163, 11037, 10668, 10631,

10618, 10512, 10480, 10418,

10370, 10362, 10361, 10346,

10327, 10264, 10217, 10200,

10195, 10170, 10109, 10074,

10070, 10037, 10036, 10011,

10009

Univox 10037, 10163

VV 10864, 10885, 11755, 11756

V2max 10865

V7 Videoseven 10880, 11217, 11755

Vector Research 10030

Vestel 10037, 10217, 10668, 11037,

11163

Vexa 10009, 10037

Victor 10250, 10053, 10036, 10650,

10653

Videocon 10508

Videologic 10218

Videologique 10217, 10218

Videomac 10009

VideoSystem 10037

Videotechnic 10217, 10374

Videoton 10163

Vidikron 10054

Vidtech 10178, 10036

Viewpia 10876

Viewsonic 10857, 10864, 10885, 11330,

11578, 11627, 11755

Viking 10060

Viore 11207

Vision 10037, 10217, 10264

Vizio 10864, 10885, 11755, 11756,

11758

Vortec 10037

Voxson 10178, 10037, 10163, 10418

Waltham 10037, 10109, 10217, 10418,

10443, 10668, 11037

Wards

10047, 10054, 10017, 10154,

10000, 10156, 10051, 10093,

10236, 10180, 10060, 10178,

10030, 10166, 11347, 11156,

11147, 10866, 10195, 10001,

10037, 10035

Warumaia 10374, 10661

Watson 10009, 10037, 10163, 10218,

10394, 10668, 10714, 11037

Watt Radio 10163

Waycon 10156

Wega 10036, 10037

Wegavox 10009

Weipai 10009

Welltech 10714

Weltblick 10217

Welton 10178

Weltstar 11037

Westinghouse 10000, 10451, 10885, 10889,

11282, 11577

Wharfedale 10037, 10556, 10860, 11556

White

Westinghouse

10451, 10236, 10463, 10037,

10623, 10889, 11909

Windsor 10668, 11037

Windy Sam 10556

Wintel 10714

World 10451, 10236, 10463, 10180

World-of-Vision 10865, 10877, 10880, 11217,

11298

Worldview 10455

XX-View 11191

Xenius 10634, 10661

Xiahua 10009, 10264, 10698, 10773,

10817

Xianghai 10009

Xiangyang 10264

Xiangyu 10009

Xihu 10264, 10817

Xingfu 10009

Xinghai 10264

XLogic 10698, 10860

Xoceco 11064

Xoro 11196, 11217

XR-1000 10154, 10180, 10171

Xrypton 10037

YYamaha 10030, 10650, 11576

Yamishi 10037, 10217, 10218, 10455

Yapshe 10250

Yingge 10009

Yokan 10037

Yoko 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,

10264, 10370

Yonggu 10009

Yorx 10030, 10218

Youlanasi 10817

Yousida 10009

Yuhang 10009

ZZanussi 10163, 10217, 10264

Zenith

10047, 10017, 10000, 10093,

10463, 11265, 10812, 10178,

10030, 11145, 10145, 10171,

10092, 10037, 11904, 11909,

11911

ZhuHai 10009, 10374

TV/DVD Combination b2, b4

AAdvent 11933

Akai 11675

Akura 11982

Alba 11037

Amstrad 11982

Apex Digital 11943

Audiovox 11937, 11951, 11952

Axion 11937, 11958

BBlack Diamond 11037

Bush 10698, 11037, 11900

CCentrum 11037

Crown 11037

DD-Vision 11982

Denver 10587

PRESET CODE



EElfunk 11037

FFerguson 11037

Finlux 11556

GGoodmans 10587, 11037, 11900

HHitachi 11960

JJDV 11982

Jensen 11933

KKLH 11962

LLenco 10587

Logik 11037

Luker 11982

Luxor 11037

MMatsui 11037

Maxim 11982

Medion 11900

Mirror 11900

NNaiko 11982

Narita 11982

PPanasonic 11941

Philips 11454, 10556, 11961

Powerpoint 10698

Prima 11933

RRCA 11948, 11958

Roadstar 11900

SSaivod 11982

Samsung 11903

Schneider 11982

SEG 11037

Sova 11952

Stevison 11982

Sylvania 10171

TTeac 10698

Technica 11982

Telefunken 10698

Thomson 10625

Transonic 10587

UUnited 10587, 11037, 11982

VVestel 11037

AAkai 30695

Akura 31367

Alba 30695, 30884

Amstrad 31367

Apex Digital 30830

BBlack Diamond 30713, 30884

Broksonic 30695

Bush 30713, 30884

CCentrum 30713

Citizen 30695

Crown 30713

DD-Vision 31367

DMTech 31271

EElfunk 30713, 30884

Emerson 30675, 31268

ESA 31268

FFerguson 30695, 30713, 30884

Funai 31268

GGoodmans 30713

Grandin 30713

Grundig 30539, 30695

HHitachi 31247

IInsignia 31268

JJDV 31367

JNC 31271

KKonka 31192

LLogik 30713, 30884

Luker 31367

Luxor 30713

MMagnavox 31268

Matsui 30713, 30884

Maxim 31367

NNaiko 31367

Narita 31367

Neovia 31271

OOrion 30695

PPaciﬁc 30695

Panasonic 31490

Philips 30539, 30854, 31260

RRCA 31022

SSaivod 31367

Samsung 30899

Sansui 30695

Schneider 31367

SEG 30713, 30884

Sliding 31115

Stevison 31367

Sylvania 30630, 30675, 31268

TTechnica 31367

Thomson 30551

Toshiba 30695

UUnited 30713, 30884, 31367

Universum 30713

VVestel 30884

TV/VCR Combination b2, b3, b4

AAiwa 11904, 11911

America Action 10180

Amstrad 10171

Audiovox 10180

BBeko 10486

Black Diamond 11909

Broksonic 10463, 11911

Bush 11556

CCurtis Mathes 10051

DDaewoo 11909

EEmerson 10236, 10463, 11909, 11911

FFerguson 10073, 10625

Fidelity 10171

Funai 11904

GGE 10047, 10051, 10093, 11917,

11922

GoldStar 10037

Goodmans 10374, 11909

Grundig 10037, 10195, 10556

HHarley Davidson 11904

Hinari 10036

Hitachi 11904

IInternal 11909

JJVC 11923

LLG 10178

Lloyd’s 11904

MMagnavox 10054, 11904

Memorex 10250

Mitsubishi 10093, 10556, 11917

OOrion 10463, 11911

PPalsonic 11904

Panasonic 10250, 10051

Penney 10051

Philips 10037, 10556

QQuasar 10250, 10051

RRadiola 10556

RadioShack 11904

RCA 10047, 10051, 10093, 11917,

11922

SSaba 10625

Samsung 11959

Sansui 10463, 11904, 11911

Schneider 10037, 10556, 11904

Sears 11904

Sharp 10093, 11917

Siemens 10037

Sony 10000, 11505, 11904

Sylvania 10054

Symphonic 11904

TTeac 10178, 10171

Technics 10556

Thomas 11904

Thomson 10625

Toshiba 11971

White

Westinghouse 11909

ZZenith 11904, 11909, 11911

AAiwa 20000, 20352, 20479, 20742,

21137

Akai 20352

Alba 20352

America Action 20278

Amstrad 20000

Audiovox 20278

BBeko 20104

Bestar 20278

Blue Sky 20278, 20352, 20742

BPL 20046

Broksonic 20002, 20479, 21479

Bush 20352, 20742

CCitizen 20278, 21278

Curtis Mathes 20035, 21035

DDaewoo 20278, 20637, 21278

Dantax 20352

EEmerson 20002, 20278, 20479, 20637,

21278, 21479

FFerguson 20000, 20278

Fidelity 20000

Firstline 20278

Funai 20000

GGE 20060, 20035, 20048, 20240,

20807, 21035, 21060

GoldStar 20037, 20480, 21237

Goodmans 20278, 20352, 20637

Grandin 20278, 20742

Grundig 20081, 20347, 20352, 20742

HHanimex 20352

Harley Davidson 20000

Hinari 20352

Hitachi 20000

Hypson 20037

IInternal 20278, 20637

JJBL 20278

JMB 20352

KKambrook 20037

Kneissel 20278, 20352

LLG 20037, 20480, 21237

Lloyd’s 20000

Loewe 20037

MMagnasonic 20278, 21278

Magnavox 20081, 20000, 21781

Magnin 20240

Matsui 20352, 20742

Medion 20352

Memorex 20162, 20037, 21162, 21237,

21262

MGA 20240

Mitsubishi 20048, 20081, 20043, 20807

OOptimus 20162, 21162, 21262

Orion 20002, 20352, 20479, 20742,

21479

PPace 20352

Paciﬁc 20742

Palsonic 20000

Panasonic 20035, 20162, 21035, 21162,

21262

Penney 20035, 20037, 20240, 21035,

21237

Philips 20081

Portland 20637

QQuasar 20035, 20162, 21035, 21162

RRadiola 20081

RadioShack 20000

RCA 20060, 20035, 20048, 20240,

20807, 21035, 21060

SSaba 20320

Samsung 20240, 20432, 21014

Sansui 20000, 20479, 21479

Sanyo 20240

Saville 20352

Schneider 20081, 20000

Sears 20037, 20000, 21237

SEG 20637

Sharp 20037, 20048, 20807

Shivaki 20037

Siemens 20081

Sinudyne 20352

Sony 20032, 20000, 21232

Supra 20348

Sylvania 20081, 21781

Symphonic 20000

TTatung 20352

Teac 20037, 20000, 20637, 20642

Technics 20081

Technosonic 20352

Telefunken 20278

Thomas 20000

Thomson 20278

Toshiba 20352, 20432, 20845, 21145

UUnited 20742

White

Westinghouse 20278, 20637

ZZenith 20000, 20479, 20637, 21479

TThomson 30551

TV/VCR/DVD Combination

b2, b3, b4

AAkai 11903

BBroksonic 11938

EEmerson 11944

ESA 11944

MMagnavox 11944

PPanasonic 11946, 11947

RRCA 11953

PRESET CODE 0

SSharp 11917

Sylvania 11944

Symphonic 11944

TToshiba 11945

SSharp 20807

AAkai 30899

EEmerson 30821

ESA 30821

MMagnavox 30821

PPanasonic 31362, 31462

RRCA 31132

SSharp 30630

Superscan 30821

Sylvania 30821

Symphonic 30821

TToshiba 31045

VCR

AA-Mark 20037, 20240, 20000, 20278,

20046

ABS 21972

Admiral 20060, 20048, 20039, 20047,

20104, 20121, 20209, 20479

Adventura 20037, 20240, 20000

Aiko 20278

Aim 20278, 20348, 20642

Aiwa

20037, 20032, 20000, 20209,

20041, 20348, 20352, 20479,

20742, 21137

Akai 20037, 20240, 20041, 20106,

20315, 20348, 20352, 20642

Akura 20041

Alba 20081, 20000, 20209, 20278,

20315, 20348, 20352

Alienware 21972

Allegro 20039, 21137

Allorgan 20240

Allstar 20081

America Action 20278

American High 20035, 20081

Amoisonic 20479

Amstrad 20000, 20278

Anam 20162, 20037, 20240, 20278,

20226, 20480

Anam National 20162, 20226, 21162, 21562

Ansonic 20000

Aristona 20081

ASA 20037, 20081

Asha 20240

Astra 20035, 20240

Asuka 20037, 20081, 20000, 20038

Audiolab 20081

Audiosonic 20278

Audiovox 20037, 20278, 20038

Avis 20000

AVP 20000, 20352

Awa 20037, 20043, 20278, 20642

BBaird 20000, 20104, 20041, 20278,

20046, 20106

Basic Line 20104, 20278, 20046

Beaumark 20240

Beko 20104

Bell & Howell 20035, 20048, 20039, 20000,

20104, 20046, 20479

Bestar 20278

Black Diamond 20642

Black Panther 20278

Blaupunkt 20162, 20081, 20226

Blue Sky

20037, 20209, 20278, 20348,

20352, 20480, 20642, 20742,

21137

BPL 20046

Brandt 20041, 20320

Brandt Electronique 20041

Brinkmann 20209, 20348

Broksonic 20184, 20121, 20209, 20002,

20348, 20479, 21479

Bush

20081, 20000, 20209, 20278,

20315, 20348, 20352, 20642,

20742

CCalix 20037

Candle 20037, 20038

Canon 20035

Capehart 20002

Carena 20081, 20209

Carrefour 20045

Carrera 20240

Carver 20035, 20081

Casio 20000

Cathay 20278

CCE 20278

CGE 20000, 20041

Changhong 20048, 20081

Cimline 20209

Cineral 20278

CineVision 21137

Citizen 20035, 20037, 20240, 20000,

20209, 20278, 20479, 21278

Classic 20037

Clatronic 20000, 21593

Colortyme 20060, 20035, 20045, 20278

Colt 20000

Combitech 20352

Condor 20278

Craig 20037, 20047, 20240

Criterion 20000

Crosley 20035, 20081, 20000

Crown 20037, 20278, 20480

Curtis Mathes

20060, 20035, 20162, 20240,

20000, 20041, 20278, 20432,

21035

Cybernex 20240

CyberPower 21972

Cyrus 20081

DDaewoo

20037, 20045, 20104, 20209,

20278, 20046, 20352, 20637,

20642, 21137, 21278

Dansai 20278

Dantax 20352

Daytron 20037, 20278

De Graaf 20048, 20081, 20042, 20104,

20046

Decca 20081, 20000, 20067, 20209,

20041, 20352

Degraff 20048, 20081, 20042, 20104

Deitron 20278

Dell 21972

Denon 20081, 20042

Derwent 20041

Diamant 20037

Diamond 20348

Digitor 20642

DirecTV 20739

Domland 20209

DSE 20642

Dual 20081, 20000, 20041, 20278,

20348

Dumont 20081, 20000, 20104

Durabrand 20039, 20038, 20642

Dynatech 20240, 20000

EElbe 20278, 20038

Electrohome 20060, 20037, 20240, 20000,

20043, 20209

Electrophonic 20037

Elin 20240

Elta 20278

Emerald 20184, 20121

Emerex 20032

Emerson

20035, 20037, 20184, 20039,

20240, 20045, 20000, 20121,

20043, 20209, 20002, 20278,

20348, 20479, 20637, 21278,

21479, 21593

ESA 21137

ESC 20240, 20278

EuroLine 21593

FFerguson 20000, 20041, 20278, 20320,

20348

Fidelity 20240, 20000, 20352, 20432

Finlandia

20037, 20048, 20081, 20000,

20042, 20104, 20043, 20046,

20106, 20226

Finlux 20081, 20000, 20042, 20104

Firstline

20037, 20045, 20042, 20043,

20209, 20278, 20348, 20480,

21137

Fisher 20039, 20047, 20000, 20104,

20046

Flint 20209, 20348

Fuji 20035, 20033

Fujitsu 20037, 20045, 20000

Fujitsu General 20037

Funai 20037, 20000, 20278, 21593

GGalaxi 20000

Galaxis 20278

Garrard 20000

Gateway 21972

20060, 20035, 20048, 20240,

20000, 20226, 20320, 20807,

21035, 21060

GEC 20081

Gemini 20060

General 20045

General Technic 20348

Genexxa 20037, 20000, 20104, 20278

Go Video 20240, 20432, 20614, 21137

GoldStar

20035, 20037, 20039, 20000,

20209, 20278, 20038, 20225,

20226, 20480, 21137, 21237

Goodmans

20037, 20081, 20240, 20000,

20209, 20278, 20348, 20352,

20637, 20642, 20742

GPX 20037

Gradiente 20000

Graetz 20240, 20104, 20041

Granada

20035, 20037, 20048, 20081,

20240, 20000, 20042, 20104,

20046, 20226

Grandin 20037, 20000, 20209, 20278,

20742

Grundig 20081, 20226, 20320, 20347,

20348, 20352, 20742

HHaaz 20348

Hanimex 20352

Hanseatic 20037, 20081, 20209, 20038

Haojie 20240

Harley Davidson 20000

Harman/Kardon 20081, 20038

Headquarter 20046

Hewlett Packard 21972

HI-Q 20035, 20047, 20000

Hinari 20240, 20209, 20041, 20278,

20352

Hisawa 20209, 2035

Hischito 20045

Hitachi

20035, 20037, 20081, 20240,

20045, 20000, 20042, 20041,

20046, 20089

Hoeher 20278, 20642

Hornyphon 20081

Howard Computers 21972

HP 21972

Hughes Network

Systems 20042, 20739

Humax 20739

Hush 21972

Hypson 20037, 20000, 20209, 20278,

20352, 20480

Hytek 20047, 20000

IiBUYPOWER 21972

Imperial 20000

Ingersol 20240, 20209

Interbuy 20037

Interfunk 20081, 20104

Internal 20278, 20637

International 20037, 20278, 20642

Intervision 20037, 20000, 20209, 20278,

20348

Irradio 20037, 20081, 21137

ITT 20240, 20104, 20041, 20046,

20106

ITT Nokia 20240, 20104, 20041, 20106

ITV 20037, 20278

JJaneil 20240

JBL 20278

Jensen 20067, 20041

JMB 20209, 20348, 20352, 20742

Joyce 20000

JVC 20184, 20081, 20045, 20067,

20041, 21162

KKambrook 20037

Karcher 20081, 20278, 20642

KEC 20037, 20278

Kendo 20037, 20209, 20278, 20106,

20315, 20348, 20642

Kenwood 20067, 20041, 20038, 20046

KIC 20000

Kimari 20047

Kneissel 20037, 20209, 20278, 20348,

20352

Kodak 20035, 20037

Kolin 20043, 20041

Kolster 20209

KTV 20000

Kuba 20047

Kuba Electronic 20047

LLenco 20278

20037, 20240, 20045, 20000,

20042, 20209, 20278, 20038,

20225, 20480, 21137, 21237

Lifetec 20209, 20348

Linksys 21972

Lloyd’s 20240, 20000, 20038

Loewe 21062, 20162, 20037, 20081,

21262, 21562

Logik 20240, 20000, 20209, 20106

Lumatron 20278, 21137

Lunatron 21137

PRESET CODE



Luxor 20048, 20047, 20104, 20043,

20046, 20106, 20315

LXI 20037, 20000, 20042, 20067

MM Electronic 20037, 20240, 20000, 20038

Magnadyne 20081

Magnasonic 20037, 20240, 20000, 20278,

21278

Magnavox

20035, 20037, 20048, 20039,

20081, 20240, 20000, 20226,

20618, 20642, 21593, 21781

Magnin 20240

Magnum 20642

Manesth 20081, 20045, 20209

Marantz 20035, 20081, 20209, 20038

Mark 20000, 20278

Marta 20037

Mastec 20642

Master’s 20278

Matsui 20037, 20240, 20209, 20278,

20348, 20352, 20742

Matsushita 20035, 20162, 20081, 20226,

21162

Media Center PC 21972

Mediator 20081

Medion 20209, 20348, 20352, 20642

MEI 20035

Memorex

20035, 20162, 20037, 20048,

20039, 20047, 20240, 20000,

20104, 20209, 20278, 20046,

20348, 20479, 21162, 21237,

21262

Metronic 20081

Metz

21062, 20162, 20037, 20081,

20226, 20347, 20836, 21162,

21262, 21562

MGA 20060, 20240, 20043

MGN Technology 20240

Micormay 20348

Micromaxx 20209

Microsoft 21972

Midland 20240

Migros 20000

Mind 21972

Minolta 20042

Mitsubishi

20060, 20048, 20047, 20081,

20000, 20042, 20067, 20043,

20041, 20480, 20642, 20807

Motorola 20035, 20048

MTC 20240, 20000

MTX 20000

Multitec 20037

Multitech 20039, 20000

Murphy 20000

Myryad 20081

NNAD 20240, 20104

Naiko 20348, 20642

NAP 20039

National 20226

Nebula Electronics 20033

NEC

20035, 20037, 20048, 20104,

20067, 20041, 20278, 20038,

21137

Neckermann 20081, 20041

Nesco 20000

Neufunk 20209

Newave 20037

Nikkai 20278

Nikko 20037, 20278

Nikkodo 20037, 20278

Nishi 20240

Niveus Media 21972

Noblex 20240

Nokia

20048, 20081, 20240, 20042,

20104, 20041, 20278, 20046,

20106, 20315

Nordmende 20067, 20041, 20320

Northgate 21972

Nu-Tec 20209

OOceanic 20048, 20081, 20000, 20104,

20041, 20046, 20106

Okano 20209, 20278, 20315, 20348

Olympus 20035, 20162, 20104, 20226

Onimax 20642

Onkyo 20222

Optimus

21062, 20035, 20162, 20037,

20048, 20047, 20240, 20000,

20104, 20432, 21162, 21262

Orion

20184, 20240, 20000, 20104,

20121, 20209, 20002, 20278,

20348, 20352, 20479, 20742,

21479

Orson 20000

Osaki 20037, 20000

Otake 20209

Otto Versand 20081

PPace 20352

Paciﬁc 20000, 20348, 20642, 20742

Packard Bell 21972

Palladium 20037, 20209, 20041, 20348

Palsonic 20000, 20642

Panama 20035

Panasonic

21062, 20035, 20162, 20000,

20225, 20226, 20614, 20616,

20836, 21035, 21162, 21262,

21562

Pathe Cinema 20043

Pathe Marconi 20041

Penney

20035, 20162, 20037, 20047,

20081, 20240, 20000, 20042,

20067, 20038, 21035, 21237

Pentax 20042

Perdio 20000, 20209

Philco 20035, 20081, 20000, 20209,

20038, 20226, 20479

Philips

20035, 20162, 20048, 20081,

20045, 20000, 20209, 20226,

20616, 20618, 20739, 21081,

21181

Phoenix 20278

Phonola 20081

Pilot 20037

Pioneer 20162, 20081, 20042, 20067

Polk Audio 20081

Portland 20278, 20637

Presidian 21593

Prinz 20000

Proﬁtronic 20081, 20240

Proline 20000, 20278, 20320, 20642

Proscan 20060, 21060

Prosco 20278

Prosonic 20209, 20278

Protec 20000

Protech 20081

ProVision 20278

Pulsar 20039, 20240, 20278

Pulser 20240

Pye 20081, 20000

QQisheng 20060

Quarter 20046

Quartz 20035, 20047, 20046

Quasar 20035, 20162, 20002, 20278,

20226, 21035, 21162

Quelle 20081

RRadialva 20037, 20048, 20081

Radiola 20081

Radionette 20037, 21137

RadioShack

20035, 20162, 20037, 20048,

20047, 20240, 20000, 20104,

20046, 21162

Radix 20037

Randex 20037

Rank 20041

Rank Arena 20041

RCA

20060, 20035, 20048, 20240,

20045, 20000, 20042, 20106,

20226, 20320, 20807, 20880,

21035, 21060

Realistic

20035, 20162, 20037, 20048,

20047, 20240, 20000, 20104,

20121, 20278, 20046, 21162

Reoc 20348

ReplayTV 20614, 20616

Rex 20041

Ricavision 21972

Rio 21137

Roadstar 20037, 20081, 20240, 20278,

20038, 20742

Runco 20039

SSaba 20041, 20278, 20320

Saisho 20209, 20348

Salora 20104, 20043, 20046, 20106

Sampo 20037, 20048

Samsung 20060, 20240, 20045, 20000,

20038, 20432, 20739, 21014

Samtron 20240

Sanky 20048, 20039

Sansei 20048

Sansui

20240, 20000, 20067, 20209,

20041, 20002, 20106, 20348,

20479, 21479

Sanyo

20048, 20047, 20240, 20000,

20104, 20067, 20209, 20046,

20348, 20479, 21137

Saville 20240, 20278, 20352

SBR 20081

ScanSonic 20240

Schaub Lorenz 20000, 20104, 20041, 20106,

20315, 20348

Schneider

20037, 20081, 20240, 20000,

20042, 20278, 20348, 20352,

20642, 21137

Scott 20184, 20045, 20121, 20043

Sears

20060, 20035, 20162, 20037,

20048, 20039, 20047, 20033,

20045, 20000, 20042, 20104,

20067, 20043, 20209, 20041,

21237, 20046

Seaway 20278

SEG 20081, 20240, 20278, 20637,

20642

SEI 20081

Sei-Sinudyne 20081

Seleco 20037, 20041

Semp 20045

Sentra 20278

Sharp 20037, 20048, 20047, 20032,

20000, 20209, 20807

Shinco 20000

Shintom 20039, 20240, 20000, 20104

Shivaki 20037

Shogun 20240

Siemens 20037, 20081, 20104, 20046,

20320, 20347

Siera 20081

Signature 20060, 20035, 20037, 20048,

20000, 20046, 20479

Silva 20037

Silver 20278

SilverCrest 20642

Singer 20037, 20240, 20045, 20348

Sinudyne 20081, 20209, 20352

Smaragd 20348

Sonic Blue 20614, 20616, 21137

Sonographe 20046

Sonolor 20048, 20046

Sontec 20037, 20278

Sonwa 20642

Sony

20035, 20048, 20047, 20032,

20033, 20000, 20067, 20046,

20106, 20226, 20636, 21232,

21972

Soundmaster 20000

Soundwave 20037, 20209, 20348

Stack 9 21972

Standard 20278

Stern 20278

STS 20042

Sunkai 20209, 20278, 20348

Sunstar 20000

Suntronic 20000

Supra 20037, 20278, 20348

Susumu 20037

SV2000 20000

SVA 20000

Sylvania 20035, 20081, 20000, 20043,

21593, 21781

Symphonic 20240, 20000, 20002, 21593

Systemax 21972

TT+A 20162

Tagar Systems 21972

Taisho 20209

Tandberg 20278

Tandy 20000, 20104

Tashiko 20037, 20048, 20081, 20240,

20000

Tatung

20048, 20081, 20045, 20000,

20067, 20043, 20209, 20041,

20348, 20352

Tchibo 20348

TCM 20348

Teac 20037, 20000, 20067, 20041,

20278, 20637, 20642, 21593

Technics 20035, 20162, 20037, 20081,

20000, 20226, 21162

TechniSat 20348

Technosonic 20352

Teco 20035, 20037, 20048, 20041,

20038

Tedelex 20037, 20209, 20348, 20642

Teknika 20035, 20037, 20000

Teleavia 20041

Telecorder 20240

Telefunken 20209, 20041, 20278, 20320,

20642

Telerent 20226

Telestar 20037

Teletech 20000, 20278

Tensai 20037, 20000, 20278

Tevion 20209, 20348, 20479, 20642

Texet 20278

Thomas 20000, 20002

Thomson 20060, 20067, 20041, 20278,

20320

Thorn 20037, 20104, 20041, 20320

Tisonic 20278

Tivo 20618, 20636, 20739, 21996

TMK 20240, 20000

PRESET CODE 

TNIX 20037

Tocom 20240

Tokai 20037, 20104, 20041

Topline 20348

Toshiba

20081, 20240, 20045, 20000,

20042, 20067, 20043, 20209,

20041, 20352, 20432, 20742,

20845, 21008, 21145, 21972,

21996

Tosonic 20278

Totevision 20037, 20240

Touch 21972

Toyoda 20278

Tradex 20081

Triad 20278

Trix 20037

UUher 20240

Ultra 20045, 20278

Ultravox 20278

Unitech 20240

United 20348, 20742, 21593

Universum

20037, 20081, 20240, 20000,

20104, 20209, 20106, 20348,

21137

VVector 20045

Vector Research 20184, 20038

Victor 20067, 20041

Video Concepts 20045

Video Technic 20000

Videomagic 20037

Videosonic 20240, 20000

Viewsonic 21972

Villain 20000

Voodoo 21972

Wards

20060, 20035, 20037, 20048,

20039, 20047, 20081, 20033,

20240, 20045, 20000, 20042,

20043, 20041, 20038, 20046,

20479

Watson 20081, 20352, 20642

Weltblick 20037

Wharfedale 20642

White

Westinghouse

20000, 20209, 20278, 20479,

20637

World 20209, 20002, 20348, 20479

XXR-1000 20035, 20240, 20000

YYamaha 20041, 20038

Yamishi 20278

Yoko 20037, 20240

ZZenith

20037, 20039, 20033, 20000,

20209, 20041, 20278, 20479,

20637, 21137, 21479

ZT Group 21972

ZX 20209, 20348, 20352

PVR b3

AABS 21972

Alienware 21972

CCyberPower 21972

DDell 21972

DirecTV 20739

GGateway 21972

Go Video 20614

HHewlett Packard 21972

Howard Computers 21972

HP 21972

Hughes Network

Systems 20739

Humax 20739

Hush 21972

IiBUYPOWER 21972

LLinksys 21972

MMedia Center PC 21972

Microsoft 21972

Mind 21972

NNiveus Media 21972

Northgate 21972

PPanasonic 20614, 20616

Philips 20618, 20739

RRCA 20880

ReplayTV 20614, 20616

SSamsung 20739

Sonic Blue 20614, 20616

Sony 20636, 21972

Stack 9 21972

Systemax 21972

TTagar Systems 21972

Tivo 20618, 20636, 20739

Toshiba 21008, 21972, 21996

Touch 21972

VViewsonic 21972

Voodoo 21972

ZZT Group 21972

DVD Player

13D LAB 30503, 30539

4Kus 31158

AA-Trend 30714

Acoustic Solutions 30713, 30730, 31228

AEG 30770, 30788, 30790, 31923

AFK 31051, 31152, 31923

Aim 30672, 30699, 30833

Airis 30672, 31005, 31224, 31250,

31321, 31345

Aiwa 30533, 30641

Akai

30690, 30695, 30705, 30770,

30788, 30790, 30884, 30898,

30899, 31115, 31205, 31233,

31695

Akashi 30838

AKI 31005

Akira 30699, 31321

Akura 30898, 31051, 31140, 31233,

31367

Alba

30672, 30539, 30717, 30695,

30699, 30713, 30730, 30783,

30884, 31140, 31530, 31695

Alco 30790

Alize 31151

All-Tel 31451

Allegro 30869

Altacom 31224

Amitech 30784, 30770, 30850

Amoi 30852

Amphion Media

Works 30872

Amstrad 30713, 30770, 31151, 31367

AMW 30872

Anam 31913

Ansonic 30759, 30774, 30831

Apex Digital

30533, 30672, 30717, 30755,

30794, 30796, 30797, 30830,

31004, 31020, 31056, 31061

Aristona 30539, 30646

Arrgo 31023

ASCOMTEC 31923

Asono 31224

Aspire Digital 31168

Atacom 31224

Audiosonic 30690, 31923

Audiovox 30717, 30790

Audioworld 30790

Autovox 30713

Auvio 30843

Awa 30730, 30872

Axion 30730

BBase 31451

Basic Line 30713

Baze 30898

BBK 30862, 31224

Beep 31163

Bellagio 31004

Belson 31086, 31923

Binatone 31923

Black Diamond 30713, 30833, 30884

Blaupunkt 30717

Blu:sens 31233, 31321

Blue Nova

International 31321

Blue Parade 30571

Blue Sky 30672, 30651, 30695, 30699,

30713, 30790, 30843, 31423

Boghe 31004

Boman 30783, 30898, 31005

Bose 32023

Brainwave 30770, 31115

Brandt 30503, 30651, 30551

Broksonic 30695

Bush

30672, 30717, 30690, 30699,

30713, 30723, 30730, 30831,

30833, 30884, 31051, 31140,

31483, 31695, 31832

Byd:sign 30872

CC-Tech 30798, 31152

California Audio Labs

30490

Cambridge Audio 30751, 31109

Cambridge

Soundworks 30690

Campomatic Digital 31051

Cat 30699, 30789, 31421, 31923

CCE 30730

Celestial 31020

cello 31730

Centrex 30672, 31004

Centrum 30713, 30789, 31005, 31227,

31923

CGV 30751, 31115

Changhong 30627, 31061

Cinea 30831, 30841

Cinetec 30713, 30872

cineULTRA 30699

CineVision 30833, 30869, 31483

Citizen 30695

Clairtone 30571

Classic 30730, 31730

Clatronic 30672, 30675, 30788, 31233

Clayton 30713

Coby 30730, 30852, 31086, 31321,

31923

Codex 31233

Commax 31321

Conia 30672, 30852, 31321

Contel 30788

Continental Edison 30831, 30872

Craig 30831

Creative 30503, 30539

Crown 30690, 30713, 30770, 31115

Crypto 31228

Curtis Mathes 31087

Cybercom 30831

CyberHome 30714, 30816, 30874, 31023,

31024, 31117, 31129, 31502

Cytron 30651, 30705, 30774, 31347

DD-Vision 31115, 31367

Daenyx 30872

Daewoo

30490, 30784, 30705, 30714,

30770, 30833, 30869, 30872,

31172, 31483, 31906

Dalton 31036

Dansai 30770, 30783, 31115, 31695

Dantax 30539, 30713, 30723, 30790

Daytek 30872, 31005

Dayton 30872

DCE 30831

Decca 30770, 31115

Denon 30490, 30634, 31634,

[32134]z

Denver 30672, 30699, 30788, 30898,

31056, 31104, 31321, 31923

Denzel 30665

Desay 30843, 31212

Dgtec 30672

Diamond 30651, 30751, 30768, 30790

Digihome 30713

DigiLogic 30713

digiRED 30717

Digitech 31832

Digitor 30651, 30690, 30833, 31005,

31423

Digitrex 30672, 31004, 31056

DiK 30831

Dinamic 30788

Disney 30675, 30831, 31270

DiViDo 30705

DK Digital 30831

DMTech 30783, 31271

Dragon 30831

DreamX 31151

DSE 30833, 31152, 31730

Dual

30651, 30665, 30675, 30713,

30730, 30783, 30790, 30831,

31023

Durabrand 30713, 30831, 31023, 31502

DVD2000 30521

DVX 30768

EE:max 31233, 31321

EagleTec 30714

eBench 31152

ECC 30730

Eclipse 30723, 30751

Elfunk 30713, 30850, 30884

Elin 30770

Elite 31152

Ellion 30850, 31421

Elta

30672, 30690, 30770, 30788,

30850, 31051, 31115, 31151,

31233

Eltax 31233, 31321

Emerson 30591, 30675, 30705, 30821,

31268

Enterprise 30591

PRESET CODE



Entivo 30503, 30539

Enzer 30784, 30770, 31228

ESA 30821, 31268

EuroLine 30675, 30788, 31115, 31233

FFenner 30651

Ferguson 30651, 30695, 30713, 30884,

30898, 31695, 31730

Finlux 30672, 30591, 30741, 30751,

30770, 30783

Firstline 30651, 30713, 30843, 30869,

31530

Fisher 30670

Funai 30675, 30695, 31268

Fusion 30862

GGateway 31158

GE 30522, 30815, 30717

General Electric 30717

Germatic 31051

Global Link 31224

Global Solutions 30768

Global Sphere 31152

Go Video

30573, 30744, 30717, 30715,

30741, 30783, 30833, 30869,

31044, 31075, 31099, 31158,

31483, 31730

GoldStar 30591, 30741, 30869

Goodmans

30651, 30690, 30713, 30723,

30730, 30783, 30790, 30833,

31004, 31140, 31423, 31530,

31730, 31923

GP Audio 31140

GPX 30699, 30741

Gradiente 30490, 30651

Graetz 30665

Gran Prix 30831, 30898

Grandin 30713, 31233

Greenhill 30717

Grundig

30539, 30651, 30551, 30670,

30686, 30695, 30705, 30713,

30775, 30790, 31004, 31036,

31695, 31730, 31832, 31920

Grunkel 30770, 30790, 30831

HH & B 30713, 30841, 30850, 31233,

31421

Haaz 30751, 31152

Haier 30843

Hanseatic 30741, 30783, 30790

Harman/Kardon 30582, 30702

HCM 30788

HDT 30705

HE 30730, 31163, 31923

Henss 30713

HiMAX 30843

Hitachi 30573, 30664, 30665, 30713,

31247, 31920

Hiteker 30672, 31923

Hoeher 30651, 30713, 30831, 31004,

31224

Home Electronics 30730, 30770

Home Tech Industries

31224

Hoyo 30665

Humax 30646

Hyundai 30783, 30850, 31061, 31228

IiLo 31348

Ingelen 30788

Ingersol 31023

Initial 30839, 30717

Inno Hit 30713

Insignia 31268

Integra 30571, 30627, 31634

Irradio 30869, 31115, 31224, 31233

IRT 30783

ISP 30695

JJamo 31036

Jaton 30665

JBL 30702

JDB 30730

JDV 31367

Jeken 30699

Jepssen 31250

JMB 30695

JNC 30672, 31271

JSI 31423

JVC 30503, 30539, 30558, 30623,

30867, 31164, 31597, 31860

jWin 31051

KKansas Technologies 31233, 31530

Karcher 30783

Kawasaki 30790

Kendo 30672, 30699, 30713, 30831

Kennex 30713, 30770, 30898

Kenwood 30490, 30534

Kiiro 30770

Kiss 30665, 30841, 31523

KLH 30815, 30717, 30790, 31020

Kloss 30533

Koda 31230

Konka 31192

Koss 30651, 31061, 31423

Kreisen 31421

KXD 31321, 31923

LLasonic 30627, 30798, 30789

Lawson 30768

Lecson 31533

Leiker 30872

Lenco 30651, 30699, 30713, 30770,

30774

Lenoir 31228

Lenoxx 30690, 30838

Lexia 30699, 30768

LG 30591, 30741, 30790, 30869,

31906

Lifetec 30651, 30831, 31347

Limit 30768, 31104

LiteOn 31058, 31158

Lodos 30713

Loewe 30539, 30511, 30741, 30885

Logik 30713, 30884

Logix 30705, 30783

Luker 31367

Lumatron 30695, 30705, 30713, 30741,

30833, 31115, 31321, 31832

Lunatron 30741

Luxman 30573

Luxor 30713, 31004, 31695, 31730

MMagnasonic 30651, 30675

Magnat 31923

Magnavox

30503, 30539, 30646, 30675,

30713, 30821, 30885, 31140,

31268

Magnex 30723

Majestic 31345

Manhattan 30705, 30713

Marantz 30503, 30539, 30675

Mark 30713

Marquant 30770

Matsui 30672, 30651, 30695, 30713,

30884, 31004, 31695, 31730

Maxdorf 30788

Maxent 31347

Maxim 30713, 30872, 31367

Maya 31345

MBO 30690, 30730, 31730

McIntosh 31533

MDS 30713

Mecotek 30770

Medion

30651, 30630, 30774, 30783,

30831, 31006, 31270, 31345,

31347, 31423

MEI 30790

Memorex 30690, 30695, 30831, 31270

Metronic 30690

Metz 30525, 30571, 30713

MiCO 30723, 30751, 31223

Micromaxx 31695

Micromedia 30503, 30539

Micromega 30539, 31005

Microsoft 30522, 31708

Microstar 30831

Minato 30752

Minax 30713

Minerva 30705

Minoka 30770, 31115

Mintek 30839, 30717

Mirror 30752

Mitsubishi 31521, 30521, 30713, 31403

Mizuda 30770, 31451

Monyka 30665

MPX 30843

Mustek 30730, 31730

Mx Onda 30651, 30751, 31223

Mystral 30831

NNAD 30741

Naiko 30770, 31004, 31367

Narita 31367

NEC 30741, 30869, 31404

Neovia 31271

Nesa 30717

Neufunk 30665

Nevir 30770, 30831, 31197

NexxTech 31402

Nikkai 31923

Nintaus 31051, 31202

Niro 32024

Norcent 30872, 31923

Nordmende 30774, 30831

Noriko 30752

Nova 31923

Nowa 30843

Nu-Tec 31228

OOkano 30752

Olidata 30672

Omni 30690, 30833, 30838, 30862,

31104, 31832

Onix 30838

Onkyo 30503, 30627

Oopla 31158

Oppo 31224

Optim 30843

Optimus 30525, 30571

Orbit 30872

Orion 30695, 31233, 31695

Oritron 30651

Ormond 30713

PP&B 31451

Paciﬁc 30695, 30713, 30759, 30768,

30790, 30831

Packard Bell 30831

Palladium 30695, 30713, 31906, 31920

Palsonic 30672, 30852, 31056, 31321

Panasonic

30503, 30490, 30571, 30703,

31362, 31462, 31490, 31579,

31762, 31834, 31905, 31908

Panda 30717, 30789, 31203

peeKTon 30898, 31224

Philco 30690, 30862

Philips

30503, 30539, 30646, 30675,

30854, 30885, 31158, 31260,

31267, 31340, 31354

Philo 31345

Phonotrend 30699

PianoDisc 31024

Pioneer 30490, 30525, 30571, 30631,

31965

Plu2 30850

Pointer 30784

Polaroid 31020, 31061, 31086

Polk Audio 30539

Portland 30770

Powerpoint 30872, 31005

Presidian 30675

Prima 31228

Prinz 30831

Prism 30705, 30831

Pro2 31345

ProCaster 31004

Proceed 30672

Proline 30672, 30651, 30686, 30833,

31004, 31483

Proscan 30522

Proson 30713

Prosonic 30699, 30752

ProVision 30699, 30730, 31163, 31321,

31923

Pye 30539, 30646

QQONIX 31051

Qwestar 30651

RRadionette 30741, 30869, 31906, 32024

RadioShack 30571

Raite 30665

RCA

30522, 30571, 30717, 30790,

30822, 31022, 31132, 31769,

31913, 31965

Realistic 30571

REC 30490

Redstar 30759, 30763, 30770, 30788,

30898, 31345, 31923

Relisys 31347

Reoc 30752, 30768

Revoy 30699, 30841

Rex 30838

Richmond 31233

Rio 30869

Roadstar

30672, 30690, 30699, 30713,

30730, 30833, 30898, 31051,

31227

Rocksonic 30789

Ronin 30872

Rotel 30558, 30623

Rowa 30717, 30759, 30872, 31004

Rownsonic 30789

SSaba 30651, 3055

Sabaki 30798

Saivod 30759, 30831, 31367

PRESET CODE 

Salora 30741

Sampo 30752, 31321, 31347

Samsung

30490, 30573, 30744, 30199,

30820, 30899, 31044, 31075,

31635, 31932

Sansui

30784, 30695, 30751, 30763,

30768, 31051, 31228, 31230,

31695, 31832

Sanyo 30670, 30675, 30695, 30713,

30873, 31228

Scan 30705, 30850

ScanMagic 30730, 31730

ScanSonic 31695

Schaub Lorenz 30770, 30788, 31115, 31151

Schneider

30539, 30646, 30651, 30705,

30713, 30774, 30783, 30788,

30790, 30831, 30869, 31367

Schwaiger 30752

Scientiﬁc Labs 30768

Scott 30672, 30651, 31005, 31036,

31233, 31423

Seeltech 31224, 31451

SEG 30798, 30665, 30713, 30763,

30872, 30884, 31483, 31530

Sensory Science 31158

Shanghai 30672

Sharp 30630, 30675, 30713, 30752,

31256, 32015, 32024

Sharper Image 31117

Sherwood 30717, 30741, 30770

Shinco 30717

Shinsonic 30533, 30839

Siemssen 31382

Sigmatek 31005, 31224

Siltex 31224

Silva 30788, 30898

Silva Schneider 30831, 30898

SilverCrest 31152

Simaudio 30885

Singer 30690, 30751, 30768

Sistemas 30672

Skantic 30539, 30713

Skymaster 30730, 30768

Skyworth 30898

Sliding 31115

Slim Art 30784

SM Electronic 30690, 30730, 30768, 31152

Smart 30705, 30713

Sonai 30755

Sonashi 30831

Sonic Blue 30573, 30715, 30783, 30869,

31099

Sony

30533, 31533, 30864, 30573,

30630, 30772, 31033, 31070,

31431, 31433, 31536, 31633,

31769, 31981, 32043

Sound Color 31233

Soundmaster 30768

Soundmax 30768

Soundwave 30783

Spectra 30872

Standard 30651, 30768, 30788, 30831,

30898

Star Clusters 31152, 31227

Starlogic 31005

Starmedia 31005, 31224

Stevison 31367

Strong 30713

Sunkai 30770, 30850

Sunstech 30831

Sunwood 30788, 30898

Superscan 30821

Supervision 30768, 31152

SVA 30672, 30717, 30752, 31105

Sylvania 30630, 30675, 30821, 31268

Symphonic 30675, 30821, 31268

Synn 30768

TTandberg 30713, 31695

Tangent 31321

Targa 31227

Tatung 30770, 31695

Tchibo 30741

TCL 31180

TCM 30741, 30790

Teac

30571, 30717, 30675, 30741,

30759, 30768, 30790, 30833,

31006, 31197, 31227

Tec 30898

Technica 31367, 31695

Technics 30490, 30703, 31905

Technika 30770, 30831, 31115, 31695

Technisson 31115

Technosonic 30730, 31051, 31115

Techwood 30713, 31530

Tedelex 30690, 30768, 31004, 31228

Telefunken 30789, 30790, 30833, 31483,

31832, 31923

Teletech 30713, 30768

Tensai 30651, 30690, 30770

Tevion

30651, 30798, 30768, 30833,

30898, 31036, 31227, 31347,

31382, 31483, 31730, 31923

Theta Digital 30571

Thomson 30522, 30511, 30551

Tivo 31503

Tokai 30784, 30665, 30788, 30790,

30898

Tom-Tec 30789

Top Suxess 31224

Toshiba

30503, 30573, 30539, 30695,

31045, 31154, 31503, 31510,

31769

TRANS-continents 30831, 30872, 31321, 31327

Transonic 30730

Tredex 30843

TruVision 31451

Tsinghua Tongfang 31205

TSM 31224

UUmax 30690, 31151

Unimax 30770

United

30675, 30695, 30699, 30713,

30730, 30788, 30884, 31115,

31152, 31228, 31367, 31832

Universum 30591, 30713, 30741, 30790,

30869, 31227, 31530, 31913

Uptek 30763

upXus 31345

Urban Concepts 30503, 30539

US Logic 30839

VVenturer 30790

Vestel 30713, 30884, 31530

Victor 31597

Vieta 30705

Viewmaster 30862, 31224

Voxson 30690, 30730, 30774, 30831

Vtrek 31228

Waitec 31151, 31224, 31233

Walkvision 30717

Waltham 31530

Welkin 30831

Wellington 30713

Weltstar 30713

Wesder 30699

Wharfedale 30686, 30751, 30752, 30790,

31832

Wilson 30831, 31233

Windsor 30713

Windy Sam 30573

WIZE 31115

Woxter 31005, 31151, 31224

XXbox 30522, 31708

Xenius 30790

XLogic 30768, 31152, 31228

XMS 30770, 30788

Xoro 31183, 31250

YYakumo 31004, 31056

Yamada 30872, 31004, 31056, 31151,

31158

Yamaha 30490, 30539, 30646, 30545,

31354

Yamakawa 30665, 30872, 31104

Yukai 30730, 31730

ZZenith 30503, 30591, 30741, 30869,

31906

Zeus 30784

DVD Recorder

14Kus 31158

AAiris 31321

Akira 31321

Alba 31530

Apex Digital 31056

Aristona 30646

Aspire Digital 31168

BBelson 31086

CCat 31421

cello 31730

Centrum 31227

Classic 31730

Coby 31086

Commax 31321

Conia 31321

CyberHome 31129, 31502

Cytron 31347

DDenon 30490

Denver 31056

Digitrex 31056

DSE 31730

Durabrand 31502

EE:max 31321

Ellion 31421

Eltax 31321

Emerson 30675

FFerguson 31730

Firstline 31530

Funai 30675

GGateway 31158

Go Video 30741, 31158, 31730

Goodmans 31530, 31730

GPX 30741

Grundig 31730

HH & B 31421

Humax 30646

IiLo 31348

JJVC 31164, 31597

KKansas Technologies 31530

Kreisen 31421

KXD 31321

LLG 30741

Lifetec 31347

LiteOn 31158

Loewe 30741

Lumatron 31321

Luxor 31730

MMagnavox 30646, 30675

Matsui 31730

Maxent 31347

MBO 31730

Medion 31347

MiCO 30751

Mitsubishi 31403

Mustek 31730

NNEC 31404

OOopla 31158

PPalsonic 31056, 31321

Panasonic 30490, 31579

Philips 30646, 31158

Pioneer 30631

Polaroid 31086

ProVision 31321

Pye 30646

RRCA 30522

Relisys 31347

Roadstar 31227

SSampo 31347

Samsung 30490, 31635

ScanMagic 31730

Schneider 30646

SEG 31530

Sensory Science 31158

Sharp 30630, 30675

Sony 31033, 31070, 31431, 31433,

31536

Star Clusters 31227

Sylvania 30675

TTangent 31321

Targa 31227

Teac 31227

Techwood 31530

Tevion 31227, 31347, 31730

Thomson 30551

Toshiba 31510

UUniversum 31227, 31530

VVestel 31530

Victor 31597

Waltham 31530

YYakumo 31056

Yamada 31056, 31158

Yamaha 30646

Yukai 31730

ZZenith 30741

PRESET CODE



PRESET CODE 

DVD preset codes / Codes préréglés DVD

Model No. /

Modéle numéro

32134 (default / défaut) 30490

DVD-555

DVD-755

DVD-900

DVD-910

DVD-955

DVD-1000

DVD-1200

DVD-1500

DVD-1710

DVD-1910

DVD-1930CI

DVD-2200

DVD-2800

DVD-2800g

DVD-2900

DVD-2910

DVD-2930CI

DVD-3800

DVD-3910

DVD-3930CI

DVD-5900

DVD-5910

DVD-9000

DVM-715

DVM-1800

DVM-1805

DVM-1815

DVM-2815

DVM-4800

DVD-800

DVD-1600

DVD-2000

DVD-2500

DVD-3000

DVD-3300

[ ]z: Preset codes set upon shipment from the factory.

: Les codes préréglés différent en fonctiom des livraison de l’usine.

b1 : These preset codes can be recorded in the SAT/CBL mode.

: Ces codes de présélection peuvent être enregistrés en mode SAT/CBL.

b2 : These preset codes can be recorded in the TV mode.

: Ces codes de présélection peuvent être enregistrés en mode TV.

b3 : These preset codes can be recorded in the VCR mode.

: Ces codes de présélection peuvent être enregistrés en mode VCR.

b4 : These preset codes can be recorded in the DVD mode.

: Ces codes de présélection peuvent être enregistrés en mode DVD.

Denon Brand Company, D&M Holdings Inc.

Printed in Japan 00D 511 4654 101A

www.denon.com

AVP A1HDCI

Denon-Denon-Stereo-Amplifier-Av-Surround-Pre-Amplifier-Users-Manual-221505 denon-denon-stereo-amplifier-av-surround-pre-amplifier-users-manual-221505

AVP-A1HDCI to the manual 63824ed9-1563-4317-965b-723685d5388b

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation